Manual Otis

'0"' .&: M ....' M-'.. a'" n' .. u....ft' .ti, J: , " , : -' , :.1 ".~ Elevators MRVF Elevators FS310 Rasmuson Library 1984 Project Number: RLE 711.3 I , 1l." m TECHNOLOGIES OTIS UNITED Owner's Information Manual MRVF GEARED ELEVATOR .:t .• , ( -- Prepared for .! I MM.109 • OTIS Foreword You have selected the most experienced elevator company in the world to supply your vertical transportation equipment. Otis Elevator Company, the leading manufacturer of elevators and escalators, traces its beginnings to 1853 when Elisha Graves Otis invented the first safety elevator. The efficient and safe performance of your Otis equipment, however, depends as much on the knowledge and skill of those who will operate, monitor and maintain it as on the experienoe of those who manufactured it. Otis provides .many forms of scheduled preventive maintenance, as well as a complete spectrum of repair services, all designed to extend the life of elevator and escalator equipment. With our more than 300 offices throughout the United States and Canada, we can assist all owners in maintaining their equipment for the safest, most reliable performance available. We urge you to contact vour nearest Otis office for any assistanceyou may require with your elevator or escalator equipment. Your closest local Otis Service Office can be reached 24 hours a day, 365 days a year by calling the following teleplione number: • This Owner's Information Manual has been prepared by Otis Elevator Company to give you, the building owner, your building manager or maintenanoe supervisor, data on the operation of all major components of your equipment furnished and installed in accordance with our contract terms, conditions and specifications. It will also give @ Otis .Elevator,Company 1983 MM.!!! Foreword insight into the preventive maintenance procedures that should be performed at regular intervals to maintain the equipment and provide for passenger safety. You, your agents and employees are cautioned that preventive maintenance or any other equipment maintenance procedure - should be performed only by a skilled mechanic for obvious reasons including, of course, the fact that elevators and escalators contain high-voltage circuits and high-speed machinery that pose hazards to the inexperienced or untrained. Please note that the information contained in this Owner's Information Manual is not intended nor should it be interpreted to in an\, way alter, expand, amend, modify or otherwise change the express terms and conditions of the contract and its specifications under which your equipment was furnished and installed' by Otis, including specifically all limitations of liability and the exclusive express guarantee against defects in materials and workmanship provider! therein. Further, Otis hereby expressly disclaims any , responsibility for any personal injury or property damage, including damage to the elevator or escalator equipment, as a result of any negligence, misuse or abuse of the equ ipment, misinterpretation of the information in this manual, or any other cause beyond the control of Otis Elevator Company. '. MM.ll! OTIS. Contents FOREWORD 1. EMERGENCY AND SECURITY PROCEDURES 1.1 1.2 2. Emergency Procedures Owner's Checklist SYSTEM YOUR ELEVATOR 2.1 2.2 System Description Promotional Literature MAINTENANCE 3. PREVENTIVE 3.1 3.2 4. Inspection Lubrication and Cleaning CONTROL SYSTEM 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Controller Position Transducers Controller Relays Batteries MACHINERY 5. ROTATING 5.1 5.2 Motor Brakes 6. FIXTURES 6.1 6.2 6.3 Controls and Indicators Speech Synthesizer Information Display Module 7. DOOR CONTROL 7.1 7.2 MM.115 Door Operator Door Protective Devices Contents 8. HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Rails and Guides Stopping and Limit Switches Traveling Cable Governor and Safety Buffer Ropes APPENDIX A • PARTS LEAFLETS , \ • MM.115 • -;- -, --------~-• • • . situations. earthquake. The proper hand ling of elevators. by contacting local authorities including your fire department for ar:lpropriate advice.power failure and t~e like. Special Emergency Service (SES lFeature • Phase One: Otis' SES is engineered to allow control of elevator operation in the event of fire or other time-sensitive emergencies. Fireman's Service -. Once it is activated or initiated: o Registration of calls is inhibited and calls already in registration are cancelled. and in ooerating controls that initiate emergency routines.that all your building personnel are familiar w'ith emergency procedures suitable to your building structure and all of its equipment.' . insure . in monitoring equipment. or it is automatically activated through tripping of a fire or smoke sensor or sprinkler system installed by you in your building. including elevator and escalator equipment. fire.1 Emergency Procedures State-of-the-art elevator and escalator engineering have developed mechanisms that greatly reduce the risks to life and property in emergency . but building personnel still playa vital role at these times in directing occupants to safety. I r • MM-11? Phase One is usually initiated manually by operation of a hall-mounted keyswitch.1.• OTIS 1. 1. and escalators in an emergency could mean the difference between life and death.1 . in case of accidents. inspections and drills. You should. therefore. . One or more of your elevators is equipped with SES. Automatic Return to Lobby Phase One of SES is designed to capture automatic passenger elevator cars and return them to the lobby or other designated floors. particularly where immediate access to specific building areas or floors may be desirable. so the car can move to the lobby or alternate designated floor. and the car travels non-stop to the lobby or other designated floor. After the car call is registered. 0 0 0 0 0 • Phase Two: Fireman's Use of Elevators Once the car has been brought to the exit floor by SES.Car doors are nudged closed. firemen or other emergency personnel can gain control of the parked car by operating the FIRE SERVICE keyswitch in or adjacent to the car operating panel. Cars already at the lobby or alternate designated floor remain parked. to an alternate service landing.117 1. without stopping.1-2 . allowing passengers to exit the elevator. . 0 • ! The PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOOR OPEN jewel is lighted. with doors open. Then: 0 Car responds only to car calls registered on its own buttons. At the called floor. All cars are ultimately brought to one location and held there ready for use by trained emergency professionals. doors are closed and the car is started by maintaining pressure on the DOOR CLOSE button until the doors are fully closed. Door re-open ing devices are rendered inoperative. Doors are opened at the exit floor. The car cannot be 'stolen' by a hall call registered at some other floor. . . Any car not operating automatically will be given an audible and visual signal to close the doors.Emergency Procedures 0 As authorized by local code authorities: . or if that is the floor at which the fire is involved.j \ 0 ~ I ! . 0 • MM. doors are opened by maintaining pressure on the DOOR OPEN button until the doors are fully open. Cars traveling away from the lobhy or alternate .Emergency stop switches are overriden. non-stop.designated floor will reverse and return to the lobby or alternate designated floor. and by returning Phase One and Phase Two keyswitches to their normal positions. selector switches may be operated manually to bring down each car. in turn. a diesel generator). If your elevator system's Emergency Power Option has an automatic mode and is set to the AUTO mode. normal elevator operating conditions can be restored by bringing all cars with SES to the lobby or alternate designated floor. until one or more cars are selected to provide normal service. the lobby or street floor) and doors will open to allow passengers to leave the car. All Elevator Equipment Should Have SES It is recommended by Otis that all your elevator equipment be equipped with SES if it has not already been installed. After all cars have been brought to the designated floor. After all cars have been brought to the designated floor and evacuated.1-3 . the cars remain parked there. it can be activated as follows: 1) Elevator electric power feeders may be switched from normal to emergency power. or if that mode is not invoked. 2) • MM-117 1. 3) If your elevator system's Emergency Power Option does not have an Automatic mode.• Emergency Procedures Restoration of Normal Service At the appropriate time. each car will be automatically brought down non-stop to a previously designated floor (typically. the cars will remain parked there. Please call your local Otis office for information on its installation .. the selector switch may be operated to choose which car or cars will provide normal service . Power Failure Emergency Power Option • If your elevator system is equipped with an emergency power supply (typically. The total available service is the sum of the individual battery hours. the door-open button remains operative. where each battery pack had three hours of charge remaining. • 1 TM Aut-Q-Safe . brings a hydraulic elevator to an exit floor smooth Iy and safely in the event of a building power failure. emergency battery power operation is activated. o • o • 1. the Otis emergency battery unit. permitting passenger exit.Emergency Procedures "Batte ry-Powered" Elevators An Otis "VF" elevator can run on battery power for up to four hours during a power outage. A four-car group. and the car remains parked with the doors closed for the duration of the power outage. Feature for Hydraulic Elevators TM Aut-O-Safe .1-4 MM. Doors close after a short interval. Doors open automatically upon arrival at the lowest landing.117 . for example. o Upon sensing a power outage. However. could if desired provide elevator service for up to 12 hours during a power outage if building personnel allow only one elevator to operate at a time. causing the car to descend to the lowest landing at normal speed. For the building owner or manager. clean and lubricate the elevator equipmen1 at scheduled intervals. there are a few simple procedures that can often make the shutdown as short as possible . Thus.• ~ OTIS 1. When a shutdown does occur. and provide a smooth" ride in a clean. elevator performance. make a favorable impression on tenants and visitors alike. built for long and dependable service. the pit and cars (particularly the door sills) must be kept free of debris. • .vstem Upkeep General Cleanliness o Trained service personnel should be engaged to examine. the owner can assure the continuously high-quality service for which the equipment is designed. There are.2-1 . plays a significant role in establishing the rental or resale value of a building. Elevators are sturdy machines. By knowing how to assess elevator performance. Ashtrays placed in the building's lobby encourage passengers to extinguish their cigarettes before entering the elevators. What to do in case of malfunctions and how to recognize conditions that require immediate service. minimizing shutdowns involves knowing: o What to do on a daily basis so that serious problems are minimized. 1. however. some areas of general upkeep which are the building owner's or manager's responsibility: • MM-11? The machine room. because of its hiphly visible nature. well-lighted car.2 Owner's Checklist I Elevators that respond promptly to a call for service. thereby cutting down on litter. telephone hookups and emergency lighting systems to be sure they will work if there is an emergency. and will supervise cleaning by the building staff. • o Ride the Elevators Ride the elevator. stop switches. intercoms. or odors. A Dry Pit The pit area must be kept dry and clean. The elevator • owner should never attempt to clean machinery. How To Observe the Operation Of Elevators A member of the building staff should go through the following procedures regularly with each elevator car: o Test the Safety Devices Test alarm bells. 1. " listening to passengers'comments. What To Look For The following nine-point Safety and Performance Check List can be applied on a regular basis to most elevator systems. The service examiner will" alert the building "owner to any water or oil in the pit. the machine room temperature must never fall below 450F (l0C) or rise above 1000F (3aoC). They will probably remark on any shortcomings in elevator service. Close your eyes to increase awarenessof irregularities. paying attention to the smoothness of starting and stopping.manufacturing plants. Machine Room Temperature For proper equipment operation. These conditions may call for frequent cleaning by a service examiner. and "to any unusual movements. vibrations.can"be unusuallv susceptible to dust or grime. o Listen During Rush Hours Stand in the lobby during peak traffic periods. for example . to any unusual sounds (such as squeaks or scrapes).Owners Checklist Some environments -.2-2 MM-117 • . In order to conform to standards. Development 30 60 50 70 90 Secs.Owner's Checklist • o How Long Must Passengers I'!. The speed at which the doors close is also an important safety consideration.117 o If the Doors are Equipoed with a Rubber Safety Shoe. in many cases. o Do the Passengers Have Enough Time to Enter and Exit Before the Doors Close? In most elevators. do the Doors Reverse Direction without Touching Passengers? ' These devices enable a closing door to reverse direction without touching passengers. Secs. • o If the Elevator is Equipped with Electronic Detectors or Light Ray Devices. However. efficient service. one-half to one seco'nd is sufficient if an acceptable door protection device is used. Secs. the minimum acceptable time depends on the number of elevators in the bay and on the distance from a point in the center of the lobby to each elevator. For hall calls. Maximum door closing speed is determined by the weight of the door and the type of door operator emploved. Reversal must take place therefore as soon as the doors near the passenger (if an electronic detector is in use) or as soon as the light ray beam is broken. Times vary and can be longer for elevators that service many elderly or handicapped persons. Secs. • MM. Typical maximum service intervals for . the door should also remain either partially or fully open (depending upon the door operator system employed) until the obstruction is removed from the beam . do they Reverse Direction as soon as the Shoe makes Contact with a Passenger? 1.aitfor an Elevator at the Lobby? Well-timed arrivals and departures. Luxury Apartments.3 .various applications are listed below: Office Buildings Hospitals Hotels and Motels Apartments.2. as well as proper acceleration and deceleration are critical to fast. The time is measured from notification that a car is arriving by a lantern and audible signal. the minimum a'cceptable time for doors to remain fully open on a car call is three seconds. Secs. Owner's Check list The shoe mechanism should operate as soon as the rubber makes contact with an obstruction causing the closing door to immediately reverse direction and open completely. • o Does the Car Stop Level with the Hall Floor? The car should stop within one-half inch of the hall floor. whether the car is full or empty. or to remain open as long as contact with the rubber shoe is maintained. but often frightens a potential criminal into fleeing the premises before accomplish ing any mischief. During an emergency. This quick and simple procedure will guarantee that the bell will work when and if it is needed. The bell not only alerts building personnel to an emergency. Failure to reverse direction. the alarm bell will ring when the Stop switch is flipped. o Is the Alarm Bell Connected to the Stop Switches? When this anti-crime measure is implemented. At these times. communication with passengershelps to alleviate or avert panic. and all diffusers clean to oermit maximum transmission of light. o Is the Interior of the Elevator Adequatelv Lighted? Check that all light switches are on. Officials sometimes shut down a car for such violations.Up.117 . • 1. o Is the Alarm Bell in Working Order? The alarm bell should be tested once a week. is it in Working Order? Intercoms and telephones should be tested regularly. Leveling should be consistent.2-4 MM. • o If the Cabshave an Intercom or Telephone Hook. constitutes a code violation and a safety hazard. Passengers can be spared inconvenience when minor mechanical difficulties occur by following instructions received over the intercom or teleohone. information from passengers can be of great assistanceto emergency personnel. all lamps lighted. are minor problems that need only be noted and reported to the service examiner on the next visit. however.117 1. Safety is always the first concern. Tinkering in the machine room or hoistway is . When Shutdown is Necessary When a problem appears to threaten passenger safety. Door timing that is slightly off. the car involved should be shut nown and serviced immediately. In many cases. or floor indicator lights that no not work.". Elevator machinery is not to be serviced by people who lack the necessary training ann expertise. this check list will minimize unnecessary shutdown and help the service company provide faster service. for instance. f'~ I" • Owner's Checklist In Case of Malfunction Before Calling for Service The following points should be checked for service on a disabled car: o o o o o before calling Is the Stop switch in the Run position? Are the key switches Are there obstructions Is full power available? Is the main-line fuse in the machine room blown? in the correct position? in the door track? When these items are checked ann the car still does not run. and may be detrimental to the elevator itself. • MM. to the passenger.hazardous to the person working on the elevator.2-5 . a service call should be placen immediately. Building personnel should monitor car operation. but should leave more complex tasks to the experts .". • Minor problems require neither a shutdown nor a service call. 2.117 .6 MM.Owner's Check list CHECKLIST FOR OWNER'S INSPECTION • • 1. • • . .' • • . I I • OTIS .1 System Description "- MACHINE ROOM • / UPPER HOISTWAY AND CAR LOWER HOISTWAY AND PIT r • MM-121 Figure 2. 2. Arrangement. MRVF Elevator System 2.1-1 .1-1.~. Roller guides. Battery charging current is obtained from regenerative power during overhauling loads. wherein the arc of contact between groove and rope is considerably greater than with the single-wrap arrangement. the elevators continue to run on battery power. from the single-phase building supply at other times. which is part of the hoist machine. flexible coupling. The car is moved by the action of the hoist machine turning the drive sheave.System Description The principal components of your MRVF elevator installation are shown in the cutaway view of Figure 2. Either sliding guide shoes or roller guides. These hoist ropes go up and around a large. Counterweighting makes it easier for the hoist machine to lift the car. affixed to the top and bottom of each upright. passenger car is mounted to a carframe.2 • • • • MM. The primary power source for the drive system is a 16-cell bat. and can do this for several hours. and deflector sheave. are affixed to the top and bottom of the counterweight frame to hold the counterweight against the guide rails. hold the car on the rails. cast-iron pulley called the drive sheave. It is suspended in the hi:>istway between steel guide rails. During a building power outage. The car is supported in the hoistway by several wire-rope cables called hoist ropes. plus a crosshead above the car and a plank or safetY channel beneath the car. 2. a solenoid-controlled disc brake. also increases the traction. all mounted on a common bedplate. From the drive sheave. The counterweight weighs as much as the elevator car loaded to about half its rated capacity.121 . The car is composed of strong.1-1. the hoist ropes go down and around a deflector sheave (so called because it deflects the ropes from the center to the side of the hoistway) to the top of the concretefilled counterweight. depending upon the application. The machine consists of an alternating-current motor. suspended in the hoistway between Tee-shaped guide rails. The "long wrap" employed. until the battery-pack voltage falls below a preset value.1. lightweight panels that incorporate the principles of honeycomb construction developed for the aircraft industry. The carframe that supports the cab and platform is of conventional construction consisting of two upright members. The drive sheave grooves are fitted with polyurethane liners which increase the traction between grooves and ropes. drive sheave.tery pack. helical gear reduction. The. '. DEFLECTOR SHEAVE DRIVE SHEAVE MAIN CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRAL GROUP CONTROLLER BATTERY PACK BREAKER CIRCUIT HOISTWAY UPPER LIMIT SWITCHES BRAKE ROPES & COUPLING • COUNTERWEIGHT HOISTWAY SWITCH CAM CAR FLOATING TAPE TAPE READER DOOR OPERATOR DOOR DETECTOR CAR OPERATING PANEL ROLLER GUIDE TRAVELING CABLE • " MM.3 .121 Top Section of Hoistway 2.System Description • REDUCTION GEAR . This is a device in the main controller which converts the battery voltage into an alternating current of an amplitude and frequency specified by a predetermined speed profile. A car-mounted position reader contains switches. The main controller also determines direction of travel as a function of car position with respect to calls in registration. actuated by vanes mounted on "floating tape" in the hoistway. MM-121 o 2. Initiate door opening.System Description CIRCUIT BREAKER j • • Battery Cabinet • a proximity perform The motor is driven by a solid-state inverter. through the main controller. when the car is 3 inches from the floor.1-4 .i Initiate deceleration from rated speed when the car is "stopping distance" from the called floor. The main controller generates the speed profile and enforces it through tachometer feedback from the motor. which the following functions: o o Sense the floor at which the car is located. I ! . and generates commands which open and close the car and hoistway doors. System Description • i I FLOATING TAPE . variable-pitch leadscrew. • • •• .. . . a proximity-type protective device fastened onto the front edge of the car door. 2.1-5 . The door detector.. initiates re-opening of the car and hoistway doors if a passenger or obstruction is sensed in the path of the closing doors. • VANES . e.. The controlled horizontal motive force necessary for door operation is supplied by a motor-driven. POSITION READER • Car Mounted Position Reader A power door operator opens and closes both the car and hoistway doors simultaneously in response to commands from the main controller. • MM-121 Power and control signals are carried between the car and the main controller by traveling cables attached to the bottom of the car. The emergency slowdown switch will initiate an emergency stop if the car exceeds a predetermined speed at the terminal. Its function is to coordinate the response of all cars in the group so that only one car starts for any hall call. The final limit switch will Initiate an emergency stop if the car approaches the buffer. A counterweight buffer stops the counterweight's downward motion if the car should move a short way above the top landing. rails. and trips the safety device if the car overspeeds in the down direction.' i ~ I ~ 'I I The buffer is a large hydraulic shock absorber that slows down and stops the car if it moves past the bottom landing. the car safety will grab the steel guide.System Description The governor senses the speed of the car. The direction limit switch will initiate an emergency stop if the car overshoots the terminal landing by more than 2 inches.1.6 .121 2. at top and bottom of the ho istway. The following sections of this manual provide more detailed information on maintaining and adjusting the parts of the elevator system described above. A series of four limit switches. quickly and firmly stopping the car. are actuated by car-mounted cams in the following order: The normal terminal stopping device initiates a slowdown sequence that becomes effective if the car has not already started to decelerate at the terminal landing. 1 '1 o • A group controller is furnished as part of the main controller whenever there is more than one elevator in the installation. and the average time to respond to the call is minimized. • MM. Additional passenger protection following components: o is assured by the . independent of the normal braking device. When tripped. ~.1-7 . I HOISTWAY LOWER LIMIT SWITCHES COUNTERWEIGHT GUARD GOVERNOR GOVERNOR FRAME System Description HALL LANTERN POSITION INDICATOR ROPES AND TENSION • COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDE RAIL POSITION READER TAPE HITCH PIT EMERGENCY SWITCH COUNTERWEIGHT BUFFER CAR GUIDE RAIL BUFFER Bottom Section of Hoistway • MM-121 2. • • • . resulting in a high level of passengersatisfaction. preventive maintenance consists of three elements: o Inspection of the items listed in Table 3-1. top of car.when repair and adjustment can be made with least expenditure for time and replacement parts. an experienced examiner can often uncover and correct a problem in its early stages. as described in this manual. below. to minimize wear between mating surfaces. MM.123 3. Cleaning of machine room. Lubrication. will curb depreciation and improve both the appearance and performance of your elevator installation. • o o The virtues of regular cleaning and lubrication are well understood. Perhaps just as important. This table lists those indications of substandard performance that can be corrected by following the instructions given in the later sections of this manual. following the instructions in Table 3-2. frequent shutdowns are avoided and service is optimized. and equipment to prevent the build-up of dirt and grime that could impede the smooth functioning of mechanical elements.'.' . As described in this section. and to promote smooth operation.1 Inspection A regular program of preventive maintenance. By following the procedures in Table 3-1.OTIS J" 3. Less appreciated are the advantagesof a thorough inspection of the complete elevator system. . Examine tubes for breaks in the enamel. 2) Wires . 3. Lubricate as required. or loose connections. inspect battery cases. or residual magnetism. 3) Resistance Tubes. Replace if necessary.4. Inspect for loose connections and check resistances.Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST MACHINE ROOM Items To Be Inspected Controllers 1) Application/Notes • .Check main line and operating circuit fuses to be sure they are of proper size.' Fuses . Replace broken resistance tubes with tubes of equal value. remove corrosion if present. 6) Switch Pivot Points. Examine switches for weak springs. loose lugs. 5) Walking Beams . Timing of Relays . tension. .Check for proper operation. • Caution: Follow procedures in Paragraph 7) 8) Reverse Phase Relay .(Up/Down and Wye/Delta Interlocks) Check condition and adjust as required.1. Clean and adjust for proper spring Replace all burned or worn contacts Do not furnish or replace contacts on sealed or enclosed relays.Examine all wiring for breaks.Clean up.Adjust to provide the best possible riding quality in the car. Pins and Bushings Examine for excessive wear. Replace entire relay as a unit. 2) Spilled Electrolyte . 4. Batteries 1) Connections.2 MM-123 . Replace battery if case is cracked. Check that clips are clean and tight. 4) Contacts. with new parts. Check tightness of connections. If oil-soaked. In hydraulic installations. Linings . 4) Bea. Undercut mica if required.1. Check clearances between rotating element and fields for proper air gap.Check for proper spring pressure. Be sure to check all grounds and bonding of all conduit. high bars or pitting is apparent.Lubricate at intervals specified in Table 3-2.Inspect lining.• Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST MACHINE ROOM Item. Check for proper type and grade of all brushes.G. 2) Armatures and Commutators. Good brake adjustment is largely responsible for the life of the equipment. and movement in the holders. set. locate and eliminate the lubricant leak. Grind commutators if they are out of true. or if high mica. more frequently if motor is subjected to more severe conditions than usual. 2) • MM'123 3.3 .050 inch wear . clean and paint armature and fields at the same time). 3) • Brake Bearings .(Not applicable to CT types) Where possible check for wear (replace if worn. To Be Inspected Motors and Motor-Generators 1) Application/Notes Brushes . and that there are no cracks or breaks in the brush stem insulation.Check adjustment. Clean. motors operating submerged under oil in the storage tank should not be pulled for routine inspection. flat spots. and the controller frame. Change disc-brake pads after 0. Change drum-brake lining if worn to the point where rivets can come in contact with the pulley. See that the holders are securely fastened. and replace the lining. Connections . For best results the element should be removed. thoroughly. etc. 5) 1) Adjustment . seating. cleaned and painted with insulating varnish.Tighten motor and field connections. the M.ri"-9Lubrication . Worms and Gears . and sheave rim bolts should be tight. . Replace belts in sets when 7) Windings . Check hose tank and valve connections for leaks. Blowout frequently with dry air.'-4 MM-123 . 5) Tank . A rough or scarred pulley should be turned down.Check for air gap and wear. Ventilate as much as possible. clean. required. and studs in disc brakes should be free of rust and/or paint.Keep belts adjusted for proper tension. bearing. Be sure that gear rim bolts are tight.Keep free of dirt. Hydraulic installations where motor is mounted outside Table 3-2.Foundation. of tank.in shoes. Pins . and only where pump is outside of tank. Lateral Thrust Bearing . • 3. Be sure proper oil level is maintained in tank. Machines 1) End Thrust Bearing . capscrews. Hydraulic installations only.Axial motion of sheave shaft should be within required tolerance. Pins.Check condition and lubrication. levers and cores of drum brakes should be cleaned and lubricated. but must not be lubricated.Axial motion of worm should be within required tolerance. water and oil.Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST MACHINE Items To Be Inspected ROOM Application!Notes • 3) 4) Contacts .Check bolts (if used).Check hoses for leaks. 5) Coupling . 6) Pump Drive Belts . 4) Bolts . and see that the armature and worm shafts are tightly clamped with keys and keyways in good condition. Check cotter pins. Refill with lubricant as specified in '2) 3) • Hydraulic installations only. .peeled Governors 1) Jaws . are probably bottomed. To Be In.Check wear to be sure jaws will grip the governor rope properly. Remove all friction. Sheave Bearings . TABLE 3-1. Replace when tread smooth. Remove all dirt and rust from tape and lubricate per Table 3. See that jaws work freely and easily.Inspect for evidence of unequal wear that indicates need for equalizing rope tension. Correct by raising the governor spindle and installing new bearings as required.Check lubrication. INSPECTION CHECKLIST SECONDARIES AND OVERHEAD Item. Tape Sheaves .Inspection • . Note condition of tape. clean contacts and adjust if necessary.2 . 2) Tripping Speed and Operation of Field and Potential Switches Check with a tachometer. with the center of the grooves. • MM. and that the rope is in line Application/Note. 3) Gears .5 . 2) Polyurethane has worn 3) 4) Groove Inserts.Gears.l23 3. if noisy.Inspect bearings for wear. • Sheaves 1) Rope Grooves .1. burnt Be sure that out lamps. Examine for wear. To Be In. globes are fastened.Check for worn tracks and rollers. and lubrication of fan. Emergencv Exits. Push Buttons and "Alarm" Replace worn buttons and switches. Check for cleanliness.1. Replace if cracked The use of glass in the car should be Car Operating Devices should not stick. the threshold. and the possibility of the guides coming out of • 3. Examine for broken springs and loose connections. Check opening of exit and 3) Lighting and Fans.Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST CAR ENCLOSURES Item. making certain that door cannot its guides Or jam at any point.Inspect for worn. come out of 3) Bottom Guides. and the "Stop" buttons should work properly. Indicators • Position Indicators and Pilot Lights should be tested for proper operation and checked for burnt out lamps or poor contacts. Car Door 1) Contacts ~ Examine fastenings and check range of door opening. 2) Hangers . or broken. looseness.pected Application/Note. • Car 1) 2) Flooring . 4) Fixture Jewels and Lenses. or loose flooring.6 MM-123 .. switch if provided. in accordance with codes. or obstructions that may prevent good operation.Inspection • I .123 Spring Tension . align and adjust for quiet and proper opening and closing speed. operation Lubricate operation. or Wiring . I TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST TOP OF CAR Items To Be Inspected ApplicationlNotes Car 1) Fastenings . switch 2) Adjustment . uTurn_ln H - 2) Inspect all rope connections for proper babbitting.Be sure that safety operated will function when governor trips. Clean. 2) 3) Steadier Plates' Check and tighten. nuts and lock nuts) . 2) Adjustment. friction. Operators Doors and Door 1) Wear . Examine cotter pins. levers. Guides . Lubricant should be applied sparingly. check nuts and Adjustment . (see Lubrication Section) and test Safety Operated 1) Switch for chafing and wear. pins.Examine thoroughly for wear. Carrier Releasing 1) • MM.1. • .Ropes should be properly lubricated (see Lubrication Section). proper clearances and Shackles 1) and Ropes tension to be sure ropes are shackle. for wear. (Check all set screws. See that rope has not "lost its lay" where it enters the socket or thimble.7 . keys.See that releasing carrier will operate properly if governor trips.Check adjustments. 3) Lubrication .Inspect deterioration of insulation.Check equalized. 3.Check all tie rods and bolts. important that all lock failures be repaired without delay. Adjust electric operators properly. Apply rope lubricant sparingly..1. Examine each door carefully. Examine outside coverings for wear. Try doors to see if they can be opened without releasing the catch. Check contacts and the point at which the contact closes. especially on high speed installations. See that elevator doors are not blocked open. Interlocks . clearances and tightness of bolts and screws to avoid future shutdowns. Traveling Cables 1) Fastenings . 4) .8 MM.or open with the car outside the range of the lock. Be sure that bumpers are in place and in good condition. guides. if necessary. Check for broken glass or structural defects.Check terminals and fastenings of supporting wires at center junction boxes.It is extremely Hangers ~ Examine for proper operation. kind and size of rope for each machine. Look for abrasion from concrete or steel supports. upthrust adjustment and condition of guides in bottom of doors. Carefully check springs. bases. fingers. 3) wear. 2) Lubrication (see Lubrication Section) . repairs should be made at once. • 2) bushings. lubricate and inspect all pins. Hoistway Door and Operation 1) Adjustment. Check tracks for wear and alignment. Wear.1 . • 3.123 . etc.'. Try to pull or lift the do.Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST HOISTWAY (FROM TOP OF CAR) Items To Be Inspected Ropes I) Application/Notes • Condition ~ Check type. and tighten all fastenings. Clean. If lock is worn or door has sagged so that latch does not engage properly. for wear. 2) Condition. 2) Tighten. Check directional switches by running car to top and bottom limits at slow speed. and cotter pins are in place. and that nuts.123 . and Cams limit Switches 1) Rollers. if necessary. Application)Notes Conduit C~eck fastenings and inspect to be sure that the conduit has not pulled out of the fittings and that duct is securely fastened to wall. and check • 3) Rope Fastenings. rail fastenings and fish plates for loose bolts.Check for wear.• Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST HOISTWAY (FROM TOP OF CAR) Items To Be Inspected 5) Door Closer Springs ~ If doors have been in use for some time and the proper operation earmot be obtained. Counterweight 1) Guides . Check for wear and replace if they do not engage cams properly. • MM. Check operation of UP final limits. Rods and Nuts. See that all rope connections are properly made. it may be necessary to change the spring to a different size. cotter pins. Wiring. check nuts. Test Operation. 2) Contacts ~ Check direction limits to open properly for type and speed of elevator. Clean when required . Be sure that all connections are tight. See that all switches and cams are in correct alignment. proper clearances and adjustment. 3) 4) Rails Check brackets. 2) Fastenings' Check for loose nuts and bolts. Clearances 1) Pit of Counterweght . Check pit and striking will blocks to be sure that the counterweight land before the car strikes the overhead. 3) Switches . and tape. being sure that spring returns properly.10 MM.Run car at slow speed on buffers.Check contacts and operation of all switches.Check to determine whether or not ropes should be shortened. Sheaves (Tape and Governor) 1) Bearings' Check for wear. PIT Items To Be Inspected Buffers and Springs 1) Operation . especially those of tension frames. See that tension frame clamps are in place and tight. 2) • Governor Tension Frames .123 .Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST . • 3. the governor 2) Fastenings of a/l Frames and Screens. If traveling cables can catch in springs. weave and Application/Notes • bind No.1. 14 wire on side nearest to traveling cable. including limit. The key is to be left only with a local code~authorized person. To Be Inspected ApplicationlNote. and see that all screws are in place If lights are used.123 3. buttons. • • MM.1. 1) Hall Buttons . Its use by people unfamiliar with elevators may result in an accident if the door is opened when the car is not at that floor .Check for broken or sticking and plates properly fastened.Check operation of keys on doors arranged for their use.Inspection • TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST HALLWAYS Item. inspect for proper operation.11 . 2) Emergency Door Opening Keys . pected Safety Devices 1) Shoes and Safety Jaws . then a standard safety test at slow speed should be performed. Traveling Cables Check anchorage and be sure cables do not drag on hatchway wall when car is traveling.12 MM-123 . To Be In. and be sure that all Application/Note. clearance 'and adjustment. • • 3. All equipment should be thoroughly and after making the test.1. inspected before Guides Check for wear.If a recent safety test is not a matter of record.Check clearance between shoes or blocks and the rails. Check all machine screws in links and rods. Be sure and check local code requirements.Inspection TABLE 3-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST BOTTOM OF CAR Item. 2) Governor Test of Safety . nuts and kuys are in place and tight. • pins. or oil must be dissolved. normal precautions should be taken: • o o Use only in an adequately ventilated area. and are highly recommended. When dirt. The cleaning compound. of low flammability and toxicity. as well as the frequency with which this must be done. As with any solvent. All information given in Table 3-2 is based upon average operation and conditions.2-1 . Otis Spec No. as well as the lubricants listed in Table 3-2. lists those items that must be cleaned and lubricated on a regular basis.• OTIS 3. and safe to use on a wide variety of materials. • MM-123 3. This compound is a petroleum product. Wear gloves to protect hands from prolonged exposure to compound. When an aste(isk is shown for the lubrication interval in Table 3-2. Table 3-2. These products can be ordered from Otis Elevator Co. selected because it is an effective cleaner. is recommended. have been selected after extensive experience in the maintenance of elevator equipment. by specifying the part numbers given in the following chart .2 Lubrication and Cleaning The Cleaning and Lubrication Schedule. lubrication of that particular part is dependent upon intensity of service and local conditions. the use of Cleaning Compound.2. grease. No. No. Otis Spec.419540 VP-821600 VP-419775 VP. 36 Door Check Oil.419805 VP-419820 Vp. No. Otis Spec. "Otis Spec.2. 43 Wire-Rope Lubricant. Otis Spec. NO. Otis Spec.Purpose Grease.2. No.Lubrication & Cleaning ABBREVIATION IN TABLE 3. No.419750 DPO 35 HF Oil BFO HGO WRL 36 41 42 43 60 • • 3.2 Oil BFO MPG WGL 2 10 12 33 Bearing Oil. 42 Helical Gear Oil. Otis Spec. Otis Spec. 33 Dashpot Oil.420240 VP-419330 VP.2 FULL TITLE ORDER NUMBER • Cleaning Compound. No. NO. No. 12 Worm-Gear Lubricant. Otis Spec. 41 Buffer Oil. 60 VP-420540 VP-418790 VP-418935 VP. 10 Multi. Otis Spec. MM-123 . 35 Hydraulic Fluid. Otis Spec. No. No.2 Buffer Oil. Otis Spec. 269 and 339HT machines) Disc Brakes Transducers Primary Position Transducer Tape. LUBRICATION SCHEDULE INTERVAL LUBE CLEAN LUBRICANT CHECK REFILL WGL MPG WGL HGO MPG 33 12 33 43 12 1MO 6MO * 1YR 6MO 4YR 2YR 4YR 2YR 6MO 6MO 1YR 2YR 1YR 2YR MPG 12 6MO 1YR 2YR 2YR Hydraulic Machines Tank Pump. if outside tank HF 36 MPG 12 MPG 12 lMO 1MO 1MO * * * * * * * 4YR * • Motors and Motor-Generators Bearings. Toothed Primary Velocity Transducer None Oil 2 None Oil 2 None DPO 35 . 219.2.3 .123 3. if mounted outside tank Pump Motor.2. 1MO 6MO MPG 12 6MO * 2YR 2YR * * 6MO Oil MPG 2 12 1MO 1MO * 1YR 1YR None 3MO * • MM.• EQUIPMENT Machines Geared Machines Worms and Gears Gearshaft Bearing Sheaveshaft Bearing Helical Gearbox Pedestal Bearing Gearless Machines Sheaveshaft Bearings Lubrication & Cleaning TABLE 3. Hinge Pins Covered or Sealed Relays Dashpot Overload Relays Brakes Drum Brakes Hinge and Lever Pins Magnet Cores (except 155. Ball and Roller Controller and Relay Panels Open-Frame Relays. jaws or gear segments.2-4 .2.Bearings. LUBRICATION SCHEDULE • INTERVAL LUBE CLEAN REFILL EQUIPMENT LUBRICANT CHECK Sheaves Overhead (Machine Below) Bearings. ball and roller Compensating Bearings Governor Rope Tightener Bearings. sleeve . Hoist Safeties. Car and Counterweight Hinge and Link Pins. Pivot Points. MPG 12 Oil 2 6MO MPG 12 6MO * 2YR 2YR MPG 12 6MO 2YR 2YR MPG WGL MPG 12 33 12 2WK 2WK 6WK * * * * 1MO 2YR 2YR MPG 12 6MO 2YR 2YR MPG 12 Oil 2 MPG 12 1MO 1MO • !': MPG WRL 12 60 2WK 2MO * * Oil 2 1MO 1YR 1YR Oil 2 3MO * 6MO 2YR 2YR • MM. Ball and Roller Secondary (DWT Gearless Machines) Bearings Deflector Bearings with grease cups Bearings with oil cups Bearings.123 3. ball and roller 2: 1 Bearings.Lubrication & Cleaning TABLE 3. ball and roller Hinge pins CAUTION: Do not allow lubricant to drip onto rope. ball and roller Tension and Idler (Governor and Tape) Bearings with pressure fittings Ropes. Actuating Screws and Tail Rope Drum Bearings on Safety "" Hinge and" Link Pins on SafetyOperated Switch Governors Bearings. 2. Door Operator Types 7770A and OV L Gearbox Arms.• EQUIPMENT Guides aml Shoes Roller Guides Guide Pivots Lever Pins Roller Shaft Hinge and Link Pins Operating Fixtures Lubrication & Cleaning TABLE 3. Hoistway "Slipit" * Oil 2 Oil 2 3MO 3MO • "Halo Light" Mechanical-Button Pushbutton Guides CAUTION: Use only a small amount of powdered graphite.5 .123 Door Interlock Pins and Pivots Oil 2 3.2. pivot points Check Unit (7770A) Type 7777A Clutch Vane Assembly Pivot points on Vertical Pin Pivot points on Horizontal Pin Shaft. Nylon Roller Leadscrew Door Hangers Bearings Door Tracks Threshold Guides Powdered Graphite 6MO * MPG 12 Oil 2 Oil 41 6MO 1MO 1MO * 3MO * 2YR 2YR MPG 12 Oil 2 Oil 2 None 3MO 6MO 6MO 3MO 3MO * * * 6MO MPG None None 12 1YR * * 6MO • MM. LUBRICATION SCHEDULE LUBRICANT CHECK INTERVAL LUBE CLEAN REFILL Oil Oil 2 2 6MO 2MO 1MO * Sliding Guides (for round rail) Stopping and Limit Switches. 000 Lb Gross Load BFO 10 BFO 42 3MO 3MO * * NOTE: 8e certain that buffer is filled to gauge level. LUBRICATION SCHEDULE • INTERVAL LUBE CLEAN REFILL EQUIPMENT LUBRICANT CHECK Buffers Below 18. and may contaminate the oil.Lubrication & Cleaning TABLE 3. • • 3.000 Lb Gross Load Above 18. even if gauge reads full. Always check oil for impurities if pit has been flooded.2-6 MM.123 . * Lubrication is dependent upon intensity of service and local conditions.2. CAUTION: Water from a flooded pit can seep into buffer. • • • . . plus some motion control and logic functions.1 . in the middle portion of the cabinet. consisting of a speed regu lator. I.127 4. consisting of a pulse-width modulator.• OTIS 4. plus a printed-circuit board containing a base drive circuit for each of the transistors. and interfaces to the elevator controller and safety circuits. The cardfi Ie contains: • o an Inverter Control Board. Each of these main components is described below. The hinged relay panel. The three-section transistorized inverter supplies variable-frequency.1-1. Each inverter section consists of two high-power transistors with associated free-wheeling diodes and suppressors mounted on a common heat sink. A four-board cardfile. develops control signals for the inverter. next to the inverter. and the logic required to protect the inverter transistors from damage due to malfunction. three-phase power to the AC drive motor. Hall effect (current-sensing) devices and input filters are located behind the hinged panel. a torque control.1 Controller The main components of the MRVF Drive System are housed in the controller cabinet of Figure 4. a current regulator. o a Speed Dictation Board which provides the reference speed profile that dictates the actual elevator speed. . a Speed Control Board. ~MM. o o a Frequency and Amplitude Control Board which provides the reference three-phase control signal of variable frequency and amplitude that dictates the corresponding currents in the three-phase motor windings. f The outboard Cardflle Power Supply includes the safety relays that disconnect the transistor base drive power supply each time either a normal or emergency stop is made . .1. contains a complete operation control. j} THREE-SECTION TRANSISTOR IZED INVERTER • @ D RELAY PANEL HALL DEVICES INPUT FILTER • 6.SPEED CONTROL 3 .INVERTER CONTROL CARDFILE POWER SUPPLY 2 ..... MRVF (30FR) Controller Layout • MM-127 4..SPEED DICTATION . 0-" \~" BATTERY DISCHARGE RELAY f----'W] .1-2 .FREOUENCY-AMPLITUDE CONTROL 4 .• ! \ 0 b 0 dDDC: MAIN POWER SUPPLY BATTERY CHARGER W/TRANSFORMER CHOKES IN SERIES W/MOTOR WINDINGS Figure 4.1-1.Controller BATTERY-DISCHARGE RESISTORS CARDFILE PC BOARDS 1 ..'. The speed of a three-phase induction motor depends upon the frequency of the AC power applied to it.1. 120 x • MM.127 . the motor rotates at • 120 x freguency . . the motor speed would be only 900 rpm: The no-load speed of the motor is called the synchronous speed. 120 59 xT.1Hz at maximum torque. the number of poles. one . and . 1770 rpm 4. number of poles 120 xJ2Q.Controller • The lower section of the cabinet contains a battery charger. Assuming a 1 Hz slip frequency. 1800 rpm 4 If the supply frequency were reduced to 30 Hz.3 . The slip increaseswith load. and three chokes.1 4 . empty car down). and the load conditions. its speed changes by an amount called the slip speed (in rpm) or the slip frequency (in Hz). When the drive is motoring. that is.in series with each of the motor . when power is fed to the motor for acceleration and for driving a positive load (full load up.slip freguency number of poles speed.a 60-Hz source driving a four-pole motor. source frequency . Operating Principles The MRVF system uses a four-pole AC induction motor driven from a variable-frequency power source. windings. reaching a maximum value at full load. When operating without load. The MRVF system maintains a slip frequency of. a DC-DC inverter that supplies power to the main elevator drive. When the motor is placed under load. For example. the motor speed is directly related to the supply frequency. motor speed is less than synchronous speed and the slip frequency is given as a positive number.:!. 120 x 60 . if a 60-Hz supply frequency is applied to a four-pole motor operating at no load. the speed of the motor is greater than the synchronous speed and the slip frequency is given as a negative'number. A separate charger maintains the battery at full charge during motoring and shutdown. Accurate positioning at the floor requires the ability to operate near zero speed. that is. while the building power lines need supply only the lowMM-127 • • 4. the efficiency of an elevator motor depends upon its ability to regenerate power. Finally. when the motor acts like a generator. Using a storage b. variable frequency and amplitude. The MRVF system utilizes the 'regeneratedpower to charge a storage battery which servesas the principal source of energy . which is a function of precise frequency control. and may reach approximately 30 percent of maximum power during motoring.attery as the principal power source has three important advantages: o The battery provides the high currents needed during acceleration and deceleration. Maximum regeneration occurs at maximum speed and at a slip frequency of approximately 1 Hz. The frequency and amplitude are controlled by the inverter to produce positive slip (corresponding to positive torque) when power is to be taken from the battery for motoring.to operate the elevator. the elevator car is propelled by an AC induction motor driven by a battery-powered inverter. The inverter changesthe DC output of the storage battery into three-phase AC power of smoothly.Controller When the drive system is regenerating. returning power to the source during deceleration and when driving an overhauling load (empty car up.1-4 . which requires precise control of torque (a function of slip frequency and current) and smooth change of speed (a function of smooth change of torque). and negative slip (corresponding to negative torque) when regenerated power is to be used to charge the battery. motor speed during regeneration is 60-(-1) 4 61 120 xT = 1830 rpm •• 120 x Precise slip control is essential in elevator applications. A comfortable ride depends upon smooth acceleration and deceleration.1-2). As shown in the system block diagram (Figure 4. full load down). Assuming a -1 Hz slip frequency and a 60-Hz source driving a four-pole motor. MRVF System Block Diagram • o o Motion Control level average power required for keeping the battery charged. Block Diagram The MRVF motion controller makes the car follow a speed command produced by the speed dictation circuit and automatically produces the torque required to provide the acceleration and losses corresponding to each point on the speed trajectory.1-5 . the peak currents delivered by the battery during acceleration and deceleration could reach:!: 150 amperes. As a typical example. . Further. The battery also acts as a low-pass filter. the battery is capable of running a single elevator for approximately four hours during a power outage. a DC voltage proportional to the extent of the error. • MM-127 The speed regulator compares the speed dictation command with the actual speed of the motor as determined by the shaft encoder. as a source of emergency power.1-3 shows how this is accomplished.• 'DA STORAGE BATTERY VF CONTROL (INVERTER) Controller TACHOMETER Q)B Q)C AC BATTERY CHARGER Figure 4. keeping any inverter-generated noise out of the building lines. The battery thus practically isolates the drive system from the building power lines. 4. The difference between these two input signals becomes the speed error. while the average charging current could be in the range of 10 to 15 amperes. The motion control block diagram of Figure 4.1-2. INVERTER HAll / "CHOKES DEVICES • Figure 4.. amplitude and slip control. 1) The amplitude control signal is a 0-8VDC voltage that specifies the peak ampl itude of the three-phase motor current.) The slip control is a positive voltage during motoring. The slip control signal is a O-j.Control/er • CURRENT REGULATOR SPEED FEEOBACI( TRANSISTOR PROTECTION LOGIC CURRENT FEEDBACK ELEVATOR MOTION CONTROLLER INTERFACE CIRCUIT r--------.1-3. 2) Torque control circuit constants are chosen so that the torque developed by the drive system is linearly proportional to the input voltage (speed error). Motion Control Block Diagram The torque control converts the speed error voltage (and an internal "bias" related to the motor . The amplitude-frequency control produces three reference sine waves. (The slip frequency is the difference between the synchronous and asynchronous'speeds of the motor for a given frequency of input.1-6 . a negative voltage during regeneration. excitation current) into two torque-related signals. i t£'"i eo HZ lPH I I I Y I I BATTERY I J CHARGER I I L. each representing the desired current level in one of the three phases of the drive • MM-127 4. The relationship is independent of motor speed.5VDC signal that specifies the slip frequency of the motor. The pulse width varies with the amplitude of the input so that. All three sine waves are of the same amplitude and the same frequency. the reference frequency is the sum of the slip and feedback frequencies. The frequencv of the reference output is determined by the 0-:t5VDC slip frequency command and the motor shaft frequency as determined by the speed feedback shaft encoder.. as follows: When the input sinusoid passes through 00 ~Qv :-_P-cP-c:P-cFtJ o--~L1:T%~ . each pair specifying the current level to be produced in one phase of the drive motor. The frequency of each pulse modulator output is constant at 2KC (500 microseconds between pulses). in each pair. During regeneration. 1) The amplitude of the reference output can be varied from 0 to +10V. The pulse-width modulator converts these sinusoids into three pairs of variable-width. The reference frequency is the difference between the slip and feedback frequencies during motoring. These variable-amplitude sinusoidal outputs specify the current level required in each phase of the drive motor. in proportion to the 0-8VDC amplitude input control signal. but are phased 1200 apart. 2) • The current regulator compares the three-phase current reference signals from the amplitude-frequency control with the actual drive motor current as measured by Hall effect devices that sense the current in each leg of the drive motor.. the pulses are mirror images of each other. constant-amplitude pulses. Controller motor input.r500 USEe-t • MM-127 4. Each of the three regulator outputs is a sinusoid that represents the error (difference) between the two current regulator inputs .1-7 . Controller When the input sinusoid readies a positive peak e. ; L\ Va 0- J When the input sinusoid reaches a negative peak 0-_1 The pulsed signals control the operation of power transistors in the inverter. These transistors switch power between the battery and the AC induction drive motor. During regeneration, .AC power from the motor is inverted to DC and used to charge the battery. During motoring, power is applied to the motor from the battery. The inductance of the motor and the series chokes serves to filter out the 2.KC high.frequency component of the motor current so that the current builds up to the commanded level at a sinusoidal rate. • o~ A 3D.microsecond dead band is provided between the edges of the two complementary pulses, to be sure that one set of transistors' has had time to turn off before the other set is turned on. The deadband prevents the simultaneous conduction of two transistors in the same leg of the inverter, a situation that could cause a dead short across the battery and a potentially destructive current surge through the transistors. 0- 04.1.8 • MM.127 ,. Controller Special Operational and Motion Control Features The MRVF system incorporates the following unique features. Battery Operation During Power Outage Elevator service is not interrupted by building power fai lure. The elevator continues to run on battery, and can do this for several hours, until the battery voltage decreasesto al1Proximately 150 volts. Each MRVF elevator can provide normal service up to four hours without a generator after the building loses normal power. The total available battery back-up time is the sum of the individual battery hours. A four-car group, for example, where each battery pack had three hours of charge remaining, could if desired provide elevator service for up to 12 hours.during a power outage if building personnel allow only one elevator to operate at a time . If battery voltage falls to less than 150 volts, automatic controller circuits will call the car nonstop, at reduced speed, to the main landing, light the PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOORS OPEN jewel in the car, open the doors to permit exit of passengers at the main landing, and shut down the car, leaving the doors open. Manual reset is required to restore the car to operation after a low-battery condition. Releveling • A heavily loaded car will occasionally overshoot the floor by up to 1.5 inches. Upon detection of th is condition, releveling circuits will wait approximately 1/4 second to allow for dropout of relays in the drive logic unit, and will then bring the car back to within 1/2 inch of the floor. Anti-Stall Circuits • MM-127 Monitor circuits, in operation during both the .acceleration and deceleration portions of a run, .will initiate remedial action if a stall condition is detected. Should the elevator fail to reach a minimum speed of 30 fpm within 5 seconds of receiving the start signal, monitor circuits will drop safety link relays 4.1-9 Controller C, CX, CY, DRR, B1R, and B2R, shuttin9 off the drive. After a short delay, the start sequencewill repeat, giving the drive another try. Should the elevator fail to reach floor level (:t 1/2 inch) within 5 seconds of dropping the URO or DRO relay, the monitor circuits will drop safety link relays C, CX, CY, DRR, B1R, and B2R, shutting off the drive. After a short delay, the safety link relays will be re-energized and the car will relevel into the floor at approximately 10 fpm. Wrong Direction Sensor e. .. If the direction of rnotor rotation is opposite to that of the dictated direction, relay WRO will pull in and self hold. This will drop out relays C and CX, stopping the car. As a precaution against the possibility that WRO should prematurely release, relay CY stays in, preventing C and CX from pulling in. Note that this is a different function from that of the J or reverse-phase relay used in controllers powered from three-phase sources. The conventional J relay operates upon loss of one of the three-phase input lines, or phase reversal from the A-B-C sequence, or low voltage on any or all phases. The MRVF system, which derives primary power from a single-phaseline, does not use a J relay. • Adjustments The following precautions should be considered before attempting any adjustments: o MRVF circuits seldom require readjustment. Do not perform any of these procedures unless a need for readjustment is indicated as. described in the following paragraphs: Apply power in the following sequence: 1) Close disconnect switch on wall. 2) 3) 4) Close circuit breaker on battery cabinet. Turn on COS toggle on controller (Figure 4.1-4). Turn on toggle on cardfile power supply (Figure 4.1-4). o o 4.1-10 Turn off power in reverse sequence. MM-127 • Controller DPU (AI DPU IBI DPU (CI POWER ON ••• OLU (CARDFILE) LIGHT I' ~ ~ L.. __ POWER ~ .ITOGGLE OFR1 DFR2 DFC1 DFC2 HSB HSA • cos PPS 250V DODD I:::~ D I F4C D CJ DPS 32V D DCAP _ / )/4A I 294 D I ----FUSES THRU TERMINALS TBO, 1 THRU o D 1, BL TERMINALS 300 . 319 320 - 339 II 121i EJ E] DO DC OF2D ;0; BCU ~~~ DJF1D ';5A 250V O.5A 0 0 0 FUSES o -0 LAMP '. FUSE 1A, 250V • MM.127 Figure 4.1-4. Fuse, Control, and Indicator Locations 4.1.11 Controller POTENTIOMETER Pl "'-.. • ADJUSTMENT POINT . .~ r:I TIll' "' ~ ' . :"~'l'.,.~-O. u... ~a ,,~, o. '+.. .•• ". . ---=' ~ • ~,--. "C.i-_-~J '0 ::~-~-~~~ O. Al • o ,ta a ~a a • ........,.. POTENTIOMETER P2 ClO' 0 0 - •••• • • ~.IU tt. <:60.. • ' .. L Battery Voltage and Current CI. • ... ..0 g::~o:r::: II: C'O Figure 4. 1-5. L oadweigh ing Board Building power lights the indicator lamp on the battery charger unit, BCU (Figure 4.1-4) once the wall disconnect switch is closed. When this lamp is on, and the batteries are almost fu lIy charged (ammeter reads less than one ampere, indicating that the rate of charge is tapering off), perform the following procedures: 1) 2) 3) Place vacuum-tube Set ADJ VOLTAGE reads 220VAC. Set ADJ CURRENT voltmeter across battery pack. • POT screw until meter POT to mid position. Perform this procedure have been installed. Loadweighing just after new batteries The load measuring device is a load cell mounted under a foot of the machine. The cell is connected to a printed-circuit board in a metal box on the machine structure. Connections to the controller from this box provide circuit input voltage and a scaled output to the mother board. The printedcircuit board has two potentiometers, one for offset adjustment at balanced load, and another for gain adjustment at full load. Loadweighing potentiometer P1 should be readjusted after a buffer safety test or a buffer application, or if the loadweighing cell has been changed. Loadweighing potentiometer P2 should be readjusted if the car sags upon brake lift, or if leveling accuracy is poor at heavier loads. 4.1.12 MM.127 • • Controller 1) Place the positive probe of a digital vacuumtube voltmeter on pin 11 of TB1 (Figure 4.1-5), and the negative probe on pin 12. . With balanced load in car, adjust P1 for OV. 2) 3) With car empty, adjust P2 so that car does not sag on startup. Scaling Adjustment This adjustment sets the maximum car speed in both normal and inspection operation. One setting adjusts for both modes of operation. 1) Turn on wall-mounted rlisconnect switch, circuit breaker on battery cabinet, COS switch on controller, and toggle switch on Drive Logic Unit power supply. (See Figure 4.1-4.) Neon indicator next to COS toggle lights up. Red LED above Drive Logic Unit power supply toggle switch lights up . Place digital voltmeter between test points SFB and GND on the Frequency and Amplitude Control Board 82110. (See Figure 4.1-6.) Make a full-speed run and record maximum meter reading. It should be slightly less than 9V (nominally, 8.8V). Move digital voltmeter leads to test points SR and von Speed Dictation 80ard 8211 E. Locate scaling potentiometer on Speed Dictation Board 8211E. (See Figure 4.1-6.) The potentiometer is a black, disc-shaped unit, marked "0", "50" and "100" around the edge, with an arrow on the rotating element. Make a full-speed run and adjust scaling potentiometer so that maximum voltage on digital voltmeter matches reading taken in step 4. 2) • 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Speed Detector Panel (SOP) • MM-127 This panel acts as an independent speed detector to satisfy the elevator code requirement that static drive systems be prevented from exceeding 150 fpm with the doors open. It also backs up the normal terminal stopping device, initiating an emergency stop if speed reduction does not occur 4.1-13 which consists of a 24. 4. Both relays are energized (and both indicator lamps go on) when input power is applied.tooth gear rotating at motor speed in a magnetic field. as shown in Figure 4. & AMPL.14 MM.1..1. The panel (labelled "Dual Speed Switch") is mounted to the rear wall of the controller cabinet. The sensor. •• POWER ON LIGHT POWER TOGGLE • Figure 4. Carofile Test Points and Adjustments as the car nears a terminal. each with its own relay output and indicator lamp. red LED). ..Centroller ~ __ ~_~_~ INVERTER CONTROL 82118 _~ SPEED CONTROL 8211C SPEED DICTATION 8211 E SCALING POT • FREQ. CONTROL 82110 ~ .. The panel contains two separately adjustable frequency detector circuits. the other monitors at high speed for the slowdown backup (relay K2. The speed detector panel receives pu Ises from a sensor mounted on one end of the motor shaft.127 • . . generates pulses at a rate proportional to motor rpm.6. One circuit monitors at low speed for the code requirement (relay K1.1-4. green LED). ZA for OVDC meter 2) 3) 4) 5) Move positive probe of VTVM to test point Rotate potentiometer reading. and wall disconnect switch in that order. 6) 7) Move positive probe of VTVM to test point Rotate potentiometer reading. Place digital VTVM between test points IA and GND on Inverter Control Board 8211 B. One eighth to one quarter turn clockwise should be sufficient.1-4) and power toggle on Drive Logic Unit (Figure 4. Adjustment requires use of an extender board between the Inverter Control Board B211 B and Mother Board 8211 A . check that K2 drops out (and green LED goes out) on a full-speed run. ZC for OVDC meter IC. The potentiometer associated with K 1 is factory-set and should not require re-adjustment. The potentiometer associated with relay K2 may need a slight increase in setting if emergency stops occur while slowing down at a terminal. if relay does not drop. (See Figure 4. ZB for OVDC meter lB. battery cabinet circuit breaker. After re-adjustment. Turn off Digital Logic Unit power toggle. a slight counterclockwise adjustment of the potentiometer is required. battery cabinet circuit breaker. COS toggle. Phase Sensor Circuit • Perform this adjustment if one of the Hall device current sensors has been replaced. COS toggle on controller (Figure 4.• Controller o Relay K 1 de-energizes and the red LE D goes out at a motor speed of 360 rpm (car speed of approximately 70 fpm).) 1) Turn on wall-mounted disconnect switch.1-15 .1-4) in that order. 4. Rotate potentiometer reading. • MM-127 8) Remove VTVM. o Relay K2 de-energizes and the green LE D goes out at a motor speed of 1600 rpm (car speed of approximately 320 fpm).1-6. This check is particularly important after a new set of batteries has'been installed. • 2) Fuse Data WARNING: SOME AC VOLTAGES ARE 325 VOLTS. If the voltage remains low. Turn on COS toggle on controller. the battery charger voltmeter should read between 205V and 225V (the higher voltage early in the morning). t MM. ' Check fuses with voltmeter or ohmmeter as indicated in Table 4. Use care when checking fuse voltages to protect yourself and the equipment.16 .8V to 5. Meter should read between 30Vj34VDC. 1) With the car standing at the floor.127 4. measure from 32V to 32V return terminals. recheck the setting of the 8attery Charger Unit adjustments.) After approximately 2 hours of intensive service with heavy loads. depending upon the state of battery charge. if the voltage drops below 185V. Refer to Figure 4. and after an undervoltage shut.Controller Maintenance Power Su pply Check • Turn on wall disconnect switch. measure the following voltages on the PPS: Measure Between Read Voltage 1) 2) 3) 4) 5V to 5V return 24V to common 48V to common 4. Periodically check the condition of the battery pack and the battery charger. However.2VDC 22V to 26VDC 45V to 52VDC 5) 6) Battery Charger Check Amber light on 8CU should be lit. Using multimeter.1. Using multi meter. down has occurred.1. troubleshoot the 8attery Charger Unit and the battery pack. Turn on battery cabinet circuit breaker.1. (Meter will read less than 1 ampere if batteries are fully charged. and the ammeter should read between 1 ampere and 2 amperes. the battery voltage should decreasesomewhat.1-4 for location of fuses. Neon lamp adjacent to toggle should light. 270VDC FlO.2 F12.2 F3. 250V .32V Check with power off continuity power off 4.4 F2C.2 Fl0-2 F 11.2 F4-2 F5.l DPU Resistor 80x BCB F4C F4C BCB 180.2 F4C.5A. FUSE DATA Measurement Circuit Data flead Between No.'-'.2 Check with F5C.270VDC F4C.250V 30A.l F2D. 200A 20A Time Delay 180. each fuse with power off Located in Battery Cabinet Circuit across • HPI 8 DMA CDC BDC DO SEL SON DU? SOP HPI HR8 LWB PPS F5C Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FlO Fll F12 lA.2 8CB Check continuity across fuse with power off 180.Controller • Circuit TABLE Rating AmpNolt 4. 250V 6A. 3500#.5A. 250V 0.2 and PPS F1C F1C F2C F2C F3C F3C FlO F2D 6A. 250V 1.4 HLl HLl HL1 I-iL 1 HL 1 HL 1 HL1 HLl HL 1 HL1 HLl HLl continuity power off • MM. 250V 30A.130V 5V F5C-2 Fl-2 F2.270VDC F1C. 250V lA. 250V BCU Check continuity with DPS 4A.4 30A. 3000# 2500# . Volts + F1C.2 F8-2 F9.5A.127 1.250V Check continuity Breaker.4 BCU 325VAC F2C. 150A.2 F6-2 F7.1'17 . 2A 6A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A lA lA lA lA lA 250V 1l5VAC ll0VDC 110VDC 110VDC 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 48VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC +130V .250V 30A. 2000# . 250V 30A. YL~ .-: Q 302 ~ ~ as • PES '9' J ESR 9 ~ HES 7. and ey are made by the safety chain.1-2. .L.: ~. ex... .J'---~O~1J. 71~ 1 265 263 5 7 ~14 Figure 4. Safety Chain MRVF Safety Chain HL1fTBO Relays e.'5 104 R2 '06 .. E2S1 2188 251 CBT-I AUNY C L-i.Jl:: 261 2 -~~ I 3J 266 I ~GOXA <I D1Z a2Z LGO. o • MM. The Emergency Stop function is normally kept closed by the Drive Logic Unit. Note that this Emergency Stop function is in addition to the STOP button on the car operating panel and machine room.--'~ 103 EM STOP I 1 99 l2TB~ 2T~~ 101 TAK2 2~3 GSl ~~~E OS OS --. FROM 1 COS 2 ~o--:-G.J . 250 246 ' ~~ r:::-:" DLU(USII WRD 9 = ~'l I 257 ~--' A ex "R ... POS r~.127 4.1. DISCONNECT \ ~ .1-18 .. o Wrong Rotation contact WRO is closed unless the motor rotates opposite to the dictated direction..7. A'T 9 c 8 '\ " 1 AUDX 71 GO I r-~I1----OS 4 • 2S9 2&3 I 255 • I 8AK2 I AUOX 9 6 L...1-7 and Table 4.. I:.---.~JY .. PES 303 30' lESl E1S1 21 252 2TB7 'P .~ 22 21 / 2TB!.L: 301 _ r. (See Figure 4.) Note that the path to potential switches e and ex includes three contacts that are unique to the MRVF system.Controller CONTACT MOUNTED SWITCH ON WALL. "Controller Reset". If any of these three contacts shou Id CX will drop. controller cutoff switch. open.• TABLE 4. switches are shorted out during Fireman's Service 4. SAFETY CHAII\I COMPONENTS SYMBOL NAME FUNCTION COS • OCS LaS L7S Cutoff Toggle Switch on Controller Cabinet Contact on Battery Charger Disconnect' Switch Counterweight Governor Switch Top Final Limit Switch Bottom Final Limit Opens when flipped down during maintenance operations Opens when disconnect on wall is opened switch Opens if counterweight overspeeds in down direction Opens if car approaches overhead Opens if car approaches buffer Switch pas PES Pit Door Switch Stop Opens when Opens when door to pit is opened Stop Switch Pit Emergency Switch Emergency down in pit is toggled EEC Emergency Contact Exit Opens when emergency exit panel in" car is opened Opens when safety jaws clamp rail SOS Safety-Operated Switch Top-of-Car Emergency Stop Switch Emergency Switches Stop • MM-127 TES Opens when Emergency Stop Switch on top of car is toggled down Open~ if Emergency Stop Switch in These El S1 E2S1 car is toggled to Stop position. It may also be necessary to operate the RESET button as explained in the paragraph entitled. Controller' o The third contact. or the off position. is closed unless the car fails to slow down near the terminal.'-2. C and the problem momentarily ES. to the and then back to the on position. K2 on the Speed Detector Panel.1-19 . COS. and will stay out until is corrected and service is restored by operating the emergency stop switch. initiating an emergency stop Closes when car is stopped Relay energizes. LGOX OZ Leveling Permit and Auxiliary Relay Closes when car is between 1/2 inch and 3 inches from floor Closes when of floor Permissive car is. CY RUNY WRO and Auxiliary Run Auxiliary Wrong Rotation Relays Relay Relay Drops when safety chain is opened. .Controller TABLE 4. SYMBOL SAFETY CHAIN COMPONENTS. CONTD. if motor rotates in direction opposite from dictated direction Relay drops 320 fpm if car speed exceeds K2 Terminal Slowdown Relay on Speed Detector Panel (SOP) L4S Top Emergency Slowdown Limit Switch Opens when car is 42 inches from upper terminal Opens when car is 42 inches from lower terminal L3S Bottom Emergency Slowdown Limit Switch AUO Access Up or Down Relay Top Access Key Closes when is operated either access keyswitch • TAK Closes when access keyswitch at upper landing is turned to either U or 0 position Key Closes when access keyswitch at lower landing is turned to either U or D position Opens when fully closed Opens when closed hoistway door is not BAK Bottom Access OS Door Interlock GS Gate Switch car door is not fully OLU Emergency Stop Opens when commands Drive Logic Unit stop an emergency LGO.1-20 Brake Lift Relays for brake lift .'-2. CX. dropping C and ex relays.l within 3 inches Door Zone Relays . FUNCTION NAME • OS Car Governor Switch Potential Switch Opens if car overspeeds direction in down C. MM-127 BR 4. . opens doors to permit passengerexit. Be sure disconnect switch on wall is closed. The specific condition causing the shutdown is indicated by the lighting of an LED lamp on the Speed Control Board 8211C. batteries should have charged to approximately 200V. Once batteries have charged to 200V. Open circuit breaker on battery cabinet. then parks. Restore service by pressing the RESET button on the Speed Control Board.21 .127 4. Restore serviLJ by first recharging batteries as follows: 1) Open toggle switch on Drive Logic Unit (cardfile). as described below: o Overspeed lamp OS liqhts when shutdown is due to car exceeding the maximum permissible speed in either inspection or normal operation. and power toggle on Drive Logic Unit (cardfile) in that order.1-6. COS toggle. (See Figure 4. The elevator travels non-stop to the main -landing. Undervoltage lamp UV lights when shutdown is caused by low battery voltage. charging current after an hour should be approximately 4 amperes. Close circuit breaker on battery cabinet.1. Take elevator out of service if battery voltage drops below 185V . o • 6) 7) 8) • MM.) Restoration of service requires a reset operation. press RESET button on Speed Control board. then turning the COS switch off and on. After approximately 1 hour. Perform "Battery Charger Check" as previously described in this section.Controller • Controller Reset Internal monitoring circuits will initiate shutdown upon detection of certain abnormal conrlitions. 2) 3) 4) 5) Turn off COS toggle switch on controller. 1-22 MM-127 . • 2) 3) o If current fault lamp CF is lit. Check setting of battery charger controls. and those in disconnect switch and battery cabinet circuit breaker. F3C. have reset procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company. Check batteries. check battery charger itself.Controller If batteries 1) fail to charge: Check fuses F2C. • 4. • . • MM.2.025 inch of car movement.2.129 The heart of the PPT is an opto'electronic device that can detect down to . Primary Position Transducer The PPT is driven mechanically by a perforated selector tape connected to the car.2:1-) is used in place of the electromechanical selector to give the location of the elevator in the hoistway.• OTIS 4. TAPE SHEAVE (SPROCKET) GUARD PRIMARY POSITION TRANSDUCER • TOOTHED STEEL TAPE Figure 4. and a second sheave mounted either on the pit floor or off the main rail. dflPending on the rise and speed of the elevator. Position Transducers Primary Position Transducer (PPT) The Primary Position Transducer (PPT.inch sheave mounted in the machine room.1.a 20.1 .. 4. and two tape sheaves. Figure 4. A train of pulses from the PPT is fed to the car controller where the pulses are decoded into the exact position of the car in the hoistway.2. O P. P2 P3 P' Pl0 Pl0 Pl0 Pl0 Pl0 P'O Pl0 Pl0 P'O Pl0 P'O P'O Pl0 P'O Pl0 P'O 35 P rx Y 36 IV A • 5 6 7 B '2 13 • 3' k os P6 P7 PB P12 P'3 Pl' P15 P'6 P'7 P'B P'9 IA BOO IB90 J IJ K 32 1 29 h P. X P. 10 and 14.O Pl0 P'O P. (+1 1 2 3 • . remove the A1-J2 connector and check voltages directly at CEPS output pins 6. If necessary. the PPT unit requires no internal adjustment or maintenance.3-B. then to the Car Electronic Power Supply (CEPS). SIGNAL SIGNAL TRACING A3-TB1 (+) (-) • RANGE 7.11VOC PPT P9A P9B CEPS +BVDC 9 P'O " 10 6 BV Return -BVDC -7.O Pl0 Pl0 P. • 27 • MM-129 4.2-2 .O P'O " 15 16 17 lB 19 30 j IK B IB ABO IA90 2B . readers incorporated in the unit. Check for the presence of the :!"BVDC power supply voltages at the PPT terminals listed below. If not present at the PPT.7VDC Pl1A PllB " Pl0 Continuity of the wiring between the PPT terminals and the transducer I/O card edge connector should also be verified. Therefore. SIGNAL TRACING SIGNAL PPT (+1 A3-TB1 llDCR (-) 1/0 I-I Pl0 Pl0 P'O Pl0 P.Position Transducers Maintenance The PPT is sealed to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating the optical.O P'O Pl0. trace the power supply voltages back to the car controller terminals. Inner Door Zone inductors IOZ1 and IDZ2 (again.1 (IDIZ) No. Secondary Position Transducer (SPT) Otis Type 7145D The Secondary Position Transducer (SPT. • NO. The SPT consists of four car-mounted inductor-type transducers actuated when a hoistway-mounted vane slides through the "U" of the transducer. Secondary Position Transducer The car is in the outer door zone (12 inches from floor) when both IOZ1 and ODZl (or IDZ2 and ODZ2) are actuated. To prevent unnecessarypull on the tape. and the fault is not in the relay itself.2-2.2.3 (DD2Z) No.7 """f.. check that the SPT is receiving +24VDC. 2 (DDIZ) TRANSDUCER No. Figure 4. Tape drive and tension sheavesare carefully aligned to prevent rubbing of the tape.. This door zone information is fed to the car controller as a double-check on whether door operation will be allowed. The car is in the inner door zone when both the IDZ transducers are actuated. one for each direction of travel) are actuated when a stop has been picked up and the car is 18 inches from the floor.. Maintenance • MM-129 The SPT is a sealed unit. Outer Door Zone inductors ODZ1 and ODZ2 (one for each direction of travel) are actuated when a stop is picked up and the car is 12 inches from the floor. If the IDZ/ODZ relay is faulty..2-2) detects when the car has entered the outer and inner door zone regions around the floor. then check all wiring to the 4. requiring no adjustment or maintenance.3 . "~ '. Position Transducers • The steel tape used with the PPT should be kept clean and a light film of oil put on the surface that goes over the sheaves. . 4 (ID2Z) Figure 4. keep the drive and pit sheavesclean and properly lubricated. mounted proximity switches which are actuated by the steel vanes. Terminal landings contain only two vanes -. test each transducer element separately by moving the car at inspection speed towards the floor and noting whether the output drops to OV at the distance from the floor given in the table below. and a reader device which rides on the car crosshead.14 K11. the entire SPT must be replaced as a unit.13 Kll.2. 4.15 K11.18 inches Hoistway Position Reader Type 7575Y The Type 7575Y Hoistway Position Reader (Figure 4.16 +18 inches +12 inches . DISTANCE TRANSDUCER TEST POINT FLOOR FROM IDll ODll OD2l ID2l K11.a stop pickup vane and a door zone/leveling vane.12 inches .Position Transducers transducer elements per the straight diagram. If a faulty element is discovered. The floating steel tape is hole-punched to accommodate the installation of steel vanes in three colums: VANE • COLUMN 1 Stop pickup vanes for the down direction of travel Door zone/leveling vanes 2 3 Stop pickup vanes for the up direction of travel Intermediate landings contain up and down stop pickup vanes and a door zone/leveling vane.4 • MM-129 .2-3) uses a 3-inch wide "floating" steel tape which runs the length of the hoistway. The reader device contains front. If none of the above discloses the location of the fault. 2-5 .--------..DZ UL US Down Stop Pickup Down Leveling Door Zone • MM-129 -- Up Leveling Up Stop Pickup 4.I I • Position Transducers . UL~ PERFORATED TAPE SUSPENDED IN HOISTWAY DOWN STOP PICKUP VANE (EXCEPT AT TOP LANDING) l I US~ G3= DZ DOOR ZONE/LEVEL VANE DLIa:' UP STOP PICKUP VANE -(EXCEPT AT BOnOM LANDING) ARRANGEMENT OF PROXIMITY SWITCHES IN READER DEVICE (VIEW FROM CAR SIDE) ARRANGEMENT OF VANES PLASTIC GUIDES • POSITION READER DEVICE MOUNTED ON CAR CROSSHEAD Figure 4.2.3. Type 7575Y SWITCH FUNCTION OS DL D1Z/D2Z o. Hoistway Position Reader System. Emergency Landing Position Reader System • MM-129 42-6 . ARE INSTALLED ON ~ THIS SIDE OF THE FLOATING TAPE. DOWN ELS STOP PICKUP MAGNETS TAPE ELS DOOR ZONE MAGNETS UP ELS STOP PICKUP MAGNETS CAR CROSSHEAD • ALS POSITION READER DEVICE BCO .Position Transducers • TCO MAGNET TOP LANDING AT ALS MAGNETS. IF SPECIFIED.ELS Figure 4.2-4. hence be set for the wrong floor. The stepper switch that keeps track of car positi on could be misaligned at the time that Special Emergency Service (SES) is required. Bring a vane close to the switch. are located by magnet-operated switches (ALS and ELS) that are completely independent of the stepper switch. If the LED fails to light. Therefore. it produces a pulse which advances the floor-position stepper switch in the controller. until it is set at the correct floor. Therefore. Remove the magnet. the nylon guides in which the floating tape rides should be periodically sprayed with "Slip-lt" lubricant. requlrmg no maintenance or adjustment. if necessary. check the +24VOC power supply. first check the wiring between switch and controller. If LEOs for those switches also fail to light. then test the proximity switch as follows: The magnet-operated switches (ELS and ALS) are tested with power off. • MM-129i . if specified. the alternate emergency service landing (ASL).7 . The stop pickup switches have an additional function: each time a stop pickup switch operates.) Maintenance • For quiet operation. There is the possibilitY that the stepper switch could become misaligned.2-4. (See Figure 4. correction pulses are generated by magnetoperated switches TCO and BCO in the position reader device. as they ride over magnets mounted off the floating tape at top and bottom landings. check the other switches. test the switch originally suspected as follows: . and note that the LED lights on printed-circuit board A8121AR in the hoistway reader unit. (See Figure 4. the emergency service landing (ESL) and. then check for continuity between terminals (+l and (-).Position Transducers • " The switches initiate the stop pickup and door-open operations.I 4. The vane-operated switches are tested with power on. Bring a magnet close to the switch. If LEOs light for the other switches. an open circuit should exist between (+) and (-). and control the final level of the car.2-4). The proximitY switches are sealed units.2. If a malfunction is suspected in one of these circuits. If the wiring checks out. The correction pulses will advance the stepper switch. Magnet. initiate slowdown.Position .129 4. Maintenance The proximity switches are sealed. check for continuity between siNitch terminals (+) and (-). Transducers 1) 2) 3) Measure +24VDC between terminals (+) and (0) of the switch. and initiate door operation.2. open circuit now exists between the terminals. Magnet-Operated Switches Type F0177BP Car-mounted proximity switches. Type F01778P • MM. • MAGNET PROXIMITY SWITCH Figure 4. Bring a magnet close to the switch.2. Magnet-Operated Switches. Place a steel vane near the proximity switch. The output should drop to OV. except that the switch is actuated with a magnet rather than a vane. requiring no maintenance or adjustment. Remove magnet. Check switch operation with power off. actuated by hoistway-mounted magnets. determine car position.8 .5.operated switches BCO and TCO are tested the same way. and note that an. 4.3. There are no replaceable parts. • MM.3 Controller Relays Reverse.Phase Relay Type 6402F The reverse-phase "J" relay continuously monitors the three-phase input power lines for the following abnormal conditions: o o o Loss of any phase Low voltage on any or all phases Phases reversed from A-B-C sequence • SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT Figure 4. Reverse Phase Relay. initiating elevator shutdown.• !. The failure indicator lights at this time to aid in troubleshooting.3-1 .1.3-') consisting of a solid-state voltage and phase-angle sensing circuit driving an SPDT electromechanical relay. the relay is released. A failure indicator and sensitivity adjustment are provided on the case.l30 If any of the above failure conditions is sensed. OTIS 4. Type 6402F This is a plug-in device (see Figure 4. With three bimetal elements. The The are and entire assembly is sealed in a block-type package. 4.Controller Relays Adjustment The only adjustment required sensitivity control as follows: o is the setting of the • Connect 3-phase power to be monitored to pins 3. Allis Overload Relay The Siemens-Allis overload relay (Figure 4. There no replaceable parts.relay can detect single phase and voltage unbalance conditions in addition to motor overload. Siemens-Allis Overload Relay and Conractor . Failure indicator should light Turn adjustment slowly counterclockwise until indicator light goes out. . If nuisance trips occur. Make sure the A-B-C sequence is followed Turn sensivitity adjustment fully clockwise. and 5.3-2. This setting shou Id be correct for most installations.3-2) ccnsists of three directly heated bimetal elements arranged to operate a single-pole. o o Siemens. The relay has one dial two buttons: • CONTACTOR PUSH TO CLOSE MANUAL RESET OVERLOAD RELAY MANUAL AUTO RESET SELECTOR OVERLOAD DIAL • MM-130 4. turn adjustment slightly further counterclockwise.3-2 Figure 4. the . double-throw form Z isolated contact. bimetal elements are factory-calibrated. ("H") position. Doors and gates are to be blocked open (to prevent someone stealing 'the car). motor and equipment should be at room temperature and all equipment in the normal operating position. are part of the cover assembly. start the stop watch 4. manually close and hold in the contactor 3) As soon as the contactor button is pushed home.3-3 .) • . The following procedure. and the entrance barricaded. CAUTION: Never operate the elevator without the overload relay cover in place. as shown in the chart below: Motor Horse- Rated Motor Power Voltage Overload Dial Setting Motor Rated Motor HorsePower Voltage Overload Dial Setting 200 230' 20 50 44 25 22 18 200 230 460 575 59 51 26 21 • 460 575 Check that the blue button is set to the manual reset. For this test. which checks the trip adjustment. 1) Remove one fuse from the main line switch • MM-130 2) With a stop-watch ready for timing. essential to safe operation of the contactor. The arc chutes. The button will project from the case when properly set. need be made only if a new relay has been installed.Adjustment Controller Relays o o o A black dial for setting the tripping current level A red Reset button A blue button for selecting between manual ("hand") and automatic reset Set the black trip control dial to the required current level. initiating shutdown. Field Test 5 and 10 overload Allow the before starting • 4. • MM-l30 . General Electric Overload Relay Otis Type 6315Y The 6315Y overload relay (Figure 4. then press red reset button 6) With the overload relay set between seconds. The entire assembly is sealed in a block-type package. trip setting can be adjusted between 90 and 1fO percent of the nominal heater trip rating. Current through the motor windings causes the heater elements to radiate heat which. This button adjusts all three phases. forcing open the contact. locked-rotor current corresponding to the motor with which it is to be used. under overload or single'phase conditions. a bimetallic strip common to all three heater elements. Using this button. There is no provision for automatic reset. each connected in series with one phase of the motor input.Controller Relays 4) If the overload does not operate within 10 seconds: a) Pull the main line switch b) Wait for overload to cool c) Turn the black dial to a slightly lower setting d) Press red reset button e) Repeat steps 2 and 3 • 5) If overload operates within 5 and 10 seconds: a) Restore fuse b) Wait for overload to cool. single-phase.3-4 All thermal overloads are tested in the factory for the calculated. The 90-110 button is the only adjustment. is sufficient to bend the bimetallic strip. pump and motor to stop completely the next relevel.3-3) consists of three heater elements. the elevator should trip the in less than 50 consecutive relevels. The manual reset button is the only operating control. Factory-calibrated heater elements are the only replaceable parts. and a normally closed contact. • Controller Relays HEATER ELEMENTS 90-110 BUTTON RESET BUTTON • Figure 4.3-3. 1) 2) Remove one fuse from main line switch With a stop watch ready for timing. The following procedure. For this test. which checks overload operation under single-phaseconditions. motor and equipment should be at room temperature. the wiring diagram symbol for the relay Pl A. the tripping time in seconds and the part number of the heater element used. CAUTION: Never perform this procedure on a hydraulic elevator. Doors and gates are to be blocked open (to prevent someone stealing the car) and the entrance barricaded. start the stop watch switch is pushed • MM. Otis Type 6315Y A record is made of this test on a label attached to the controller in the immediate vicinity of the overload relays. manually close and hold in the motor winding switch As soon as the motor winding home.130 3) 4. should be made whenever a heating element has been replaced. General Electric Overload Relay.3-5 . This label shows the calculated and factory-applied singlephase test current in amps. and all equipment in the normal operating position. Repeat test. Remove a second fuse and repeat steps 2 through 5. should the overload operate in less time than required. if the overload should fail to operate within the required limits.3-6 . • MUST BE INSTALLED IN OVERLOAD RELAY WITH NOTCHES UP / '" 232AP RESISTORS (HEATER ELEMENT) • MM-130 4. Restore the main line fuse and after the overload has cooled. stopping at each intermediate floor on the down trip but not allowing any door operation. the heater element can be changed to the next higher rated unit. a lower rated unit may be substituted.Controller Relays 4) The thermal overloads should trip. reset it and cool the motor by running the elevator a few trips from top to bottom of hoistway without intermediate stops. Motor should not be so hot that it cannot be touched by hand. within 20 to 30 seconds. Repeat for the third fuse to ensure that no matter which fuse opens. trip time being dependent upon ambient temperature. etc. 11) The overload should not trip In step (4). the motor circuit will be interrupted by operation of the overloads Restore all circuitry to normal Reset any tripped overloads • 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Run the empty elevator for three complete round trips from bottom to top terminal. the label on the controller should be modified. Whenever overload heater elements are changed. Similarly. Oashpot.3-4.• • Controller Relays Allen-Bradley Type N-301 Overload Relay. Leonard installation.3-7 . normallyclosed relay. Otis Type 63150 The Type N-301 overload relay (Figure 4.Timed Overload Relay 4.3-4) is a magnetically-operated. The relay coil is connected in the loop circuit between the generator and motor armatures of a Ward. dashpot-timed. The normally closed contact is connected in the safety chain that initiates an emergency stop if any of a variety of actions occurs . • GRADUATIONS OIL PORTS CORE~ • MM-130 Figure 4. An adjustable lid controls the passage of oil through these ports. MM-130 3) 4) 5) 4. initiating an emergency stop through the safety chain. the minimum current required to trip the. respectively. o o Under overload conditions. make this adjustment every 5 years when the full. Dashpot cover (marked THIS END UP) is removed by pulling on core.3-8 • . Connect ammeter in loop circuit. Piston should be clean. and refill with Otis Dashpot Oil No. striking the tripping plunger. If oil is cloudy and/or dashpot is dirty. Re-install cover. o Aj:ljusting the position of the core up or down lowers or raises. Call Otis Elevator Co. covered by steel balls. to perform the equivalent of this procedure in conjunction with the five-year. Oil should just cover the tips at the bottom of the core. NOTE: Elevonic installations require special test equipment for this adjustment. Adjustment With a relay controller Ward-Leonard installation. by swinging the wire . The piston contains two additional ports. the core pops up after approximately l/4-inch of piston travel.Controller Relays The relay has an adjustable core. • '. between generator and hoist-motor armature. 35. and also serves to relieve the oil seal formed in the chambers under the piston.. relay. full-load safety test. the motion of which is retarded by an oil-filled dash pot.load safety test is made. When tripped. which allow it to freely return to its normal position when there is no magnetic pull on the core. clamp forward.2. clean with Otis Cleaning Compound No. The time required for the relay to trip is determined by two small ports in a piston which rides in the dashpot attached to the core. • 1) 2) Remove dashpot as a unit. Oil should be clear and should just cover the tips at the bottom of the core. A manual reset is provided above the core. Three or four light taps with the piston might be required to loosen cover. the normally closed contact opens. empty out oil. then re-install dashpot onto relay. This is the overload trip time. re-install. non-stop. This is the overload trip value. Install full load in car. an almost constant current can be maintained. Add oil to dashpot. 12) Weaken motor field to standing value. 15) If overload trips too soon. Adjust piston (screw down to increase value of current required to trip relay) until relay operates at current calculated in step 9. 13) With full load in car. proceed to step 11. Add 15 seconds to brake-to-brake time determined in step 8. Multiply running current determined in previous step by 1. then momentarily releaseswitch to cause it to drop. To do this. open oil ports slightly. trip current setting must be redone. Measure and record the running current and brake-to-brake time. OR RAISE CORE SO THAT THE LOWEST GRADUATION IS ABOVE TOP EDGE OF DASHPOT.3-9 I . By alternately pushing in and releasing the accelerating switch. until current begins to rise above desired value. • 14) The overload current should trip after a delay equal to the overload trip time calculated in step 10.130 CAUTION: DO NOT LOWER CORE SO THAT SECOND GRADUATION FROM TOP IS BELOW TOP EDGE OF DASHPOT. then repeat step 13. complete generator shunt field circuit and cut out sufficient field resistance until ammeter reads the overload trip value current determined in step 9. NOTE: To maintain constant current. 4. If relay trips too late. 16) If adjustment of check ports fails to set relay to proper time. cover oil ports further. clean and dry. from bottom to top landing.• Control/er Relays 6) If overload trip current and trip time 'are recorded on a tag attached to the overload relay. Send car up. momentarily push in an accelerating switch. • \ MM.5. 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) Prevent brake from lifting. empty oil from dashpot. irregular contact surface may look bad.Controller Relays Maintenance Consistent operation of the N-301 depends almost entirely on keeping the dashpot clean. Clean dash pot and piston with Clean ing Compound No. it should be replaced as a unit. will give many years of service. open-frame relays described in this section have replaceable parts. One more word: when cleaning. A darkened. After the terminals have been replaced. Periodically. check value stamped on coil to be sure of getting the proper replacement. If a coil opens and the broken wire can be located on the outer layers. Open-Frame Relays The small. and painted with insulating varnish. If one of these relay fails. Coil leads are numbered. The odd numbered lead. Metallic contacts should be replaced only when they become thin and begin to warp. in an emergency. The larger. encapsulated or enclosed relays have no replaceable parts and require no maintenance. be very careful not to disturb piston setting by turning piston on screw. be spliced carefully or a few of the wires taken off until the wire again becomes continuous. if kept clean. and protected against mechanical damage and arcing.odd numbered leads go to the stationary side of the contact. Contacts • Contact life can be prolonged by tightening all contact holder screws securely. If the coil is to be replaced. Air dry. Contact leads are numbered . The principal maintainable parts are described below: Coils • These coils. 4. but is still capable of providing good service.3-5). corded.3-10 MM-130 • . cleaning and adjustment (see Figure 4. the body of the coil should be retaped. check wires and copper braids. Inspect at 6-month intervals. Make sure that the coils are firmly supported and that connections are tight. The even numbered lead is the positive side of the relay. Change oil if cloudy or dirty. particularly where constant movement may cause breakage.2. it may. is the one that ties into the common equipment ground. and require periodic inspection. even numbered leads go to the moveable side of the contacts. 5. Be sure that blowout is installed so that the arc is blown up. Adjust carbon contacts to attain maximum contact spring pressure. check current and wipe and compression of contacts.Frame Relay If burning occurs in silver-to-silver contacts. or carbon dust to accumulate on the relay.3. away from the working parts of the relay. Tighten all terminals securely. and the locknut on the stem of the holder tightened securely. Typical Heavy.Duty. • MM-130 Type 6754 and 6830 Switches These switches are furnished with two main making contacts (suffix B) with three main making contacts (suffix A) with two main making and one main breakmake contact (suffix C). Open.3-11 . Carbon contacts should be firmly seated in the holder.• Controller Relays /ARC DEFLECTOR ARC BARRIER • Figure 4. safe snuffing of the arc. but not so tight as to break off the bolt at the base of the holder. copper. allow no dirt. Look also for circuit failure that may have caused an increase in contact current. Arc and ElIowout Deflectors For prompt. or with two main breaking silver-to-silver contacts (suffix D) for series field shunt 4. All contacts on switch arm should make at the same time. • • MM. Intermediate making contacts. for the 6744 switch. Auxiliary contact stationary members are stamped with a letter "5" to designate side with silver inlay. arrangement No. The series field variation of either switch should have 1/16" contact gap with the switch energized and 1/16" contact compression with it de-energized.2. Arrangement NO. If stationary contacts are being replaced. for the 6520 switch.Controller Relays application. Its breaking contact.130 4. it is important to make certain that the proper one is used since current carrying ability of the carbon contact is less than for the metallized type. and the bridging type.3-12 . The A and B variations are each available in two arrangements. For a similar reason auxiliary contacts may be furnished. are available if associated circuits require them. Main making contact compression should be 5/32" for either the 6754 or 6830 switch.3 of the auxiliary contacts is currently required only with the 6754C switch. the only other major variation in switch construction is that the 6744 armature is of the clapper type. either with carbon stationary contacts or with metallized contacts. For this purpose they are furnished with only making main contacts and are either 2 or 3 pole. whereas the 6520 retains the entering core type of construction. between the main contacts. instead of the 1/4" gap used for other auxiliary contact arrangements. as formerly used. Note that the 6810A auxiliary contact assembly has the making member located beneath the breaking member. set driving motors. This one auxiliary contact is arranged for delayed opening to permit applying it to insert a cooling resistor (1000 ohms minimum) in series with the magnet coil--this is done with the 6754C switch. is backed by a coil spring. Type 6744 and 6520 Switches The 6744 switch resembles the 6520 and both switches are designed primarily for use on starters for M. the 6810A type. It is bent at the time of assembly to provide only 1/16" contact gap with the switch energized. Auxiliary contacts may be furnished for any arrangement of either switch except the series field switch variation (suffix D).G:. Aside from this difference and the difference in size. instead of being rigidly fastened. Adjustment • The armature adjusting screw should be set to provide a 1/2" gap for all making contacts on the 6754 switch and a 9/16" gap on the 6830 switch. 341 indicates a self-holding relay with four making contacts and one breaking contact .3-13 • MM. The first digit indicates the type switch as No. a self-holding relay. Four variations of this switch are available: a general purpose magnet relay.4 in the order listed in the table below. It to distinguish and condenseran associated 4. and a definite voltage relay. Thus.130 . arrangement No. 1 through NO. A three-digit arrangement number is used to designate switch type and contacts available. a condenser timed relay. With the switch de-energized.3-6.• Adjustment Controller Relays Both switches are available with silver-to-silver contacts in conjunction with the main carbon-to-copper contacts if the duty requirement is beyond the capacity of the carbon-to-copper contact alone. The 6520 main contacts should have a 1-5/16" air gap with switch de-energized and have 7/32" to 9/32" compression when it is energized . The second digit is the number of making contacts and the third digit the number of breaking contacts. Where used.3-6. The self-holding magnet uses a hardened steel is marked with a groove at the armature end it from other arrangements. • Figure 4. core. the silver contacts provide the load carrying capacity and the copper-to-carbon contacts absorb the arc effects. The self-holding timed arrangements use a kick-off button and coi I spring. the armature gap at the top of the core should be 21/32" for the 6744 switch and its copper-to-carbon contact gap should be 3/4". Type 6164BP Relay Type A6164BP Switch The basic switch is shown in Figure 4. 007 .Controller Releys Winding arrangement of the coils used with these switches is such that. The upper pair of leads are for the inner winding and the lower pair for the outer winding. Adjustment • Setting dimensions are given in the table below: A6164BP Switch Arrg.130 .14 MM.0.012 .0- Pull. facing the switch. the lower left. On four-lead coils. the finishing leads are to the left. the tag should be to the left. No. • 4. the finish lead the upper left. and the tap lead.3/16" . Armature Gap Contact Gap Core Gap Function 1 2 11/64" 3/16" 5/32". the starting leads to the right.3/16" 5/32".ln Condenser Timed Self• Holding Definite Voltage 3 3/16" 5/32".3. the starting lead is then the upper right.3/16" • 4 Adjust Adjust NOTE: Settings for definite voltage relays are dependent on intended operating voltage. On three lead coils.007 •012 . Sixteen of these batteries. Sealed in a polypropylene case. the gelled electrolyte will not leak or spill.350" SOUARE CUTOUT "POSITIVE" _ MRVF "-~ "L" BLADE TERMINALS POLYPROPY~ CASE @@@@@@ {} + /' • MM. SEALED CAPS ~. are installed in the MRV F battery cabinet. and must be treated with respect and care.• OTIS 4.t32 Rigure 4. and the terminals require special connectors (see Figure 4. Gel/Cell Battery 4. even if the battery is left upside down for extended time periods.4 Batteries The Gel/Cell Battery The Gel/ Cell Battery is the lead-acid storage battery used in the MRV F elevator system. this Gel/Cell is not suitable for automotive applications.4-1). Therefore. the electrolyte will become liquid and will then be capable of leaking out if the case is cracked or if the battery is upended. connected in series. The electrolyte does contain su Ifuric acid. The cranking (discharge) current is well below that of the standard automotive battery. The Gel/Cell differs in two important storage battery in your car: o respects from the • o The electrolyte is a jelly-like material rather than a liquid.4-1 . At temperatures above 1400 F.4-1. however._o . above 1440 F or below -76oF. MM.Batteries I CAUTION 10' F TO 140' F I • SAFE TEMPERATURE: Precautions Conditions to Avoid: o Smoking. batteries.132 Skin/Body Protection: 4.4. o o Breathing of fumes from burning battery cases. (released if electrolyte Breathing of silicon dioxide gel is allowed to dry out). or generation of sparks near o o o Use of solvent-type Temperatures cleaning fluid on battery case. Rubber gloves and apron when working with sulfuric acid.2 • . flames. • Any contact with sulfuric acid. WARNING WEAR: RUBBER GLOVES SAFETY GOGGLES HAVE AVAILABLE: SODIUM BICARBONATE WATER SOURCE Personal Protective Equipment: Eye Protection: Safety glasses (goggles) with side shields when changing batteries. may melt and burn. then neutralize further with a mild alkaline solution (baking soda or sodium bicarbonate). burning batteries. but hydrogen gas. Flush affected areas of the body with large amounts of water. Avoid breathing fumes from burning battery cases. Swallowina of sulfuric acid can cause severe injury. Respi ratory irritation may occur 'from excessive breathing of vapors and mists. use sand or ashes. First Aid After Contact with Sulfuric Acid: Sulfuric acid is capable of burning skin. Storage Requirements: Do not stack unless specified. Sulfuric acid is non-flammable. High temperatures could cause liquefaction of the gelled electrolyte with subsequent possible spillage or leakage when the battery is operated in other than an upright position. In case of eye contact. Do not charge at a higher current or for a longer period of time than is recommended. Do not store for more than 24 hours at temperatures above 1400 F or below 100 F (if discharged). If water is not available. Breathing of the silicon dioxide may result in respiratory irritation. Use dry chemical or CO2 to fight fire if acid is present and is near other electrical equipment. flush area with water. Battery should be charged according to instructions. Neutralize the area of spill with sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) . generated when charging.Batteries • Respiratory Protection: Not normally necessary. Area must be ventilated. and all body tissue on contact. since delay can result • MM-132 All contaminated clothing must be removed immediately. is very explosive. Silicon dioxide may be released if the electrolyte gel is allowed to dry out. Spill/Leak Precautions: If electrolyte is released or spilled. Freezing of the electrolyte in a discharged battery could crack the battery case and give rise to subsequent leakage of acid. and possible dr. • Fire/Explosion: If flame is applied. the battery case. or silicon dioxide. but see above on dangers of breathing fumes from sulfuric acid.ying out of the electrolyte. First aid must be started in serious injury_ at once. eyes. Never charge if vents in battery cabinet are blocked. They may be toxic.4-3 . wash the eyes with large quantities 4. All batteries are to be replaced at the same time. call a physician immediately.4-4 .132 4. Turn OFF the battery charger disconnect switch and the battery circuit breaker. For safety's sake. or add water The only preventive maintenance procedure recommended is a periodic check of the battery terminal connections (once during the first three months of operation. A physician. Check that all battery connections are tight. or building steel. should be called immediately. It is not necessary to refresh the electrolyte to these batteries. • MM. If milk and egg whites are not available. preferably an eye specialist. Maintenance • 'I. I . Do not induce vomiting. If the person is conscious. this high voltage is a "floating" (ungrounded) circuit. have him wash out his mouth with large quantities of water. then twice a year). and should be kept that way. Do not use hot water. washing the eye should be resumed for another 15 minutes. have him drink as much water as possible. then remove the positive (+) end of JUMPER A (Figure 4..Batteries of running water for 15 minutes.. H L1. Figure 4.4-2). Do not connect either end of the battery circuit to ground. Do not give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Inspect battery terminals for evidence of corrosion.4-2). preferably mixed with egg whites. Removing Exhausted Batteries • . WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE (190 to 225 VDC) will be present when all 16 batteries are connected to the circuit breaker box. Then have him drink milk. Hold the eyelids apart to make sure the water washes the entire surface of the eyes and lids. particularly when making the last connection (jumper" A". ~. If sulfuric acid is swalloWed. but warm water is more comfortable than cold. Use extreme caution to protect yourself from shock. If the physician does not arrive within 15 minutes." Battery life is anticipated to be between 3 and 5 years. I I .4-2). ' JUMPER "A" BLACK CABLE NO.that way.. 1740B1 14" LONG • 2ND LEVEL BLACK CABLE NO. Use extreme caution to protect yourself from shock. Figure 4. or building steel. this high voltage is a "floating" (ungrounded) circuit. 174084 108" LONG 1ST LEVEL FRONT OF CABINET Figure 4. 1740B3 /43" LONG .4-2. Do not connect either end of the battery circuit to ground. and should be kept . For safety's sake. '" I' 4TH LEVEL _ TO CIRCUIT BREAKER 3RO LEVEL BLACK CABLE NO. Battery Hook-Up With Circuit Breaker on Right-Hand Side WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE (190 to 225 VDC) will be present when all 16 batteries are connected to the circuit breaker box. MM-132 • 4. 1740B2 28" LONG ___ RED CABLE NO.Batteries • . H L1.4-5 . particularly when making the last connection (jumper "A". turn OFF and lock both the battery charger disconnect switch and the battery circuit breaker. install batteries with the positive (+) terminals to the outside of the cabinet. Then connect a black cable. install batteries with the negative (-) terminals to the outside of the cabinet. Some localities may require that batteries be taken to a filling station or to a smelter.Batteries First. Therefore. If the circuit breaker is mounted on the left-hand side of the cabinet. part number 174DB3. Place four batteries in the bottom shelf of the cabinet. starting with the lowest level. remove the two 30 ampere fuses in the circuit breaker box. are guaranteed to be in good working condition and fully charged. Next. Remove the remaining battery connections from Level 4 (top) down to Level 1 (bottom). Before installing new batteries. as shipped from the manufacturer. These two cables are connected from the 4. Then.4-6 MM-132 • .4-3. o The red cable. then the positive ends of each of the long jumpers (part number 174DB2) that connect from one level of batteries to the next. as shown in Figure 4. Replace cables where necessary. Remove all the upper battery cabinet shelves. Cables and hardware should be thoroughly clean before installing new batteries. make arrangements for disposal of Gel/Cell batteries through the local Otis office which is cognizant of the regulations that apply to the area. is the first cable to be connected. Each battery is designed to hold the full 12. Batteries. Install and wire one level of batteries at a time. remove the positive (+) end of JUMPER A. Disposal of Batteries • Disposal of batteries is governed by local code as well as by the Federal Environmental Protection Agency. Install inti Fresh Batteries • It is not necessary to test the batteries prior to installation. o If the circuit breaker is mounted on the right-hand side of the cabinet. It is suggested that rubber gloves and goggles be worn during this operation. as explained below. clean the shelves and examine the connecting cables for deterioration.9 VDC charge for four months. part number 174DB4. part number 174D81 (Figure 4. battery charger fuses. ON THE LEFT.4.4-4). and controller wiring have been checked and found to be correct and operating properly. After each level of batteries is wired.4. battery charger.4-2) to the circuit breaker (Figure 4. ' • MM.132 4.) end of a part number 174D82 cable.4-2).3. connect the negative (. insulate the positive end of JUMPER A. then connect the positive (+) end to the next level of batteries. check the wiring. Battery Cabinet batteries (Figure 4.Batteries • CIRCUIT BREAKER 7415B • NOTE: ADJUST ANGLES STEADIER AS NECESSARy--l - -I BATTERIES TO BE TURNED 1BOo WHEN CIRCUIT BREAKER IS LOCATED HAND SIDE. The smaller (1/4 inch) diameter terminal hole is connected to the batteries. Figure 4. When wiring the fourth and last level of batteries. Connect only after all other battery connections. The cable end with the large 3/8 inch diameter terminal hole is connected to the circuit breaker.7 . • L I -------""1 I CIRCUIT BREAKER TO CONTROLLER F1 D2 AND F2D2 FUSES Figure 4. read the voltmeter on the battery charger.. . • .._. HIG H VOLTAGE (between 190 and 225 VDC) exists at this connectio':l. .. .4-4) . With the battery charger service disconnect switch in the OFF position and the battery circuit breaker in the ON position. . 30 AMPERES . Fuses and Circuit Breaker • MM.~ . in the battery cabinet..4. check the two 30 ampere fuses in the circuit breaker box and fuses F3C1-2 and F:3C3-4 on the main controller. The voltage should be between 190 VDC and 220 VDC.• FUSES. .Batteries Exercise extreme care in making this connection. If no voltage is read on the voltmeter.4-4. Testing • Perform this test after the batteries have been installed. and wired to the circuit breaker. (see Figure 4.8 . No other test is necessary.132 4. • . however.1 Motor AC Induction Motors The single-speed. synchronous speed is made to change by varying the frequency of the current supplied to the motor from an inverter power supply.1 . For a given motor. and the number of poles of the motor. induction-type motor is used in hydraulic machines. and in variable-frequency hoist machines. given in R. on the nameplate.• OTIS 5.1. In the case of the variablefrequency hoist motor.P:M. as the motor in motorgenerator sets. DRIVE SHEAVE DISC BRAKE • DEFLECTOR SHEAVE Variable-Frequency FLEXIBLE COUPLING AC Drive j l • MM. the synchronous speed is fixed by the frequency (usually 60Hz) of the building power lines. The major operating characteristics of the motor are listed on the nameplate. Synchronous speed depends upon the frequency of the power supply. is the speed at which the motor shaft rotates when running free (without load). 5.squirrel-cage.133 The synchronous speed. it will use excessive current. So that there are no obstructions to the free flow of air for ventilation. both internal and external. A reversal of these stators will cause excessive current and weak torque. is the current drawn by the motor when running at rated horsepower. we can exceed the nameplate value because the elevator runs on demand rather than continuously. • Motor or Stator Replacement The motor nameplate is marked with either a star ("Y") or delta (L::. 5. check for free rotation of the fan blades. under oil in the hydraulic tank need . the windings should be blown out frequently with dry air. i. All electrical connections. However. given in amperes on the nameplate. For all other AC motors. On other motors the stator laminations are centered in the frame so that the stator frame may be turned around to give the proper hand.Motor The full-/oad running current.15. On some motors the leads are long enough so that the hand may be changed by pushing the leads back into the motor and p"ulling them out the other side. the full-load running current given on the nameplate is a smaller number than the current drawn by a fully-loaded elevator. The service factor rating on the nameplate indicates the extent to which the horsepower rating can be exceeded.) after the voltage to indicate how the phase windin"gs are to be connected. with a service factor of 1.5 HP: Maintenance • Motors operated no maintenance.133 . For example. the motor leads are on the opposite side of the motor from the controller leads.e... can be safely operated at 30 x 1. water and oil. if a delta motor is connected in Y it will not develop sufficient starting torque. and if a Y motor is connected in delta. The nameplate number is based on continuous duty.: Usually.1-2 U . Be sure to follow these markings for. maintenance involves lubrication and keeping the windings free of dirt. Where a fan is used to cool the motor. must be kept tight. Do not confuse this parameter with the current drawn when the elevator is fully loaded.. There are times when the hand of the new stator is different.. on several motors the stator laminations are off center and temporary leads will have to be installed. a motor rated at 30 HP.15 = 34.1 • MM. • STATOR Motor ROTOR WITH COOLING VANES BALL BEARING ""- SHAFT • BALL BEARING Typical AC Motor for MRVF Application • MM.3 .1.133 5. the reverse-phase relay should have its leads reversed to give correct operation. No.. be extremely noisy. Some motors can be interchanged on the bedplate. a new male half of the coupling may be required to compensate for the shaft extension being larger in diameter or shorter in length. • • • MM-133 6. it may run in the wrong direction. as for example: M1 or MT1. 3 power feeders at controllers should be interchanged. When three-phase power is secured from delta-connected transformers and No. the feeders to one of the phases should be reversed. and controller switch horsepower limitations should be considered.e. the controller studs will.1-4 . When power is supplied by V-connected transformers with voltage to ground indicated on all three-power feeders. With 2-phase. or the motor may fail to start. interchange of any two power feeders at the controller will reverse the motor direction. be sure that the numbered motor leads are connected to correspondingly marked studs. have markings preceded by "M" or "MT". on medium-rise Ward-Leonard installations. Even when the new motor has been installed and connected according to the markings on the motor leads and the studs on the controller. The M or MT markings indicate that those controller windings are for motor connections only. It is important to keep the above considerations in mind when making a change in the field in order to avoid difficulties with motor operating characteristics. 4-wire feeders (used in the Philadelphia area). The controller stud markings may not agree exactly with those on the motor leads. When power feeders are reversed. DC Induction Motors The direct-current induction motor is used on Elevonic installations. or overheat. With three-phase motors. interchange two of the power feeders to the controller. but any substitution in the field would require extreme care since motor horsepower and torque. i. etc.. 2 feeder is grounded. the two outside feeders should be reversed. and on some door operators. 1 and No. If this happens.Motor Some motors are interchangeable as regards such physical characteristics as drilling for motor feet. With 2-phase. height of rotor shaft. in many cases. However. 3-wire feeders. 133 5.Motor • BRUSH HOLDER SPRING MAIN FIELD COILS ARMATURE • BEARING FAN COMMUTATOR AUXILIARY POLE COILS Typical DC Motor for Elevonic Application • MM.1-5 . the peaks on the brush face are rapidly worn off and new peaks emerge to maintain the contact between brush and commutator. In like manner. The rapidly shifting points of contact just mentioned all lie within the area "C" (see sketch below) and form the most direct route for the current to follow. You might suppose these peak currents would quickly heat the brush and destroy it. may keep'the commutator surface clean but wears the commutator excessively. Brushes and brush holders must have the ability to carry the electrical loads with the least amount of variation and resistance. Generally. So even when the brush fits firmly against the commutator a 100% contact between the two surfaces is impossible. a properly functioning commutator shows little if any brush wear and the surface is a deep amber or chocolate color. for example. Neither the brush face nor the commutator surface is really smooth at all. • • • MM-133 5. is not an indication of good brush surface contact. But even though an alert spring finger persuades the brush.1-6 . Some arcing cannot be eliminated.even though the current density of the brush as a whole maintains normal v"alues in amperes per square inch. this section is devoted entirely to this subject. Tiny peaks stand out on each. however. as the following explanation shows. When you see a brush snug against a revolving commutator you might naturally assume toe whole brush face was in intimate contact. arcing. pushing it against the commutator. but this does not happen. these high points wear away and are replaced. An abrasive brush used with a high-speed commutator. the net effect is a whole series of rapidly shifting points through which the electrical current flows. with minimum of heating.Motor The performance of DC motors primarily depends upon the care given to the brushes and the commutator. strong spring pressure. the contact is only partial and a look through a microscope would show why. Because their total area is so small compared with total brush face area. Now as the commutator whirls. Therefore. forcing the brush to bear heavily on the commutator. The brush's large mass of carbon with unique refractory properties prevents excessive temperature rise. In turn. These shifting points are perfectly normal to brush operation and are no cause for concern. they must carry enormous momentary electrical currents . unmarred by arcing from brushes. and wear on the commutator. B A A FREE PART. that indicate malfunction and that should be investigated: 1) 2) 3) 4) Excessive sparking Noisy operation Excessive wear of commutator or brush Non-uniform commutator surface • MM.' POINT CaNT. 5. in zone A. CaNT.. These three current paths. And. the shifting contact points.1-7 . At these locations. which conduct the current across the gaps and .. graphite. While the commutator is spinning there are actually free particles present between the brush face and the commutator .' C FREE PART. however.' ARCING ZONE.minute particles of carbon. producing short but intense arcs between brush and commutator. in zone C. copper and dust. are normal occurrences in all carbon brush operation. CaNT. beyond the free-particle contact area "A". through which the current travels between brush and commutator.A". One originates in area "A". and arcing in zone B. Causes of Commutator and Brush Wear Improperly installed brushes and brush holders are the most common causes of commutator and brush wear.133 These occurrences are discussed further in the next paragraphs under "Causes of Commutator and Brush Wear" . the current leap-frogs right across the air gap. There are other occurrences.• ARCING ZONE. the brush particles. B BRUSH HOLDER FREE PARTICLES Motor COMMUTATOR • There are two other pathways. lies the arcing zones "B". in zone B. the other in location "B". short circuits. The remedy is to undercut the mica. the solution is grinding or turning of the commutator. A condition of this nature is serious. This usually means turning the commutator on a lathe and then grinding." • An out-of-round commutator raises and lowers the brushes in the holders during each revolution. "esults in a burned surface and flat spots. If brushes and brush holders are properly the following: installed. . Correct this condition by undercutting. In each case. high bars. check . Lubricant-soaked mica causes destructive arcing. Grooving is caused by continued wear of the commutator by brushes that are improperly staggered. Loose bearings may cause eccentricity. In addition to excessive wear of the commutator. or feather-edge mica due to improper undercutting. the only solution is to true up the commutator. check bearings before returning a newly turned commutator to service. Correct the leakage 5. or brushes that are too abrasive. it results in sparking of the brushes. that brush and brush holder are clean. If eccentricity is excessive. as it is difficult to remove any great amount of eccentricity by grinding alone. and will in time destroy adjacent bars. and are easily identified by noisy brushe. High mica. eating them away.Motor Check first that the correct brush has been installed.1-8 • ~ \' • MM. and an arc is formed that spreads in time over adjacent commutator bars. mutator. Flat spots may be caused by a bar that is a fraction of an inch lower than its neighbor. The best remedy is to turn down the commutator and adjust or replace the brushes. Again. and ring fire.s or by placing a stick or wooden pencil on the top of each brush on any brush arm. High bars will draw a progressively longer arc. that sufficient spring pressure (3 to 5 pounds) is applied. The cause is lubricant leaking from over-lubricated bearings. where the mica insulating segments project above the commutator surface. This causes excessive side wear of the brushes and holders and. the brushes do not make proper contact. grinding or turning . especially with a high-speed commutator. IndividiJal brushes may be high at either end or across their full length. as with high bars. results in noisy brush operation and excessive arcing and wear.133 . if the brushes are thrown out of contact with the com. and that the brush is set at an angle of 30 degrees with the radial line for reaction brush holders. high mica. Loose or high bars cause the brushes to jump and spark. • MM-133 Set all brush holders approximately 1/16" to 1/8" clear of commutator to provide maximum support for the brush. excessive current due to a misadjusted controller. Short-circuited or open armature coils result in severe burns on the commutator bars to which they are connected. • Leakage to ground or "grounds': To check for a ground. dirt-clogged fields. Reaction type brush holders (Figure 5.1) should be adjusted so that the angle at the bottom side of the box is approximately tangent to the commutator (at right angles to a line from the center of shaft to the middle of brush face). Radial type brush holders (Figure 5. This may be due to an improperly set neutral point. or loose brush yokes and stems. interpole. such as brush holders. Repair of these coils requires the services of an experienced armature winder. from the commutator. This will give approximately the correct brush angle. short-circuited or open armature or field coils. with a liquid Overheating may cause premature wear. lift all brushes. broken connections at the commutator bars. Two types of brush holders are used in elevator service. or lack of proper ventilation. or poor connections. Never replace all brushes at once. only those that inspection indicates need to be replaced. then clean the commutator drYing agent. but in other parts. and should not require readjustment during brush replacement. This will place bottom of brush tangent to commutator.9 .1-2) should be set so that the center of the brush edge is on a line through the center of the shaft. use an ohm. To check for the existence of a ground. Brush Replacement Brush yokes and brush holder stems are factory-set to uniform spacing around the periphery of the commutator.1. Look for the wear indicator (a band wrapped around the pigtail 5. series field (if used) and commutator. Check for grounds to the brush stems. Remember many grounded machines are not grounded in the armature.meter between each part and ground .1.Motor • problem. 1-1. Reaction.1-10 .Type Brush Holders • MM-133 5.Motor • REACTION TYPE (A) • 6134C REACTION TYPE (B) 6134B REACTION TYPE (C) Figure 5. this brush should also be replaced.1-2. • MM. require replacement. Radial.. When this wear indicator is level with the top of the brush holder. too. the brush requires replacement.1-11 . . If the inner wires have become discolored from a copper to a blue color. twist and open the strands of the pigtail or shunt. These brushes.". Finally.133 5.Type Brush Ho/ders lead). Motor • c-~--tDIRECTION 6134A RADIAL OF ROTATION TYPE 1/16" to 1/8" • 6134D RADIAL TYPE Figure 5. look for signs of discoloration and physical damage.' . where erratic leveling leads you to suspect a faulty brush. Next.. 1-12 . 1-3. and checking that it can slide freely in holder. Otis Type 155HT Machine Otis Type 219HT Machine Otis Type 269HT Machine Otis Type 339HT Machine 3/4 to 1 1/8 Ib 3/4 to 1 1/8 Ib 3/4 to 1 1/8 Ib 1 to 1 1/2 Ib • o o • MM-133 6.and inevitably result in unstable performance. Use this distance as a guide when setting new brushes. Fasten spring scale to the brush pigtail Carefully pull upward on the spring scale in a straight line parallel with brush movement. Different brush grades mean different wear characteristics and different resistances. On brush. • SPRING SCALE LEATHER LOOP PAPER STRIP Figure 5. When the paper is free to be pulled from beneath the brush. while gently pulling on the paper. using a length of adding machine paper. Before taking off any of the old brushes. as shown in Figure 5. Checking Brush Pressure Clean brush holder and insert new brush.Motor Do not mix brush grades. Adjust brush if necessary. measure the brush-to-brush distance along the commutator. holders with adjustable springs. lining it up with the other brushes on the stem. the spring scale should read as shown in the table below. check brush pressure as follows: o Place a thin strip of paper between brush and commutator.1-3. Place the stone behind the brush to be faced on the commutator. until the brushes are somewhere near neutral.13 . Neutral position (neutral point) is the brush position where the brushes rest on commutator .voltmeter (for example. The copper particles present in this dust might short-circuit commutator segments.the magnetic "dead spot" between adjacent field poles where current in the coils must go through zero in reversing from plus to minus . allowing the particles to travel under the brush.5 volts. no voltage will be induced at the brushes. use the 1(). neutral position is located simply by lining up the brush ring with the chisel mark. never rub your fingers across the face of the brush. and place in two adjacent brush stems. with the thin edge exactly central with the brush face. Moisture can greatly affect brush performance.Motor • After installation of the brush. • • MM-133 To set the neutral point. finally going down through the higher current ranges until a low range is 6. using a brush facing stone. When the brushes rest on commutator bars connected to armature coil sides in the neutral plane. Setting Brushes to Electrical Neutral Position Proper operation of DC elevator motors and generators requires that the brushes be placed on electrical neutral position. In this method. clean away dust from the brush holders and connections. the face should be ground to the shape of the commutator. the "inductive kick" method is recommended. With generators.bars to which are connected the ends of the armature coils in the neutral plane -. it is wise to use a low voltage range such as 2. Connect a low reading DC.mv sensitivity) across these two brush stems. first check the brush spacing about the periphery of the commutator as detailed earlier. With motors. a pair of adjacent brushes and the field current is alternately made and broken (or its value changed). then remove all standard brushes and replace with two special brushes with a centered "V" shaped tip or two standard brushes ground or filed to a "V" shape. NOTE: When grinding brushes. a voltmeter is connected across. NOTE: Disconnect any field wires from brush stems to prevent false indications. At the completion of this operation. However.ma scale of a Simpson meter of 25().1. (Bars on either side of the polarity reversal point can be used~) With the two brushes still resting on these same two marked bars. Temoorarilv block the armature to prevent its movement. and fasten the brush yoke in this position. This is the neutral position. Move brushes to the next commutator bar (right or left) and repeat the above. voltages. This will protect the meter from serious over. A position will finally be found where the voltmeter deflection is almost zero where the voltage "prepares" to reverse. rotate the armature very slightly. the brush movement was in the right direction. then interrupt (or change the value of) the field current. Commutator Maintenance • • A good commutator should develop and keep a uniformly poliShed surface without the use of commutator compounds.) Arrange a switch to interrupt (or change the value of) the generator field current so that the changing flux will cut the armature conductors. If the reading is of the same polarity and the deflection is less than the previous trial.14 • MM-133 . moving the armature only. The armature should be rotated one pole pitch and the setting should be checked in this new position. etc. (No measurements are required. When cleaninq is necessary.1. this is just an indicating instrument. Try to operate the switch at the same rate (speed) each time. Note the deflection and polarity of the voltmeter movement on interrupting (or on reducing) the current. Pass current through the field coils. The field current should once again be wried and the voltmeter read. The brushes should be centered on these two bars (or set symmetrically) and the brush yoke tightened in this position. set the brushes centrally or symmetrically with these bars. continue moving the brushes until the polarity of the voltmeter reverses. it should be done lightly 5. Mark these two bars with pencil. If so. since induced voltage is proportional to rate of change. The position at which the polarity reverses is the approximate neutral. Set the meter pointer slightly off zero mechanically to allow the detection of negative voltages.Motor reached. For this reason. because hand stoning often aggravateseccentricity. as excessive tightening can cause serious damage. the generator armature is electrically connected at all times to the elevator motor armature in the so-called "loop circuit". copper. however. Generally. Commutators should be ground only by an experienced mechanic. Motor with commutator stone. Loose clamping ring bolts at the end of the commutator may be the cause of excessivesparking. With the elevator motor stopped and the generator running. flat spots. It is well to clean the commutator slots periodically with a stiff brush to keep the slots free of carbon. when absolutely necessary. Bolts should be checked when the commutator is hot. See that the cut is wide enough to remove all mica. tightening diametrically opposite bolts in succession. Either a hand stone or a special grinding tool can be used.1-15 . steady pull. Use only a firm. Eccentricity. This material is toxic in an enclosed space. After undercutting. while usually quicker when much cutting is necessary. all commutators that are furnished undercut by the factory should be undercut in the field when necessary. 5. Polishing with sandpaper should be avoided. a "V" shaped hand scraper should be run through the slots to remove mica slivers and particles of copper. and high bars are corrected by grinding or turning the commutator. dirt. Turning of commutators. and loose or high bars. • Grinding can be done on the job. use of a grinding tool is strongly recommended. Never use emery paper. CAUTION: Do not clean commutator with carbon tetrachloride. and has the further undesirable effect of removing the surface polish of the commutator. etc. Undercutting should also be done if high mica develops when brushes of the correct grade are used.• . 00) sandpaper should be used. Emery dust is conductive and can short-circuit adjacent commutator bars. must be done on a lathe and requires that the armature be brought into the shop. • MM-133 Troubleshooting the Suicide Circuit In Ward' Leonard control systems. grinding will usually be found the most effective method of correcting commutator troubles .only very fine (No. test the suicide circuit as follows: • 1) 2) Place an ammeter in the loop circuit Momentarily open the suicide circuit while the car is at rest A marked increase in loop current should be measured.133 . Check all wiring and components in these circuits. The "suicide circuit" applies these loop currents to the main generator field in reverse direction so that they demagnetize the pole pices. • 5. Loop currents become self-destroying. hence the term "suicide" circuit. 3) Make up the suicide circuit. If the generator brushes are sparking with no switches closed and the elevator at rest. the meter reading should drop below 15 amperes. then high loop currents should be suspected. If the suicide circuit is operating properly.16 MM. Check all connections for tightness. if car is oscillatory at the same time as the generator brushes are sparking. check uneven brush pressure and wear. • The most likely cause of high loop current is faulty contacts in the loop and suicide circuits. High loop current (in excessof 15 amperes) will eventually burn out brushes and commutator segments and may cause the elevator to pull through the brake. Finally. If so.Motor voltages due to residual magnetism in the generator pole pieces can force a high current through the generator and motor armatures. Check to see if a pull on the generator circuit overload coil is evident.1-. MM-135 Figure 5.2 Brakes In both cases.OTIS • Drum Brakes External and internal drum brakes are illustrated in Figures 5. External Drum Brake (131 and 139HT) 5.1. pivoted at the base. 5. The brake is released by a doc operated solenoid mounted atop the bearing stand.2.2-2.2.2.1 and 5. • ADJUST CLEARANCE ADJUST SO LINK IS VERTICAL ADJUST SPRING PRESSURE ROD SET SCREW ~ • . twin brake arms. hold the cast-iron brake shoes against the brake pulley by spring pressure.' . :_-_ ECCENTRIC ROLL PIN AND Figure 5.. To release the brake.__ . the electrical action of the motor slows down and stops the car. As the brake releases. In the event of a power failure. the brake applies mechanically and automatically. the brake helps to slow down the car. When a normal stop is made.. Brake operation is fail-safe..135 .2. Internal Drum Brake 1155 and 219HT) 5. direct current is impressed on the coil.Brakes The solenoid consists of a magnet coil wound concentric with a split core. brake solenoid current is reduced from the level required to operate th>e solenoid to the level required to hold the brake released. The function of the brake on a normal stop is to hold the car at the floor after it has come to rest. causing a link and a lever to pull the brake arms away from the brake pulley. drawing together the two halves of the core.-- . • AOJUST SHOE CLEARANCE ADJUST SPRING PRESSURE • _-_::r .2-2 MM.2. In an emergency stop. starting at the center of the shoe. drill through the brake lining with twist drill equivalent to the rivet size. Start installing the rivets at the center of the shoe and work towards the ends. Mark (center punch) shoes so they may be replaced in their respective locations. Place and shape new lining squarely on shoe and clamp firmly into position with "C" clamps.' Be sure to countersink fully. 2) 3) • 4) .. and proceed as follows: 1) Land counterweight (on suitable blocking if required). remove lining and clean brake shoe casting. Using the holes in the brake shoe as a guide. Clean and adjust clearance between shoes and pulley as described below. 7) 8) MM. Use the Drill Rod Setter to dress up the rivets to form a round head. Drive out rivets with punch of same diameter as rivet. Drive rivet until firmly seated on bottom of countersunk hole. Counterbore each hole for rivet heads with counterboring tool. the lining wears very slowly and should give many years of service before renewal is required. Pull main line switch and remove fuses. If the lining must be replaced.• Brakes Renewal of Brake Lining Since the principal function of the brake is to hold the stopped car at the floor.2. By installing the rivets from the center towards the ends of the shoes. cutting close to the shoe. Cut off rivets on outside of brake shoes with small chisel. the lining will conform to the shoe. check parts leaflet for part number of lining.3 .135 5. Place rivet head on rivet anvil and proceed with riveting. 5) 6) '. Remove brake pins and shoes from brake stand. proceed as follows: 1) Clean all brake pins in shoes.2-1 and 5. .135 5. See that the brake spring rod does not bind in the brake shoe levers. the correct clearnace is . Smooth if necessarywith No. at least .015 inch at the top. Remove motor leads so that the brake can be operated without moving the car.2-2. MM. be sure that its surface conforms with the contour of the pulley.002 inch at the bottom. with cotter pins in place and opened. Equalize the clearance by means of adjusting bolts. 00 emery cloth. Check clearance between shoe and drum with brake energized. Remove any excess. Lubricate pins with oil and assemble the brake. remove.Brakes Brake Adj. Be sure that pins are reassembledin their proper places. levers and cores. then clean again with Otis cleaning compound to remove any particles of emery. but swinging the cam pin in either direction should move the lower end of the shoe away from the brake pulley. it should be possible to turn the eccentric cam very easily and to check if it is set in dead center of brake shoe movement. If correctly set.ustment Before doing any work on the brake. 0 • 2) See that the brake lining is free from oil. always place the empty car at the top of the hoistway. With external brakes. and dry the eccentric pin. Remove rust. the small free movement will not move the brake shoe. with the counterweight landing on its buffers. Reinstall. If the lining is new. clean off all rust. Be sure set screws which hold brake shoe levers to the hinge pins are bearing against the flat side of the pins and are securely tightened and locked in place. dirt and gum and that the rivets are below the surface of the lining. 3) 4) • 5) With internal brakes. Then. With internal brakes. Clean the brake pulley with Otis cleaning compound and wipe dry.2-4 . Equalize spring pressure on external brakes by adjusting bolts shown in Figures 5. With approximately 2/3 brake spring pressure on the shoe. clearance should be as small as possible without shoes touching drum at any point. • Disc Brakes Brakes 6) With internal brakes.2-3.2. 5. No job should be left without this roll pin as it locks the cam in position to insure correct brake operation. In the event of a power failure.135. brake operation is fail-safe. The brake is released by a doc operated solenoid that pu lis the armature plate away from the friction disc. Thus. two fixed piates on either side of the disc. the brake applies mechanically and automatically .5 . The brake is set by spring action bringing the fixed plates into intimate contact with the friction disc. and a solenoid release mechanism.2-4. • HOLE FOR GEAR HOLE BOX FOR GEAR DOWEL PIN ARMATURE PLATE BOX DOWEL PIN COIL LOCK NUT (8) ALLEN HEAD SCREW LOCK NUT lOCK WASHER Figure 5. Ogura Disc Brake MM.2-3 and 5. Disc brakes of two manufacturers Figures 5. are shown in Both brakes employ a friction disc that rotates with the elevator machine. install a new 1/16-inch roll pin to replace the one removed. the brake helps to slow down the car. I ~~ 31' NUT 16' HU' Figure 5.2-6 . very slowly and should give before renewal is required.1/2 J {<-t • rBELLEVILLE WASHERS (6) "'''"". 5116 X 2. of the brake is to hold the friction disc wears many years of service If the disc must be The friction disc on the Ogura brake can be replaced individually. The function of the brake on a normal stop is to hold the car at the floor after it has come to rest. the Hilliard Company recommends that... Hilliard suggests replacing the friction disc assembly. When a normal stop is made.. However.Brakes In an emergency stop. the entire brake should be replaced as a unit. the electrical action of the motor slows down and stops the car. check parts leaflet.~ INPUT SHAFT MAGNET BODV ASSEMBLY ~. which consists of the disc plus the two fixed plates. because of the run-in operation performed at their factory.24. replaced. As an alternate procedure.1/4 CAP SCREWS TO GEARBOX (21 HOLE FOR Gl::AA BOX DOWEL PINS CONDUIT FITTING . Renewal of Friction Disc • Since the principal function the stopped car at the floor. Hilliard Disc Brake • MM-135 5. Load weights in the car equal to 125% of contract load.6 I 5. test for dynamic torque.. For this procedure: 1) 2) Place the car at the lowest landing. After replacing the friction disc or friction disc assembly. making an emergency stop at mid hatch. As a minimum. Brake Adjustments Check air gap and reset periodically as follows: . If necessary. first land counterweight (on suitable blocking if required).3 ft 9. or by adjusting the eight locknuts on the coil assembly of the Ogura. measure the distance between the coil housing and armature plate. as follows: 1) Run empty car up.85 h 2. then increase brake torque.014 and . If car slips. 3) Next.1 5. between . Pull main line switch and remove fuses.7 .014 on the Ogura brake. reset the gap by adjusting the six 3/8" nuts on the Hilliard. Brakes When doing any work on the brake.2. 1) With brake set (coil de-energized). remove weights after car comes to rest. 2) Brake torque is adjusted by means of eight Allen-head • screws'on the Ogura coil assembly. Car should come to a stop within the distance given below for rated car speed: 2) Rated Speed 200 fpm 250 300 350 MM-135 Distance Rated Speed 400 fpm 450 500 Distance 7. This distance should be between . Repeat tests. adjust brake as described below. or by three capscrews on the Hilliard brake.5 1.8 4.012 and .3 11.• .015 on the Hilliard brake. the static torque must be sufficient to hold the car at the floor when loaded to 125% of capacity. • I . • MM-136 All COP operating controls and indicators are mounted on modular plastic subpanels that fit into rectangular openings in the COP faceplate.'-2. Keyswitch Priority Service Keyswitch Access Keyswitch Fire Service Keyswitch Fixtures are available with low-voltage lamps for use with microprocessor-basedcontrollers. Call registration buttons light up and a "beep" is heard to indicate that the call has been registered. These rectangular modules are also used in many of the hall fixtures.1-'. keyswitches.'-' lists all the modules (buttons. A typical car operating panel in this series is shown in Figure 6. Operating controls have raised markings for use by the visually handicapped.r I • OTIS 6. Table 6.1 Controls and Indicators Type 7155 Car Operating Panel and Fixtures This product line consists of the following fixtures: Car Fixtures Car Operating Panel (COP) with Car Position Indicator (CPI) Car Lantern Telephone Cabinet (option) • Hall Fixtures Hall Buttons Hall Lanterns Hall Position Indicators Emergency Power Keyswitch Car-to-Lobby. Top and bottom panels are tilted for enhanced visibility. The "beep" is also heard each time the moving car passesa floor.1.1 . and jewels) used in both car and hall fixtures. 6. as shown in Figure 6. or with high-brightness neon lamps for use with relay-controlled elevators. 1-2 . Car Operating Panel Layout • MM-136 6.1-1.Controls and Indicators • DO T1111 Tlllfllllll" 1 CAR POSITION INDICATOR INFORMATION DISPLAY OTIS ELEVATOR CAPACITY INTERCOM SPECIAL AND INTERCOM EMERGENCY HOSPITAL SERVICE KEYSWITCH SPECIAL EMERGENCY SERVICE (PHASE II) KEYSWITCH SERVICE SWITCHES/BUTTONS AND JEWELS • ILLUMINATED BUTTONS FLOOR REAR DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN ALARM DOOR CLOSE EMERGENCY STOP REAR DOOR CLOSE 110VAC INSPECTION INITIATING LIGHT OUTLET RAY SWITCH SERVICE LIGHT AND FAN (TWO SPEED) INDEPENDENT Figure 6. . . • .Controls and Indicators • r I. is mounted above the call buttons. I I' . I •. ••• •. "". An optional loudspeaker. .1-2. ' . generates programmable messages on a moving screen. • MM-136 Figure 6. \ I I A car position indicator is mounted behind a dark acrylic plastic lens which produces "dead front" appearance when the indicators are not lighted.'-3 . Car Operating Panel Sight Lines 6.' . . " •• .. . An optional information display module. • • • . also mounted behind this lens. •. for use with the intercom and speech synthesizer options. . Pressing ATTENDANT NON. Express Priority Service and Fire Service Phase II.Car on independent service bypasses all hall calls.Controls and Indicators TABLE 6. On highspeed elevators.136 6. regis- place car on attendant service. prevents car motion. Attendant Service. providing demand exists for the established direction (FURTHER DEMAND jewel lit). 1000DI Door Open Further Demand . gency stop is software controlled. but closing requires pressure on the DOOR CLOSE button. Doors open automati. Button lights to indicate call has been registeredo In car. svc. IndfPond. ~ Keyswitch on COP During attendant service: . hold DOOR CLOSE (All buttons in COP) button unti I doors are fully closed. MM. or to reverse closing of doors.ent Service Ind. Release button to permit closing operation. and door reversal devices Button on COP Press Door Open button to hold doors open. emer. pendent Service. r=iJ[H] Attendant Service on Arrentitult off _leo stop car. reopen.The loadweighing are inhibited.To start car. register call on car button. once doors latch closed. The POWER jewel ilghts if the safety [Q]D STOP Toggle Keyswitch chain is complete and power is supplied Power Push red toggle up to on the elevator feeder.STOP button causes car to bypass Attendant Non-Stop IC!JDI Hall Button Door Buttons D hall calls. audible tone also indicates tration. . Group Turning keyswitch to IND SVC places car on independent service. Jewel Call Buttons Turn keyswitch ON to I~DI Car Button Press button to register call. I~IDI Rear Door Close If button is released before doors are fully closed. the doors wi II ~ Keyswitch on COP .'-'. . POWER Keyswitch OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ALARM Button Press button in COP to sound alarm bell.1-4 . cally. Car starts automatically. Press enabled button and hold it until doors have fully closed. Jewel on COP I~DI iCJWDI Door Close Rear Door Open Door Close button enabled on Inde- . Placing POWER keyswitch B Power off ~ in ON position opens the safety chain. open .5 . fire/ smoke sensor is reset. and Fi.1. Door re-opening devices.:Vice off bypass on ~ e- In case of fire or other emergency. Fire Service.. car and hall' buttons.1. and cars made available to emergency personnel exclusive for their use. by m011entarily turning FIRE SERVICE keyswitch OFF (Chicagol or pressing RESET button (ANSI/NYC). I~I e Hall Keyswitch (New Yorl< City) I~IDI Car Reset Button (ANSI/NYCI Emergency STOP becomes operative. Ph. Emergency STOP button inoperative during Constant pressure on DOOR OPEN button is required to open doors... I OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Fire Service.Controls and Indicators • TABLE 6.. II Phase II is initiated by F' . passengers evacuated.136 Group is taken out of emergency service by turning hall FI RE SERVICE keyswitch to OFF (ANSI/ Chicagol or to NORMAL (NYC). Car calls can be cancelled . Car travels non-stop to lobby or street floor. Service normsl Hall K eyswiteh (ANSI) Fire Service off on If@\! ~ its car buttons. Ph. Car Keyswiteh (ANSI/Chicago) Car now responds only to calls registered on Fi. then turn keyswitch to OFF. of doors • MM.. (Set ANSI/Chicago switch to BYPASS until. car travel. PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOORS OPEN jewel lights in each car in group. normal elevator service can be discontinued. DOOR OPEN position NYC switch re-opens on parked cars. • Plene Exit When Doors Open Constal)t pressure on DOOR CLOSE button is required to close doors and start car. Car Jewel lanterns are disabled.60 sees of open time (NYCI. Car is taken out of emergency service by operating FIRE SERVICE keyswitch to OFF (ANSI/ Chicago) or to NORMAL (NYC) when car is at emergency return landing (lObby or street floor). Cars park at lobby with doors open (ANSI/Chlcagol or at street floor with doors closed after 8.1. Hall Keyswiteh (Chicago) Car Keyswitch (New Yorl< City) Phase I is initiated by turning keyswitch ON (ANSI/Chicago) or to FIRE SERVICE position (NYC). S.ice normal doo. turning FIRE SERVICE keyswitch in car to 0 N (ANSI/Chicago I or off NORMAL (NYC).I 6. Stays lighted during run. personnel need not place car on Independent Service to register a priority car call. Hall Jewel Car lantern mounted door jamb. Priority Service One car is selected to answer the priority call. Priority Service on Priority ff 0 OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Emergency Power Once feeder has been transferred to emergency power. and an optional button. The hall jewel (optional (3-to-8 Car Group) Service Stripswitch with one button for each car.1. register ca'r call.) Em •••••ncy: Power 2 r@l ~ Once feeder has been transferred to emergency power source. (fn some Elevonic Direction Arrows Arrow lights to indicate direction car will travel 'on next run. After all available cars are brought down. Jewel indicates selected car. After all available cars Hall Jewel have been brought down. double chime for down direction. stripswitch operation selects the "car to provide normal operation. With the automatic option. 6. PLEASE EXIT WHEN DOORS OPEN jewel lights in selected car. Manual override of automatic functions is available at all times. stri pswitch operation selects each car in turn to return to the emergency power landing (normally lobby or street floor). and discharge passengers. AUTO on Hospital Priority Hall Keyswitch Service) lights. random selection" is employed to choose the car to provide normal operation. Please Exit When Doors Open Selected car travels non-stop to priority floor. Priority service is initiated by turning ON the hall keyswitch.Controls and Indicators TABLE 6. Jewel on COP Car and Hall Lanterns installations. Hall lantern mounted on Single chime sounds for up direction. passengers pressing the AUTO button causes each car to be brought down to the emergency landing by random Car Jewel exit. selection.6 . I'"BIi6\l L:J~ Priority personnel place car on Independent Car Keyswitch Service.1-1. Car travels nonstop to called floor. over hoistway doors. keyswitch operation will determine which car of a two-car group will be able to provide normal operation _____ directions Lights for up car Lights for both Lights for down car Hall Keyswiteh from emergency power. The switch spring.Ray Cutout on Light R. turn CTL momentarily to CAR TO LOBBY position . or beam requires alignment. turn LIGHT RAY keyswitch OFF until maintenance can be performed. OPERATING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS Car-to' Lobby IPark csr to lobby park Inspection Initiation • ~ Turning keyswitch to CAR TO LOBBY position regis' ters a car call for the lobby. To shut down the car at the lobby. Turning keyswitch counterclockwise moves car down. then hold CTL keyswitch in PAR K position until the doors are fully closed. stopping the car. place car on Independent Service (by in-car key.136 6.witch). Keyswitch is normally in ON position. Turning keyswitch clockwise moves up car at 100 fpm.7 . If relay in light ray fails. making all stops enroute.Controls and Indicators • TABLE 6. To open doors on a parked car. and the inspection initiating switch operated. • MM.1. Light.r Top inspect off ~ COP Keyswtich Hall Keyswiteh Turn CAR TOP keyswitch to INSPEC position to disconnect call registration circuits and condition the elevator control circuits for access switch operation and top~of-car inspection. with the doors open. Car travels to the lobby.1.1. c.v off ~ COP Keyswitch • Access I A=~ 0:1 ~ Hall K eyswiteh Keyswitch is enabled when the car is at a landing with an access switch. returns to neutral position. etc.1-3.1-3.1. burnt-out lamps. enable maintenance personnel to quickly locate malfunctioning circuits. • on the Self-test circuits. Gain access to the self-test controls by unscrewing the tamper-resistant screw at the bottom of the. Access to Car Operating Panel Once screw is removed. (See Figure 6. panel. up On an Elevonic 401 installation. place the "Self. part No. using an AVSAFE manual screwdriver. lift panel straight against stop.Controls and Indicators Diagnostic Procedures for Microprocessor-Based Car Operating Panel. relay failures. ASMD-0100-7750. incorporated in the microprocessor-based car operating panels for the Elevonic and LRV3 elevators. ' FRONT VIEW • BOTTOM VIEW Figure 6. then swing panel open.1. Test" DIPswitch (Figure 6.4) in the ON position and test the call registration circuits as follows: 6.8 MM-136 • .) . The self-test is initiated from controls wiring side of the panel. 6.1-9 2) 3) 4) • MM-136 5) . (See Figure 6. (Announcements are generated for buttons 1 through 20 only.Controls and Indicators • ON ('ON' FOR SELF-TEST MODE) I SELF-TEST [Jr.1-4.itch Settings B • 1) Press COP car-call buttons one at a time checking that an audible "beep" is generated. and that CPI displays and spoken announcements correspond to the numbers of the buttons pressed . When test is completed.1-4). set the "Self-Test" DIPswitch to the OFF position.floor name and direction announcements are generated corresponding to the CPI display and car lantern indication.tale light is illuminated and the CPI displays the number of the button pushed (car-call button numbers are displayed as 1 to 54 regardless of actual button nomenclature). COP OIPsV'. Car-call buttons will remain inactive while spoken announcements are being made. . B8 B8 888 BBBB~BBB Figure 6. If the main COP includes a speech synthesizer module. the corresponding tell. Verify that car lanterns are illuminated in the DOWN direction when even-numbered buttons are pressed.) Test all car-call buttons to confirm that buttons and tell-tale lights are working properly. and in the UP direction when odd-numbered buttons are pressed. Close STEST segment of DIPswitch (Figure 6.Controls and Indicators On an LRV3 installation. DLV (Down Leveling Valve). 6.3. will go on in sequence.1. DMV (Down Main Valve). NUDGE. the following self. and UMV (Up Main Valve). and stay on for 2 seconds. listed below.test wiH check each element of the microcomputer board. will go on.10 MM-136 • 2) 3) 4) • j " • .1-5) by moving actuator to the left. The following relays will be energized: DC (Door Close).1. listed below. PM (Pump Motor). DO (Door Open). Proceed as follows to perform this test. hold out for 2 seconds. U LV (Up Leveling Valve). o The touch-tone outputs. Up Hall Lanterns UHL1 through UHL3. Unplug power connector J 1.Tale Lights (CCI1 through CCI4) PLEASE EXIT sign Up and Down Car Lanterns (double arrow) The landing passing tone (LPT) and buzzer (BU) will sound. each remaining on for 1 second: Up Hall Call tell-tale lights UHC1 through UHC3. then plug in again. 1) Swing open car operating panel as shown in Figure 6. DZO (Door Zone). The self-test routine will start cycling through a 16-second sequence: o The discrete outputs. Down Hall Call tell-tale lights DHC2 through DHC4. These lamps will light: Car Position Indicator Lights (CPI1 through CPI4) Car Call Tell. Jl JEWEL AND KEYSWITCH MODULES SPECIFIED BY CONTRACT DIPSWITCH • AUDIBLE AB121AWl MICROCOMPUTER BOARD 6219G2 SIGNAL • DEVICE 7069AF4 6219Gl BUZZER BUTTON MODULE (DOOR CLOSE) 7069AF41 7069AF4 BUTTON MODULE (DOOR CLOSE) BUTTON MODULE (DOOR OPEN) 7069AF7 BUTTON (ALARM) 7069AKl EMERGENCY STOP TOGGLE SWITCH MODULE • MM-136 Figure 6.1-5."" . Wiring Side of LRV3 Car Operating Panel 6.Controls and Indicators • 7069AF JEWEL MODULE (POSITION INDICATOR) A8121BAl POWER SUPPLY BOARD POWER PLUG. Neon lamps must be unsoldered. the car lantern. Lift panel straight up against stop. 6. • To gain access to COP lamps.6. The cycle will repeat. Remove lamp from socket by pulling it straight out. Relay-controlled fixtures use type C2A high-brightness neon lamps in rubber grommets. Unplug power connector Jl. Install replacement ) lamp by pressing it into the socket. pulled out of the grommet.1.1-6). Figure 6. be sure it is pushed far enough into the grommet so that it can physically cast sufficient light to fully illuminate the jewel or numeral. Type 85 bulbs are replaced using a special lamp and socket removing tool (Figure 6. remove tamperresistant screw at base of COP as shown in Figure 6. Microprocessor-based fixtures use type 85 incandescent bulbs in twist-lock sockets.1-3.Controls and Indicators Down Hall Lanterns DHL2 through DHL4. then plug in again. o All hall position indicator lamps will go on and remain on for 3 seconds. When inserting replacement neon lamp. Fit square end of tool over socket. It may be necessaryto remove printed-circuit board on wiring side of panel in order to gain accessto lamp. press down and twist counterclockwise until socket and lamp can be pulied straight out. hold out for 2 seconds. and in the hall fixtures.Lamp Replacement Lamp and Socket Removal Tool Lamps are located in the car operating panel. • o 5) To terminate test: o o Open STEST segment of DIPswitch. then swing panel open. .1-12 MM-136 • . LAMP SOCKET PT 467ATl CAB WALL Figure 6. • MM-136 6.Controls and Indicators • LOCK TABS. Replace lamps from wiring side of assembly as described above.1-7) into slots at top of lantern lens. Car Direction Lantern To gain access to car direction lantern lamps. RELEASE WITH TOOL TO REMOVE LANTERN • NOTE: LAMP CAN BE REPLACED IN FIELD BY REMOVING SOCKET (TWIST LOCK) WITHOUT DISASSEMBLY OF LANTERN .. press down.1-7..1-13 .~ LAMP 424R1 . insert special. and lift lens and lantern assembly forward and out. tool (Figure 6. pull off faceplate and assembly.1-8). • 6.•. loosen cone-point setscrews on metal faceplate.14 MM-136 . THEN REMOVE SOCKET AND REPLACE LAMP • Figure 6.1-8. NOTE: LAMP CAN BE REPLACED .Controls and Indicators • PC r::M'~ . ~CONE POINT SET SCREW M3-8 BY REMOVING M3 SCREWS TO PULL ASSEMBLY OFF WALL. Tvpical Hall Fixture To gain accessto hall fixture lamps (Figure 6. Replace lamps from wiring side of fixture as described above..1. A total of seven such messages is available in the basic vocabulary. The intercom module is always required when speech synthesis is specified. Test Procedure • MM-136 The Elevonic 401 speech synthesizer can be checked out using the self-test procedure given in paragraph 6. In-car communication can b~ accomplished through an intercom "slave" station mounted behind a baffle in the COP.1) contains over 100 words that can be used in numerous combinations.1. Speech synthesizers supplied with other Otis elevators can be tested by traveling up and down the hoistway.1-1. and certain information messages related to passenger safety. in conjunction with the intercom module. even if an intercom is not used. To cause informational messages 6. Audio amplifiers and TALK-LISTEN switches are usually located at the master station and are controlled by building personnel. Adjustment • The volume control is the only adjustment provided on the speech synthesizer panel. a transfer relay on the speech board disconnects the intercom whenever a synthesized message is to be announced. The basic vocabulary of the speech synthesizer (Table 6.2 Speech Synthesizer The speech synthesizer option.) This optional module consists of a line transformer and a combination microphone and speaker.2. announces the present position of the car. the direction of car travel.2-1 . and listening for announcement of floor position and direction.• OTIS 6. stopping at each floor. and others may be programmed to meet individual building requirements.' Where both intercom and speech are installed. This panel is located just below the loudspeaker on the wiring side of the COP. (See Figure 6. 2.on the Intercom Please push the Alarm button You are pressing too many floor buttons • • 6. Floor Level Level Lower Upper Main Front Rear Ground Balcony Ballroom Basement Cafeteria Cocktail Lounge Concourse Garage Lobby Mezzanine Parking Penthouse Plaza Restaurant Second Level Skywalk Information Good morning Going Up Going Down Please stand clear of closing doors This elevator is fu II Please take the next elevator Do not be alarmed We are experiencing A temporary power interruption Minor technical difficulties Is needed for an emergency Please exit when the doors open Please use the telephone To report the malfunction Dial the number indicated Please push the talk button .1. the condition example. SPEECH SYNTHESIZER Numerals One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Ten Eleven Twelve Thirteen Fourteen Fifteen Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty Thirty Forty Fifty Sixty Seventy Floor Data Floor. wait for closing doors" that doors message to be • VOCABULARY Messapes TABLE 6.Speech Synthesizer to be announced.2.136 . hold time. For beyond normal door-open "Please stand clear of the announced.2 MM. simulate initiates the message. • OTIS 6. MM-136 6.3.1 . Otis publication SESP-100.3 Information Display Module A User's Guide. is supplied with each Information Display Module installation . • • . :t I • • . . • -' a cr: '~ a a a Cl u c:: . .. :>.~ •.... ::\ :]:1 ./'1-.IfI'" . " '.. :: " . .137 ~" 'Ii=:. Its distinguishing characteristic is a motor-driven. . • • • • • • . Z c. -1: ~: .• OTIS 7.." .. the screw into the horizontal motion needed to open • HEADER FAN ...••. • • CLUTCH VANE ASSEMBLY .:: . •• •• . " :". ~~ .~~i-i "." ::... :: ~~4 // '/"" '-1 ••..' "'A.J: ' •• •• •• ....." : //k "..••. .....•. 7777A Door Operator 7.. . lightweight assembly installed as an integral part of the cab enclosure facia. I... . " : :: " : s: ..~ '"~":' .e A •••• ~ . :"".: 11' .• .."'/~" c. I I " I . . ".•. variable-pitch leadscrew.. I' I r .. "I'''' t... : : • . . -'.". ~ I I:. :• s: " t:. ' . ... . . . : (1..."Y'l ~~~"'.l: S~ : '..~"'. iI' . So' RETURN PANEL : t I.~ .. I I MOTOR AND SWITCH ASSY I: ~: " ~ .: • MM.. DOOR HANGER ... :. : Figure 7.. .. ~ :: "I: :: " • I ' • s: :: -:: :: ": II L ~: If'" If : C : /:: : r :: ...~~~~~.' " •I ~~:: _/~"~. I' ~ ..... on which a drive (or roll) nut rides to convert the rotational motion of..1-1) is a compact. .1 Door Operator Type 7777A Door Operator The Type 7777A door oper~tor (Figure >7.1. ~ i' •••. Ar. . ... • • . S••• • ':: ...: ..1.1....1-1 ..."..•. and a set of cam-operated switches. Another feature of this design is that both the car and hoistway doors are coupled to the door operator and therefore open and close simultaneously. The • MM-137 7.1-2) comprises a fractional horsepower de motor. • CAM SWITCHES DRIVE PIN DRIVE NUT BRACKET MOTOR MOTOR BRACKET MOTOR AND ASSY CAMSWITCH • Figure 7.1-3) comprises a 21-3/4 inch. The other end drives the camswitches through the reduction gears. variable-thread leadscrew. The motor is double-ended. The varying pitch of the screw produces the smooth mechanical acceleration and deceleration of the doors. and a pin that is inserted through the top of the drive nut and rides in the thread of the leadscrew. a 17: 1 speed reducer. One end drives the variable-pitch leadscrew through a flexible coupling that absorbs shock and vibration and can tolerate axial misalignments up to 1 degree.1-2.Door Operator and close car and h'oistway doors. a drive or roll nut. The camswitches. sometimes referred to as the cam pack.1-2 . and stay matched in position and speed through the open and close cycles. The drive screw assembly (Figure 7. Motor/Switch and Drive Screw Assemblies • The motor and camswitch assembly (Figure 7. are enclosed with the reduction gears in a separate housing attached to the end of the motor casing. Ball bearings are used to secure the pin within the drive nut so that it can rotate freely as it follows the lateral movement of the pin. in turn. The next 3 1/2-inch segment is a transition area where the pitch increasesfrom 1. This "programmed" mechanical motion is further enhancerl by electrically controlling the motor speedl. • TRANSITION AREA O. For center opening doors. The pitch remains at 2.1/2" DOOR OPERATING ZONE 3. The varying pitch of the leadscrew provides mechanical acceleration and deceleration of the door(s).1. the other door hanger is driven by a conventional aircord arrange- 7. The door hanger is coupled to the clutch vane assembly which.125 inches for every revolution of the motor.125 inches per revolution.75 inch/revolution. The track is supported in three places by U.25"/REVII. 2.3. I" OVERTRAVEL ALLOWANCE 14" 3.3 .Pitch Leadscrew • MM.) The 3/4 inch segment closest to thp.1.75"/REV. Each end has a pair of rollers that ride on a tubular track just below the lead screw.I37 The door hanger (Figure 7.bolts secured to weldments on the header assembly.• Door Operator free end of the leadscrew is supported by a bearing bracket bolted to a weldment on the hanger assembly.125"/REV . is attached to and moves with the drive nut.1-3.25 inches per revolution.1-4) is one continuous piece that almost spans the width of the door. motor is pitched at 1.1/2" 3/4" DRIVE NUT TRAVEL TO UNLOCK HOISTWAY DOORS I" OVERTRAVEL ALLOWANCE Figure 7.25 inches/revolution during the next 14 inches and then goesthrough another transition area where the pitch is reduced to 0.I. but the pitch may be different. Lead screws for other types and sizes will have a similar pattern.125 inches to 2. (See Figure 7.especially at the beginning and end of door travel. This means that the drive nut will move laterally 1. Variable.angle of the rollers prevents the door from swaying in and out while upthrust rollers under the tube prevent the door from being raised any appreciable amount. These dimensions apply only to 42-inch center-opening doors. The V. often referred to as a spirator.1-5) provides the mechanical coupling between the drive nut and the car and hoistway ~oors. Unlike hoistway door spirators.1.Door Operator ment. this spirator is needed only to keep the doors moving towards their fully closed position during the -last 3/8 inch of travel.4. A springtensioned wheel closer. The aircord makes a complete loop around the sheaveslocated on each end of the header and is terminated and clamped on the hanger ends nearest the leading edge of each door. Header AssemblV The clutch vane assembly (Figure 7. This requires very little force. is mounted on the door hanger of the non-driven door and connected to the hanger of the driven door. • MM-137 7. approximately 1/2 pound. The bolts securing the aircord sheavescan be tightened as required to adjust the tension of the aircord loop. • DOOR STOP AIRCORD CLAMP TUBULAR TRACK ROLLER • UPTHRUST ROLLER U-BOLT CROSS SECTION Figure 7.1-4 . The assembly comprises two vanes: the drive vane and the clamp vane. 1-5. Clutch Vane Mechanics. Simplified Diagram 7.• LEAD SCREW CLUTCH VANE ASSEMBLY DRIVE NUT MOTOR CAR DOOR DOOR HANGER VANE RETRACT (ATTACHED HEADER) CLAMP DRIVE LATCH ROLLER ROLLER Door Operator CAM TO HOISTWAY DOOR DOORS CLOSED • CLAMP VANE CAM FOLLOWER DOORS CLOSING • MM-137 Figure 7.1-5 . one end of the clamp vane pulls the hoistway door in the closing direction.1'6 . the roller on one end of the clamp van~ will be on the cam. There is a 3/8-inch clearance between the drive vane and the hoistway door latch roller and another 3/8-inch clearance between the door latch roller and the drive roller for a total of 3/4 inch of travel of the drive nut and vane housing before the doors actually begin to open. This arrangement is used to eliminate the 3/4 inch travel the vane assembly housing would normally make before it engagedthe car door hanger. During the door close cycle. while the gib on the other end pressesagainst a cam follower mounted on the door hanger to push the car door closed.1-6) causing the car door(s) to begin opening. The vane housing is attached to the door hanger with a rod that secures the lower end of the housing between the hanger brackets. thereby holding it in the retracted position.137 7. After approximately 3/4 inch travel. During the door close cycle. the drive vane will contact the door latch roller after 3/8 inch of travel and unlock the hoistway door interlock during the next 3/8 inch of travel. The car door is pushed in the closing direction by the gib pressing against the cam follower on the other side of the door hanger. The car door is opened by the vane housing riding on the rod between the angles on the door hanger. At approximately 1 inch from the fully closed position the clamp vane will again ride up on the cam. However. The vertical cylinder of the drive nut casting slips into a yoke at the rear of the vane housing and is secured in place by a pin at the bottom. Figure 7. it is the clamp vane that pulls the hoistway door closed.Door Operator When the doors are fully closed. the clamp vane roller will ride off the cam and the vane will engagethe hoistway door rollers. the hoistway door will begin to open and at the same time the vane housing will contact the rubber bumper on one side of the door hanger (Figure 7. • • • MM. spirators on both the car and hoistway doors will continue to drive them in the fully closed direction.1-6 shows some of the mechanical details of the clutch vane assembly. As the drive nut begins to move in the door open direction. causing it to disengagefrom the hoistway door drive roller and the cam follower. The clamp vane is spring loaded to firmly secure the door interlock rollers between it and the drive vane. After approximately 1 inch of travel. Mechanical Details CONDUIT AND LOCK NUT (COVER REMOVEO) • MM. Figure 7.-COTIER PIN .7 .1... 7.• VANE HOUSING Door Operator DRIVE VANE RUBBER BUMPER GIB CLAMP VANE • ROD RETAINING RING If-o~-PIN .7. Clutch Vane Assembly.1.1-7) is mounted on top of the car.1-6. It contains the seven multi-tapped resistors that adjust the door operator motor. Resistor Box The resistor box (Figure 7.137 Figure 7. l Verify that the bumpers on the back of the clamp vane touch the vane housing. Then connect the free end to the MM-137 S) • 7. 3l 4) Manually turn the lead screw to close the doors until they are 3/8 inch apart.1.01 (:'" O. (See Figure 7. Position the retract cam (Figure 7.1-8. (See Figure 7.1-9) so that the gib on the clamp vane just clears (d isengages) the cam follower. 2) ROLLER CAM FOLLOWER • RUBBER BUMPER • Cam Follower Adjustment Figure 7. Set the gap between the gib and the cam follower to 0. Field adjustment requires only minor "touch up" as described below. leaving a 6-inch tail.1-8. 1) Manually turn the lead screw until the doors open approximately 3 to 4 inches apart and the clutch vane roller has ridden off its cam so that the gib can engagethe cam follower when the door closes.Door Opera tor Adjustments The 7777 A door operator is aligned during assembly at the factory.8 .OOS")then tighten bolts on cam follower. If not already mounted. Then secure the retract cam in place.1-4. attach the spirator to the left-hand door hanger.) Wind the cord around the drum. l-inch gap between.1-9 . The should be made with the with the spirator tension set that the doors remain closed. ROLLER LEAD CLUTCH SCREW ASSEMBLY LLOWER doors out of • o •• Figure 7.!. • MM. 1/2 pound with final adjustment door operational high enough so and low enough upon closing.137 8) 7. The desired tension is about the door nearly closed. (This connects the meter across switch VS in the switch assembly. so that there is no bounce The cam-operated switches in the motor/switch assembly (see Figure 7.1-10) are aligned to the door by loosening the coupling between the motor and the lead screw and rotating the motor shaft. 3/B INCH SPIRATOR Cam Bracket Adjustment 7) Connect an ohmmeter between Jll and J12 on the terminal block in the wiring trough. Note that the cam switches are NOT intended to be individually adjusted and that no provisions have been made to separately adjust individual cams.) Manually turn the lead screw (opening direction) until there is a O. 6) Unlock and move the hoistway the way. I Door Operator right-hand door. 1-9.he door hanger and the clutch vane housi ng (the car door is just about to be opened). 010 inch. and rotate the motor shaft until VS closes.) OHMMETER • GATE SWITCH TERMINAL BLOCK CLUTCH ASSEMBLY INCH DOOR HANGER RUBBER BUMPER GATE SWITCH ROLLER ARM LOOSEN TO ADJUST AR Figure 7. Apply "Locktite" to the setscrew(s) to secure the setting.1-10) up or down. the rollers should be as close as possible to the tube and yet not turn when the doors move. as required.Door Operator 9) Loosen the setscrew on the flexible coupling on the lead screw side. loosen the setscrew on the motor side to reset the coupling. to actuate the qate switch approximately 1/2 inch from the doorfully. Then tighten the setscrew on the flexible coupling. adjust the clearance between the four up-thrust rollers (Figure 7. • MM-137 7. 11) Slide the gate syvitch roller arm (Figure 7.1-10 .1-10. Cam Pack and Gate Switch Adjustments 10) Manually open and close the doors (via the lead screw) and verify that the doors did not move during the adjustment.closed position. When finished. (If the setscrew is not on a flat when the adjustment is complete. 12) Using an Allen key.001 to 0.1-4) and the door track tube to within 0. moving them down increases the door speer!.• Door Operator Resistor box adjustments are required only if circuit components have been changed. Drive Pin Replacement See Fi~ure 7.) It is suggested that only resistors DCl and Dl (door close) and the D01/D02 pair (door open) be adjusted as follows: 13) Stall the doors approximately halfway closed and adjust resistor DCl to provide about 25 to 30 pounds of stall force.11 2) • MM.1. rotate the drive nut to separate it from the yoke on the back of the vane assembly. 7. 12 as required. (Move terminal 2 of Dl up to decrease the door speed. move down to increase speed.1-8.137 3) 4) . Use Otis Bearing Oil No. Restore door closing speed to 1 foot/second by adjustment of resistor Dl. Adjustments should be made in 1/4-turn increments. Pull the clutch vane assembly outward (towards the hoistway doors) and at the same time. Then withdraw the pin.1-11. MT-l05018). replace the drive pin as follows: 1) Remove a cotter pin from either end of the pin that holds the clutch vane housing to the drive nut. Also verify that all pivot points on the clutch vane assembly are lubricated. If the free play exceeds 1/8 inch. then rock the door back and forth. Moving up terminal 2 of both resistors decreases the door speed. use Otis No. the spirator should be fine-tuned so that the doors close and remain closed without rebounding. adjust parallelconnected resistors DOl and D02 to vary the door speed. Remove retaining ring using Tru. move down to increase stall force. (Move terminal 2 of DCl up to decrease the stall force.arc Pliers (Otis Service Center Part No. Also verify that the leadscrew is clean and oilfree.) Changing resistor DCl has an effect on the door speed. 2 cleaner and dry rag to clean if required. Manually turn the lead screw to move the drive nut to an accessible work area. Check the drive pin by placing the doods) in a mid-open position. • 15) Once the door is operational. (See Figure 7.) 14) In the door open direction. Then rotate the lead screw to remove the 0. place a 5/16.43 x 1.inch long piece of 0.1. Reassemble the drive nut to the clutch vane assembly. STEEL DRIVE SCREW AFTER REMOVING PIN. /RING ~SHIM 6) 7) 8) Add shims (Otis part No. as required.015.inch shim stock from the groove.015.inch screw into the top of the pin and pull the pin.1. Before installing a new pin. and secure in place with the pin.11.wide by 6. Replacement of Drive Pin • MM. Install the retaining ring. Use a 1/4. Install the cotter pin to hold the pin in place.Door Operator 5) Insert a 6.B2A83 RUBBER "COTTER PIN GROMMET o o DISASSEMBLY Figure 7. to seat the bearings and spacer.inch clearance between the tip of the pin and the base of the groove. Position the drive nut so that the new pin contacts the shim stock then insert the new pin (with associated bearings and spacer). 462HA 109) as required until the tops of the shims are in line with the bottom of the retaining ring groove in the pin.82A83 SWING VANE ASSEMBLY TOWARDS HOISTWAY DOOR AND AT THE SAME TIME ROTATE DRIVE NUT OUT OF THE ''YOKE''.015 shim stock in the groove of the leadscrew to provide a 0.137 7. RETAINING • a ~. bearings and spacer from the drive nut. Manually turn the lead screw and verify that the pin rotates. ~TOSUIT ~BEARING ~SPACER BEARING PIN 9) • CLUTCH VANE ASSEMBLY DRIVE NUT '" PIN.inch diameter pipe section.12 . the door check or dashpot and a linkage. In either case.1-12) make up the door operator: the' motor.) Either of two models is used: a 1/6-horsepower motor operating at 850 RPM for all standard sin. Type 7770A Door Operator • MM. (See Figure 7.1-13 . the same 14-to-1 gear reducer is used.1-13. • Figure 7.1-12.• Door Operator Type 7770A Door Operator The Type 7770A door operator is a medium-speed unit utilizing a chain drive and an'arm and linkage assembly to translate the rotary motion provided by a fractional horsepower dc motor into the horizontal motion needed to open and close car and hoistway doors. or a 1/4-horsepower motor operating at 1725 RPM for all standard center-opening doors.gle-slide and two-speed side opening doors. Three basic assemblies(Figure 7.137 A permanent-magnet dc motor with an integral gear reducer is used to provide the drive for the door operator. The door 7. As the doors approach the fully open or closed position. The door check assembly is a hydraulic device used to slow down and cushion door operation at each end of travel. the pressure in the cylinder builds up. Once the flowback is completely cut off by the chamfer (Figure 7. Figure 7. Door Motor The door operator is supplied with the Type 7300 door check assembly. A chamfer on the end of the piston surface restricts the flow of oil back into the housing' as.. thereby increasing the load on the engine.1-13. 01 I is still allowed to escape from the cylinder through a needle valve and a return line in the housing.•• '- SHOCKABSORBING BUSHINGS CHAIN • Figure 7. 7.1-14. it moves towards the closed end of the cylinder. on the periphery of the segment. The chain. which rotates with the segment. 'is dead-ended in shock-absorbing bushings.1-14 MM-137 • . A 10-tooth sprocket is mounted on the output shaft of the motor.Door Operator motor drives a segment by means of a sprocket and chain arrangement.J / -SEGMENT ••. A lever within the door check. drives a double-ended piston in an oil-filled housing. SPROCKET DC MOTOR AND GEAR REDUCER --.1-15). The adjustment of the needle valve determines the amount of bleed-off and therefore the cushioning effect at the end of door travel.. 1-16.1-14. 7. allowing oil to flow back . a vacuum is created in the closed end of the cylinder as the piston withdraws.1-15. Door Check Needle Valve • MM-137 When the door reverses direction. to assure quick and steady reversal.) A ball check in the piston body opens.•• I Door Dperator OIL FLOW CHAMFER PISTON Figure 7. (See Figure 7. LEVER Door Check SEGMENT • OIL RETURN LINE NEEDLE VALVE Figure 7.15 . A spring speeds the operation of the ball check. into the cylinder.1. Figure 7.137 7. the microswitches are used to electrically alter the engine torque by causing current-limiting resistors to be inserted in series with or shunted out of the motor winding circuit at predetermined door positions. Briefly. Cam-Operated MicrolNVitches • MM. CLOSE LIMIT FAR SIDE) Figure 7. LEVER Spring and 8all Check Three microswitches. For a left-hand arrangement. CLOSE LIMIT CAM & • ~ 0 0 0 0 o@o OPEN LIMIT CAM MICROSWITCHES (OPEN LIM IT 1 NEAR SIDE.) They are actuated by cams mounted on the rotating segment.Door Dperator SEGMENT • PISTON SPRING BALL CHECK Figure 7.1-17 shows a right-hand arrangement. are mounted above the door check.1-17. two for open limit and one for close limit. the open and close limit cams would be reversed. (See Figure 7. OPEN LIMIT 2 CENTER.1-16.1-17.'-16 . • Door Operator Mechanical Adjustments Check that there is sufficient tension at the segment hitches of the chain to prevent the door motor drive sprocket from skipping a tooth on the chain during door n!versills. Lower the angle until there is slight clearance between the chain 7. The chain should have a small amount of slack.inch by adjusting the chain tension until finger tight.17 . block located above the drive sprocket prevents the chain from jumping over the teeth of the sprocket. Adjustment of Open-Limit Microswitches Adjust the door check so that doors open and close fully. Compress the rubber bushings at the ends of the drive chain approximately 1/B. • MM-137 The nylon. . Adjust front-to-back motion first.1. positioning the nylon block so that it comes between the links of the chain. plus one turn (both sides).1-18. Needlevalve screws on top of each end of the housing cylinder are adjusted to control the amount of check provided.without banging into the stops. ADJUST CAM TO ACTUATE OPEN LIMIT MICROSWITCHES o o 0 0 O@'O • @ o LEADING EDGE OF DOOR FULLY OPEN POSiTiON Figure 7. 1-18 • .7 to 3. single-slide 48-in. two-speed 54-in. center-opening 48-in. Tighten all four screws.5 to 3.5 seconds MM-137 32-in. and adjust the cam to actuate the open limit microswitches.1. single-slide 42-in. (See Fiqure 7.1-18. (See Figure 7.2 seconds 2.5 to 5.7 seconds 3. single-slide 36-in. then tighten ment.5 to 4.1-19. and adjust the cam to actuate the close limit microswitch. this adjust- Next.0 seconds 3.19.) Electrical Adjustments • Adjust tap 2 on resistor ORl for an opening time within the range given below: Door Type 42~jn. Position the doors approximately 1 inch from the fully open position. two-speed 7.8 seconds 2.5 seconds 4. adjust the nylon block so that it rides between the chain links without rubbing either side.0 seconds 4.) Position the doors approximately' 3 1/2 inches from the closed position.'- 3-1/2" Figure 7.0 to 5. center-opening Recommended Opening Time 2.Door Operator ADJUST CAM TO ACTUATE CLOSE LIMIT MICROSWITCH • • •• FULLY CLOSED POSITION • • LEADING EoG~ OF DOOR E ~ • @ .2 to 2. Adjustment of Close-Limit Microswiteh roller and the nylon block.0 to 4. • Door Operator Next.7 to 3.5 to 5.1. two-speed Next.19 . singie. center-opening 32-in. single-slide • 36. adjust the band on OR3.~ . BE SURE THAT THE MOTOR CURRENT DOES NOT EXCEED 0.2 to 4. adjust tap 3 on CR2 so that the doors hold in the closed position.8 AMPERE AT THIS TIME.. ~.in. Finally. Adjust tap 3 on CRl for a closing time within the range given below: Door Type 42-in.-'J :".0 to 5."" .5 seconds 3. . as shown in the chart below. This completes the adjustment of the opening cycle.2 seconds 3.137 7.2 seconds 3. . . • MM.0 to 6. so that the doors open smoothly and quietly.adjust tap 2 on CR1 for proper time.slide 42.in. adjust the band on CR2 so that the force during the final two thirds of the door closing cycle does not exceed 30 ft.in. Door closing time should be approximately 50% greater than normal. which controls the start of the open cycle. hold doors open by hand until the nudging buzzer sounds and door starts to close. Ibs.5 to 4.0 seconds 48.8 AMPERE AT THIS TIME. If necessary.0 to 3. center-opening Recommended Closing Time 2.in. single-slide 48..5 seconds 5. Finally.in. adjust tap 2 on OR2 so that the doors hold in the open position.5 seconds 4. BE SURE THAT THE MOTOR CURRENT DOES NOT EXCEED 0. This completes the normal close cycle adjustment. When nudging feature is provided. two-speed 54. .0 seconds 4. n Nudging Mode 3.n.5 seconds 6. center-opening 32. the other end is attached to the arm linkage consisting of the arm and door link assemblies.2 seconds 7. in turn. two-speed 54-.2 seconds 4.8 seconds 4. Ibs.7 to 8.1-21).2 to 4.n. Door speed is controlled as a function of door posi!ion by the cam-9perated contacts which. single-slide 48-.in..0 seconds • 48. center-opening Closing Time . single-slide 42-.2 to 6.1-20) is an intermediate-to high-speed unit utilizing a chain drive and arm linkage assembly to translate the rotary motion provided by a fractional horsepower de motor into the horizontal motion needed to open and close the car and hoistway doors.1. Door position is detected by a series of cam-operated contacts located in the door operator control box next to the motor.n. OVL Door Operator The OVL Door Operator (Figure 7.3 seconds 5.n.8 to 6.5 to 5. single-slide 36-.n.7 seconds 6. energize relays that add or remove resistances in the armature circuit of the door motor.Door Operator Door Type 42-in.20 MM-137 • .0 to 7. One end of the drive arm is attached to one side of the pulley. 7. The reversible de motor drives the pulley by means of a sprocket-driven chain. Mechanical Adjustments • Cam-operated switches are located in the dooroperator control box (Figure 7. two-speed Finally.5 to 9. adjust tap 2 on CR2 so that the force during the final two thirds of the nudging cycle does not exceed 30 ft. Door Operator • SHIMS REAR DOOR OPERATOR CONTROL (DOCB) BOX MOTOR BALANCE WEIGHT SPACERS DRIVE HITCH PLATE STOP BRACKET FRONT BRACKEr DRIVE ARM • VANE ARM.1-21.1.21 . OVL Door Operator TERMINAL STRIP CAM (1 OF 16) SWITCH (1 OF 16) • MM-137 MOTOR Figure 7. PULLEY SHAFT Door Operator Control Box 7.PIVOT BRACKET (REF) ARM ASSEMBLY Figure 7.1-20. WASHER GSI. tap 2 03. CAl. tap 2 Smoothness motion Smoothness motion of closing Control Box of opening I 7.1-24. When adjusting a cam.22.002 •• OA2 @' RING (SPACER) Figure 7. tap 3 OMF. 01. and may require some slight adjustment in. cor. If minor "touch up" is necessary. tap 2 Cushioning of final stop Nudging speed Sharpness of reversal Opening torque (adjust if door fails to open fully) Closing torque (adjust if door stalls with closing force greater than 30 ft-Ibl Extra torque for heavy~door"'" operation OMF.1. tap 2 03. The switch conditions shown in Figure 7. tap 1 02.1-22 • MM. tap 2 Door Operator 02. then adjust control resistors as shown in the following table. be certain that it is in line with the center of its contact before tightening in place.the field. " • • SPI cOOL . OCl.1-23 depict the factory settings. Electrical Adjustments Control resistors are factory-set to the values given in Figure 7. C04.OAI D 001 • SP3 Cams are adjusted (Figure 7.Switch Adjustment ." . Location • Resistor Parameter Adjusted Controller. first be sure that cams are correctly set. tap 3 OMF1.1-22) by loosening the screw and rotating the cam to obtain a switch closure or opening for the applicable door position. Door Operator CAM ~ CAP SCREW %rq-0.137 . lOCK. C03 •• C02. tap 2 02.003 .. SP2 cc Cam. taps 1 &3 03. switch on Elevonic installations.'.7 2...0 2.9 1. DCL BRAKE LIFT CONTACT DOOR CLOSE CONTACT FINAL DOOR CONTACT ELECTRONIC CLOSING VZ2! SP' ~2 SP3 V72&Q2Z'l?726 CLOSED OPEN I 1 DESENSITIZE DETECTOR NOT USED • MM-137 1.:''1. CONTACT V/--/-Z-Z-/-Z~/~-Z-Z-/~2~/~Z~Z-I 1 CD' "-6" __ I I===================::::OZZZJ t--t t=::::4"-t DECELERATION 2"-ooj C02 CD3 CD4 CONTACTS VZ7/I I" _ QZJ --------~-----------1~ NOTES..9 2.4 1.2 3. Door Opening Single Slide Open Close Center Open in. Cam-$witch Act1Jation 7.1.....4 4. Open Close Two Speed Open Close 36 42 48 2."~ .~.'"_ 1---8"_ ..-:. • DOORS FULLY Door Opera lOr Recommended door times are given below.""2~2~2~2"'Z~/~/~.:.-'.. Door time is adjusted by car-controller DIp.ST ACCELERATION D'/~-2-Z-/~Z-Z~Z~Z~/-/~/~2~2~Z-/~Z~/~//l CA...or.:..23 .--.3 3.':. r""7/1---J OA2 • _ E 3"--t CONTACT 1.:.••• ----------------- .."....0 2...l~ _ _ CLOSING _ 002 } 003 ADDITIONAL SLOWDOWN CONTACTS DOL DOOR OPEN CONTACT ---t t-'/2" . CONTACTS ARE TYPICAL Figure 7. rzzzza '" t-1--6"---1 GS.'...6 1.4 1.. .:.0 - OPENED DOORS FUllY • OPENING --I 1-'/2" OAI CLOSED 1ST ACCELERATION CONTACT W/77ZZZZZ7ZZZZZZZZ .. ------------~rzzJ ~--------------l-.c"::.••••• -----------------------'.1/2" '/2" V/L/ZZZZZZZZZZZ?ZZ I 00' tST DECELERATION CONTACT ~ _ 101 t-- f')~ 1-'/4" f. ••.4 3.~ 2ND ACCELERATION rY/~~/~Z~/~Z~2~2~2~/~~2"'/.3 2.~..~.''''.'...CONTACT o CONTACT 2."'...':.':.1-23.. TOP 151 56 2-SPEED AND SINGLE. I Figure 7.n. CENTER-OPENING DOOR D2 (150 OHMS) .SLlDE DOORS D2 (150 OHMS) 1411 82 161 TOP 4 9 I 17 I 0 I .Door Operator LOCATED IN CAR CONTROLLER 03 (100 OHMS) 40 115 • I D4 (2500HMS)1 180 I 02 (3000HMS)1 I 45 1 175 I 125 I 50 bo I DMF (250 OHMS) 150 I 60 I 40 I DMF1 (1000HMS)1 30 D1 (300 OHMS) I 50 1 20 ~3 I 240 I 60 I LOCATED IN DOOR OPERATOR CONTROL BOX..SLfl..- . Resistor Settings • 7. D3 (30 OHMS) D3 (30 OHMS) 7 I TOP 4 • rop TOP 110 I TOP~ 1 T2.DO (300 OHMS) 130164 1139 DO (200 OHMS) 1201 32 I 20 I 80 I TOP I 34 4 2 3 4 DC (150 OHMS) 1541301201 TOP 2 3 DC (150 OHMS) I 21 I 79 I 32.T3.3T 4T . 1 T 2. 1 T 2T 3T I 3 J'lJl..Il.24 MM-137 .ruulfUlJl. 1.ruulJ1J1r 1 2T ..5T ..1...24. The drive assembly consists of the parts needed to retract the shoe. the drive assembly. is now installed on all elevator car doors . The wiring simply connnects the door reversal switch to the 7. • DRIVE ASSY SHOE ASSY WIRING Figure 7.2-1.• OTIS 7. or some other door reversal protective device.2-1) consists of three elements: the shoe assembly.138 The Type 6993AL safety shoe (Figure 7. and the wiring. It is a protective device that causes the car door to reopen whenever it strikes a passenger or object in the doorway while closing. The safety shoe. which is attached to the door.1 . consists of the soft-nosed vertical edge and the lever mechanism. Type 6993AL Safety Shoe • MM.2. The shoe assembly.2 Door Protective Devices Type 6993AL Safety Shoe The door safety shoe came into use with the introduction of automatic push-button elevators. The right pivot. (See Figure 7. The operation of the AL safety shoe is relatively simple.2. marked B. (See Figure 7. Also note that the shoe. is rotated about pivot • • A.2. The left pivot. will move in and out as the lever arm.2-2. supports both the bracket and lever arm and each can move independently.2-2 MM-13B • .Door Protective Devices controller and is listed here primarily because it is installed when the shoe is installed.) There are three moving parts mounted on two stationary pivots. This spring has two functions: It tries to keep the pivot arm tight 7. This causes the opposite end of the pivot arm to release the switch button which. B • A LEVER ARM .2-3. Figure 7. initiates a door reversal. Key Elements of Safety Shoe " The least complex motion occurs when the shoe is pushed as the door closes. The key elements of the safety shoe are clustered about the upper pivot. . marked A. supports the bellcrank. which is supported on a similar pivot arm at the bottom of the door. The inward push on the shoe is resisted by the tension spring at the bottom of the pivot. in turn.) The pivot arm moves up and in about pivot A until it hits the limit stop. The AL safety shoe works with all current door operators. 2-3. and it helps to keep the shoe from bouncing when it is extended. 7. Figure 7. Since there are no other applied forces. (See Figure 7.) As the door approaches the fully open and fully closed positions. and causes the shoe to retract. Note that this shoe is NOT counterbalanced. This causes the bellcrank to turn clockwise about pivot B. everything moves.Door Protective Devices • against the bracket. The bracket then pushes through the limit stop to turn the lever arm counterclockwise.pulls up.2-3 . the bellcrank and bracket do NOT move when the shoe is' pushed. the shoe is light enough and pivots smoothly enough so that only a tension spring is required rather than a counterbalance spring.2-4. LIMIT STOP BELLCRANK AND BRACKET DO NOT MOVE PIVOT ARM TENSION SPRING """"" • SWITCH I SHOE PUSHED IS RELEASED . the aircord .138 When the shoe is retracted. The dual-springed coupling then causes the bracket to rotate counterclockwise about pivot A. Pushing on Safety Shoe • MM. All springs are under increased tension and work to restore the parts to their initial positions once the pull on the aircord is released. The two extension springs must be strong enough to keep the switch bracket tight against the coupling and restore it to this position when the shoe is extended.12JQ::=[)ui L:UP LIMIT EXTENSION SPRINGS TENSION SPRING __ r.4 Figure 7. . The tension spring must similarly keep the pivot arm tightly against the down-limit stop on the switch bracket when the shoe is extended. The remaining springs are not adjustable.2-4. • J2.138 7.5. ALL SPRINGS RESIST PULL OF AIRCORD o Figure 7.2.2-5. Safety Shoe Retracted Adjustments The only adjustments required are the setting of the door reversal switch and the coupling. I SWITCH ADJUSTED Coupling Adjustment DOWN LIMIT • MM.2. which should be dimensioned as shown in Figure 7.Door Protective Devices AIRCORD PULLED UP • SHOE RETRACTS A ~. or leaving the car interrupts .only a slight inward push .out a relay.Door Protective Devices • NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT (TOPIBOTTOM) Figure 7.one at ankle height. Type A6971Y Light Ray Twe light rays.or beth light rays.2.oer .open.ontacts.2-7) uses the fellewing cempenents: • MM-13B 1) Master unit. at waist height. set the deer at some mid-epen pesitien and extend the shee fully. centaining pewer supply. LED light seurce. phetecell and amplifier.on (Figure 7.of deer time. . Light striking the phetecell helds .of passengers. In the pushbutten unit used en the AL shee shewn in Figure 7. LED indicater. make sure. 7.opensthe switch c. Switch Adjustment • Te adjust the reversal switch. A typical installati.each ray is reflected back ente a phetecell in the same unit centaining the light seurce.of the deerway.2-6. . and prevents the deers frem clesing.the d. A passengerentering .one . plug-in relay. If the deers have started te c1ese. the ether waist high. Then set the adjusting screw se that the switch centacts just .o c1eseat the expiratien .ors t.occur when the d.of either ray will cause the deers te reepen.2-6. and cennecter te slave unit.5 .oer reversespreperly when the shee is pushed and that ne false reversals. are beamed acress the elevater entrance and fecused en reflecter targets en the ether side . After making the adjustment. allewing the de.opensand cleses. interruptien . If the deerway is clear . one for each unit. photocell and amplifier.138 . The master unit contains an indicator LED that glows whenever the light ray is interrupted.. Type A6971 Y Light Ray Installation • 7. Both master and slave units have built-in cutout switches allowing disconnection of the photo-head during maintenance. The light source is a pulsed light-emitting diode (LED). containing source. The photocell circuit is designed to respond only to light pulsed at the LED frequency. YELLOW RED 117V WHITE • NC S LENS AND LIGHT SOURCE 61 S --{- r I I 24" BLACK WHT WHT-I BLK BLK GRN GRN YEL RED YEL RED I SLAVE UNIT L I ..Door Protective Devices 2) Slave unit.6 MM. INDICATOR LAMP 61 LENS AND LIGHT SOURCE 61 61 -{-' MASTER UNIT GREEN COM NO 24" NEUT. and is completely insensitive to ambient light.2-7.J JUNCTION CUT. LED light • • 3) Two reflector targets.2.OUT SWITCH BOX Figure 7. ankle height. If LED is out. Test alignment of the light ray as follows: 1) Turn ON the LIGHT RAY keyswitch on the car operating panel. 10 . at all floors Elevonic Normal If failure occurs at a time when the car cannot be taken out of service (during the rush hour. Repairs should be effected as soon as possible. If LED is lit. Failure of the light ray affects door operation as shown in the table below. Normal • MRS Doors nudge closed at each stop at expi ration of delayed-car time. Doors nudge closed at each stop at expiration of delayed'car time. at all floors System hangs up. or to relay failure. Door Operation When System Light Ray Fails Door Time After Operation of Light-Ray Cutout Switch LRV Doors stay open. for example).2-8) and tilt photo-head up-down 2) 3) • MM-138 4) 7.2-7 . Slide cutout switch on master unit away from lens. Observe LED. disable the light-ray circuit by turning OFF the LIGHT RAY keyswitch on the car operating panel.Door Protective Devices • Maintenance Preventive maintenance of the Iight ray involves keeping the lens and reflector target free of dust and grime.15 sec. proceed to step 5. 10 . If the unit fails to operate. . Slide cutout switch on slave unit towards lens. it most likely is due to either misalignment of the light source and target. 15 sec. LRS Doors close at normal speed at expi ration of delayed-car time at each stop. loosenjackscrews (Figure 7. then lift relay from The relay is now free and may from its .2. • MM-138 7. be unplugged and forefinger as shown in Figure slightly. as shown in Figure 7.socket. loosen jackscrews on master unit and align as described in step 4. change relay as follows: 1) Place thumb 7.Door Protective Devices and left-right until beam is centered on reflector. then push down on relay until spring clip is seated in the recess. switch on master unit towards • 6) switch on slave unit away from 7) Observe LED. 2) Plug new relay into socket. slide cutout switch on slave unit towards lens. Tighten jackscrews. • LENS CABLE r CUT-OUT SWITCH SLOT JACKSCREW Figure 7. If LED is out.2-8. SIide cutout lens.2-9b. as indicated by steady lighting of the LE D indicator. Push socket end. Insert socket end of relay into clamp.2-9a. switch on master unit away from 8) If symptoms of light-ray failure persist. If LED is lit.8 . Aiming of A6971 Y LIght Ray 5) Slide cutout lens. Slide cutout lens. The overall effect of the electronic detector. The Type 7048AA detector contains four antennas and is designed for use with standard doors.. The main advantage of this device is that it operates on a proximity principle.. TAB (b) IN RECESS Figure 7. along the leading edge of the door. They are protected by a similar vinyl-clad L-shaped cover. is covered by two L-shaped Tenite faceplates.2-11. then. is to reduce passenger transfer time when a stop is made. and a terminal board to facilitate wiring are mounted on an L-shaped vinyl-clad metal alloy base plate.2-9 . preamplifier unit. MM.2-10) is used in lieu of safety shoes and light-ray detectors in high-rise. (See Figure 7. even if the doors are almost fully open and in no danger of striking the passenger. which requires actual contact with the passenger before initiating reversal. each approximately 16 inches long. The electronic door detector comprises a power supply and memory unit mounted on top of the car. It thus re-opens the doors sooner than the safety shoe.) The antennas. It also eliminates the unnecessary door reversals that occur as . The antennas are preformed L-shaped steel strips.. The adjustment controls of the preamplifier are accessible when the top faceplate is removed .Door Protective Devices • LIFT HERE PUSH 1/32" _ FINGER RELAY CLAMp.138 7. and a detector chassis and preamplifier unit mounted on the leading edge of each door. • . Relay Replacement Type 7048 Electronic Detector • The Otis Type 7048 electronic door detector (Figure 7. The open end of the chassis.soon as the Iight ray is interrupted. high-performance elevator systems. causing door reversal when a passenger or object passes near the door edge.2-9. (a) SOCKET INSERT . 10 MM-138 • I I . A separate base plate.2-12. is provided for the preamplifier unit and terminal board. approximately 12 inches long.2-13. Separate covers and faceplates are provided for each base plate. (See Figure 7.2-10. (See Figure 7. 7. Type 7048 Door Detector The Type 7048BB detector chassis contains an eight-antenna array and is primarily used with close-coupled doors. Most detector circuits are located on a single printed-circuit board mounted within an open rectangular frame. and an ON-OF F switch.) The unit is sealed with transparent plastic covers.Door Protective Devices • PREAMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY " • DETECTOR • Figure 7.) Each antenna is approximately 7 1/2 inches long and is equally spaced along the L-shaped base plate. sensitivity.2. The sensitivity control adjusts the amount of unbalance needed to initiate a door reversal. The balance control is adjusted to tune the bridge for a null condition when the doors are closing and the doorway is clear. Three controls are provided for each of the two detector circuits: balance. ~I ~ ANTENNA ANTENNAS i. Printed.2.2. • ~ ~ . BASE PLATE • \\ BOTTOM FACEPLATE • Figure 7.Circuit Board 7..OFF BALANCE TAPE • MM. AMPLIFIER BASE PLATE TERMINAL BOARD ANTENNA' COVER . Four-Antenna Arrangement • I BOTTOM FACEPLATE Figure 7. I.2.12.2.i .13. Eight-Antenna Arrangement FRAME PLASTIC COVERS PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SENSITIVITY ON.11 . STANDARD DOOR TOP FACE PLATE l _COUPLED DOOR • PREAMPLIFIER BASE PLATE TERMINAL BOARD PRE.11.Door Protective Devices • TOP FACE PLATE PREAMPLIFIER COVER COVER CLOSE.138 Figure 7. CAPACITOR C3 • . Normally closed contacts of the EPR relay initiate a door reversal when the relay drops out.) Transistors 01 and 02 and transformer T2 are part of an oscillator circuit which generatesthe 200-volt.138 • I . This signal can be monitored at the 80 test jack.2-14. 7.. 1-KV reference. is sufficiently higher than the reference level.a memory circuit..2-15) samples and memorizes the preamplifier null level each time the doors open and no obstruction is in the doorway. The system can be turned "on" or "off" by means of the EDC switch which is in the secondary circuit of transformer T1. and capacitor C3 are some of the internal power supply components that generate the dc operating voltages for both power supply and preamplifier circuits.2-14. TRANSFORMER T1 TRANSFORMER T2 TRANSISTORS EPR RELAY . wiring. The system is fired to re-open the doors only when a signal. Transformer T1.2-12 MM.r Q1 EOC SWITCH LQ2 • REDUCED 1KC POTENTIOMETER Figure 7. and associated hardware is included in the power supply. Power Supply To prevent temperature and humidity changes from unbalancing the bridge circuit and causing repeated door reversals. The memory circuit (Figure 7. Zener diode CR14. consisting of a printed-circuit board. produced normally by passengers entering or leaving the car. The REDUCED 1KC potentiometer is adjusted for a reduced sensitivity of the system when the doors are almost fully closed. (See Figure 7. This level then becomes the reference for the system.Door Protective Devices The power supply is mounted on top of the car. Wiping the detector faceplate with a clean rag dampened slightly with cleaner. The cleaner to use with either operation Otis Detector Faceplate Cleaner. This process requires removing the detector unit from the door panel 7. Be sure to clean out the ribs in the plastic faceplate in addition to wiping down the surface . but also helps remove any static charge. Internal cleaning of the detector units should be performed at least annually. the more humid and dusty the environment. You can avoid this problem by keeping the detector clean and dry. the more often this faceplate should be cleaned.2-13 • MM-138 .2-15. Wipe down the faceplate at least once a week in humid. not only helps remove dust and dirt. dusty environments. There are two levels of cleaning: 1) 2) Wiping down the faceplate Internal cleaning. dirt. or moisture on the detector faceplate or within the detector unit can cause delays in service through false triggering of the detector.Door Protective Devices • INSULATOR CIRCUIT BOARD GUIDE CABLE Figure 7. or the more dirt that is tracked into the elevator. is and. Memory Board • Cleaning Accumulation of dust. The meter is set on the dc scale and initially on the 60-volt range.) Setting a DIPswitch to "on" shunts one of the series resistors. keep the meter inside the car and away from the detector antennas.13& • .2-16. Adjustments • Detector adjustment should be checked if the unit tends to false fire (too sensitive) or fails to fire (not sensitive enough). When taking readings. the sensitivity of the detector is essentially at the mid-range position.2. 7. In addition.Door Protective Devices and cleaning the preamp chassis as well as all internal surfaces with a clean rag dampened with cleaner. With two sWitches "on" and two "off". Two DIPswitches on the memory circuit board (one for each bridge) are used to adjust the sensitivity.2-17. Be sure detector is clean and dry before making any adjustments. (See Figure 7. Sensitivity DIPswitches The preamplifier output is measured at the test points in the car service cabinet. Set the DIPswitch for maximum sensitivity without false firing.) The positive meter probe is inserted into the black test point and the common probe into the orange test point. thereby increasing the sensitivity.14 MM. • SW 2 SWITCHES 'ON' -2 SWITCHES 'OFF' Figure 7.2-16. (See Figure 7. the edge of the door panel where the detector unit is mounted should be wiped down before re-installing the detector. J t::::::\. However. and in the case of close-coupled doors. .. block the doors near the fully closed position6 inches or less.75V RED I • Figure 7.when the doors are approximately 1 inch from the fully open position. Door Protective Devices • T SWITCH ORN TP ON BLK TP B SWITCH ON I I B L K ---{ i. If the EPR relay does not remain de-energized." ("("". To test this desensitizing feature.15 • MM-13B . Preamplifier Output The null or residual voltage may have increased slightly after the sensitivity amplifier has been adjusted.2-17.14.75 volt. 7. increase the BO supply by turning the REDUCED 1KC potentiometer in the clockwise direction.2. the doors should reopen only when the faceplate is touched.2.) If the EP R relay drops out before the faceplate is touched. (See Figure 7._~. O. decrease BO by turning the potentiometer in the counterclockwise direction. Run a hand along the faceplate from top to bottom. repeat the entire procedure for the other door. In this desensitized area. the residual for either antenna pair should not exceed 0. There is a desensitized zone when the door is 6 inches from the fully closed position. This check is made with both the T and B switches "on". If the car has center-opening doors. B VDC 4. 7. The memory circuit output should remain at 4.18. check the connection of the desensitizing contacts. The output of the memory circuit.3 MAX J \ BLK • Figure 7.volt dc range and connect it to the special test jack.138 • . Remove your hand and allow the doors to open fully. (See Figure 7.2-19) is used in lieu of safety shoes and light-ray detectors in high-performance elevator systems.2. Memory Circuit Output To adjust the memory circuit. When the doors open past the desensitized zone. should be 4. set the voltmeter on the 1Q. The main advantage of this device is that is operates on a proximity principle.2.16 MM. If not.3 volts maximum.3 volts during the entire open and close cycle. causing door reversal when a passenger or object passes near the edge of the closing door.Door Protective Devices • BLUE TIP BLACK TIP \ RED.2.) Open the doors slightly and touch the leading edge of the door. as observed on the meter.18. the meter reading should not change. Type 9948R Door Detector The Otis Type 9948R door detector (Figure 7. o. is to reduce passenger transfer time when a stop is made. The antenna unit is attached to the leading edge of the car door in the traditional manner or can be mounted on the nose of close-coupled doors. cars with center-opening doors require two antenna units.17 • MM-138 .. then. 7. therefore... The 9948 R Door Detector consists of a power supply. The power supply for the antenna(s) is mounted on the top of the car controller.=i ~ . Door Protective Devices • POWER SUPPLY UNIT CABLE AND GROUND WIRE BRACKET ANTENNA UNIT • Figure 1.•.. "..~. hardware and cables. The overall effect of the proximity detector. 9948R Door Detector It thus re-opens the doors sooner than the safety shoe which requires actual contact with the passenger before initiating reversal. '. evenif the doors are almost fully open and in no danger of striking the passenger. one antenna unit is attached to each car door. As with safety shoes. one or two antenna units.""""".2-19.2.~~. It also eliminates the unnecessary door reversals that occur as soon as the light ray is interrupted.. associated mounting brackets. a printed circuit board (located under the nomenclated cover). an output connector (stereo jack).2-20.Door Protective Devices The antenna unit (Figure 7. ~ I: • • • PLUG (BOTTOM)~ ~ • Antenna Unit MM.2-21) houses the electronic circuits which become accessible when the faceplate is snapped off the extrusion cladding.2-18 . ~PLUG PVC EXTRUSION CLADDING (TOP) PVC FACEPLATE • • I I • ~ •• • • ANTENNA ASSEMB"LY • DEFLECTOR I •• • I • .138 Figure 7. It consists of the U-shaped guard. Five holes are located at the top of the faceplate to provide accessto adjustments and the null indicator used during installation.2-20) consists of an antenna assembly and deflector enclosed with in a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) housing made up of an extrusion cladding and a faceplate. and a set of antennas: upper and lower and two auxiliary antennas. Two PVC plugs seal the top and bottom of the antenna assembly. 7. The antenna assembly (Figure 7. and indicator located on the printed circuit board behind it. The admonition not to remove the cover is self evident. in the correct position for left-hand doors. instruction is a reminder to fully seat the in-line stereo jack that is used to connect the antenna to the power supply unit.2-20) COVER insert shim I INiWf " urr UPPER ANTENNA SET -SET SENS(ITIVITY) SENS '0' how to position the 'shim' Icalled the deflector right-and deflector • . The second hole provides access to a wire loop to which you can connect suitable test instruments. • • 6 diode) used as a null indicator. The 'Insert SH 1M' label shows in Figure 7. Antenna Assembly 7.ADJUSTMENT The SENS hole provides BAL AUXILIARY ANTENNA (UPPER) a screwdriver access to the sensitivity adjustment.5-mm diameter insulated rod to disconnect the auto balance circuit.13B LOWER ANTENNA driver access to the balance adjustment. The 'CLICK NULL INDICATOR MONITOR TEST POINT MOUNTING SCREW A hole at the top allows you to view a red LED (light emitting socket fully home' hom.Door Protective Devices • GUARD STEREO JACK ••• ICLlCK' socket fully The nomenclated cover identifies the adjustments. The BAL hole provides screw- I 'It I AUXILIARY ANTENNA (LOWER) • MM.2-21. Figure 7. This capacitor adjustment has about 17 turns. The arrow under the hole indicates that the sensitivity is increased as the adjustment is turned in the clockwise direction. This is called the monitor test point. The must always be placed ADJUSTMENT on the cab side.19 . The SET hole allows you to do not remove this cover insert a 2. MOUNTING SCREW BAL(ANCE) . The cover is held in place with two screws.2. test point. a low-frequency oscillator and relay driver and several controls. The door detector is adjusted with the car leveled at a landing and with the door operator made inoperative. It serves as the junction box for the door detector and all connections to the car controller. turn the SENSitivity adjustment counterclockwise approximately 1/2 turn. (This disables the autobalance circuit. be set to some reduced value when the car door is at each of its limits. that the desensitizing contacts have no effect..2-21. The ON/OFF switch turns off only the power supply outputs (and de-energizes the relay). a door position input.5-mm insulated pin into the SET hole in the faceplate. Insert a 2. Two terminal strips provide the tie points connecting power. MM-138 2) 3) 7. For center opening doors. The DESENSITIZED SENSITIVITY adjustment permits the detector sensitivity to.2-22) consists of a single printed circuit board enclosed in a metal case. The power supply unit contains a regulated power supply. Adjustments • • See Figure 7.Door Protective Devices The power supply unit (Figure 7.) Using a non-metallic screwdriver. adjustments. the antenna unit(s). each detector is adjusted individually with the opposite door made inoperative by disconnecting the stereo jack at the top of the antenna unit. It is normally energized. A diode is connected across the breaking contacts of the relay and should be removed when the door detector is used with controllers using ac relays. The relay provides the door-reversal output. and a neon indicator. 1) Set the door approximately 4 to 6 inches from its fully open position to make sure . and door-reversal output. It does NOT disconnect the source voltage.20 • .2. and drops out when an unbalanced condition is sensed . The neon lamp lights up when the relay is energized to indicate that the antennas are balanced. DIODE NEON LAMP RELAY DESENSITISED SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT TERMINALS EP19.138 Figure 7. 11. 9.2.2. 12.21 .20 • MM. 2.22 Power Supply Unit 7. 8.Door Protective Devices • • ON/OFF SWITCH TERMINALS EP1. the bracket to the car door.Door Protective Devices 4) Stand away from the door and check if the red LED "null indicator" is lit.2. adjust the SENSitivitY control so that the LED goes out when your hand is approximately 2 inches away from the top antenna.22 . and the power supply to the • MM. Troubleshooting If unable to balance the detector. proceed with step 6.2-23. If not. If the LED flashed "on".138 7. Step back and check if the LED is now "on". • 5) 6) Using your hand as the target. Removethe pin from the SET hole. continue to turn the BALance adjustment clockwise in 1/2-turn increments until the LED remains "on".2-23 are approximately the same for all landings.2. If it is. Move your hand (fingers together and palm parallel to and facing the door edge) horizontally towards the upper antenna and see if the LED flashes "on". 7) • 8) 9) 10) Verify proper detector operation at other landings by reinserting the insulated pin into the SET hole and checking that the target detection distances shown in Figure 7. turn the BALance adjustment clockwise about 1/2 turn.22) so that the neon lamp in the supply always goes off whenever the faceplate is touched (three fingers up to a height of 62 inches). The detection distances are measuredfrom the center of each antenna and should be maximized and approximately equal. to meet the criteria shown in Figure 7. If the LED did not flash "on". Reposition the car door in the desensitized zone (fully opim) and adjust the DESENSITIZED SENSITIVITY control in the power supply (Figure 7. as required. try the following: o Check the mounting screws that secure the antenna unit to the bracket. adjust the balance control. turn the BALance adjustment counterclockwise in 1/2-turn increments until the LED remains lion". The BALance adjustment may require "averaging" to suit all floors. Without readjusting the BALance control. Door Protective Devices • -~~~~.~~.~.~~~ ~~ " "' • • • •• • : • •• : • • • • • • • •• •• •• • •• •• • • •• • • ,' .-;., •• •• •• • •, • • • • , • • •• ••, • • •• • •• • • , • • • •• •• •• • . ,' ..;~. •• •, • • •• •• •: • •• •: • •• • • •: • •• • • • • : • ••...••....••• _.J~ ~......... _ • •• • • • •• • • I • • • r-' "'.~. LED o 1--====::::::::::) UPPER DETECTION DISTANCE . o o L I SAL ADJ 52" LOWER DETECTION DISTANCE ;BALANCE ADJUSTMENT I 20" SETISALI ADJUSTMENT SO THATILEDJ GOES OUT WHEN TARGET.DETECTION DISTANCES ARE MAXIMUM AND EQUAL (:1:1/8") _____________ l~ __ ~~_~~~~ ~ __ Balance Adjustment Criteria • MM.138 Figure 7.2.23. 7.2.23 Door Protective Devices car top. All screws should be as tight as possible to ensure good grounds. 0 Unplug the stereo jack, unscrew the body, and examine the contact surfaces. They must be clean. Use a voltohmmeter ard make the following measurements in the power supply unit: 1) Voltage between terminals EP8 and EP9 should be 105:t- 10% volts ac or 110 to 130 volts dc. Voltage between terminals EP17 (+) and EP15 should be 12 volts dc (right-hand door). Voltage between terminals EP20 (+) and EP15 should be 12 volts dc (Iefthand door). Resistance between the power supply box and ground (EP12) should be at least 220K ohms. Resistance between the car door(s) and ground (EP12) should be less than 1 ohm. • 0 2) 3) 4) 5) • 0 If detection is low, check the desensitizing switch contacts in the door operator control box. When used with the 7777 A door operator, the switch should be open when the door is 2 inches away from the fully open position and 6 inches away from the fully closed position. If the above checks do not uncover the problem, replace the door detector. 0 • 72.24 MM-138 • • • • OTIS 8.1 Rails and Guides Guide Rails Cars and counterweights are guided up and down the hoistway on rails of either Tee or round cross section. Assembly of the Tee-shaped rails to the hoistway wall is shown in Figure 8.1-1. The two'piece bracket permits both vertical and horizontal adjustment of rail position. The tie.plate prevents horizontal motion of the rail with respect to the bracket. The rail is held firmly against the bracket by a clipand-spring combination. However, clip design permits the rai I to move vertically with respect to the bracket as the building settles. To prevent rust formation that would inhibit this sliding action, the mating surfaces of the spring and the rail are coated with grease or heavy oil during installation. • TIE.PLATE .~fj;j ~ RAIL BRACKETS 5/8 SQUARE BE USED. HEAD BOLTS CAN "STOP" ON CLIP '''''''' "AO ''OM '""'~ STEEL SPRING AFTER RAI LS ARE SET, , GUIDE RAIL BEND THE ENDS OF THE TIE.PLATE AROUND THE BRACKET TO HOLD RAIL IN PLACE • MM.139 FORGED RAIL CLIP Figure 8.1-1. Tee Rail Assembly 8.1.1 Rails and Guides • FISHPLATE RAIL JOINT, • Figure 8.1-2. ree Rail Fishplate Tee rail sections are approximately 10 feet long. Side-to-side motion of mating rail sections is prevented by the tongue- and- groove design of the end surfaces. (See Figure 8.1-2.) The mating rail sections are secured by fish plates which also prevent front-to-back motion of the rails. 65EW2 BOLT 1/2. 13 FIN NUT 1/2 SAE WASHER 1/2 SPRING LOCK.WASHER ROUND RAIL BRACKET 1/2 x 3" SLOTS "U" TYPE COUNTERWEIGHT SUPPORT BRACKET SUPPORT ANGLE Figure 8.1-3. 8.t-2 Round Rail Assembly MM.139 Rails and Guides • Assembly of the round rails to the hoistway wall is shown in Figure 8.'-3. In this example, a U-shaped bracket, bolted to the hoistway wall, supports both counterweight rails. Each rail is mounted to an arm of the "U" by a two-piece bracket which permits both lateral and vertical adjustment. If? --""\,\ I~ SPLICE PIN :~~! 9\ I ~I ~I FISHPLATE 2" X 2" x 1/4" ANGLE ,. I I I ( ~-' I Figure 8.1-4. Round Rail Fishplate Mating round rail sections are joined by splice pins as shown in Figure 8.'-4. The joints are further secured by an angle fish plate bolted in place. Maintenance • MM.139 Clean car and counterweight rails annually. One man operates the car from the top inspection buttons. The second man satu rates a cloth with Otis Elevator Co. cleaning compound NO.2 and holds it against the rail as it is moved up. Dry off the rails. Do not lubricate rails. 8.1.3 1-4 .1-5. More importantly. they maintain the position of the car safety (and. and two at the bottom on opposite ends of the safety-plank channels. Location of Roller 8. where used.) The top roller guides differ from the bottom roller guides only by the addition of guard plates.1.139 Figure 8.Rails and Guides Roller Guides Roller guides are guide shoes that ride on the "T" or round guide rails to keep the car or counterweight aligned and plumb with the hoistway.5. (See Figure 8. is used for the counter- • ROLLER GUIDE ROLLERJ GUIDE SAFETY PLANK • Guides MM. counterweight safety) such that the safety jaws will engage the guide rails when tripped. Roller guides are located at four positions on the car frame: two at the top on opposite ends of the crosshead. A similar arrangement weight. Roller Guide Assembly A typical roller guide comprises three rubbertired rollers mounted on a stand: two side rollers for front and rear alignment and one for side-to-side or postwise alignment. which limits tlie maximum displacement of the roller.1-6. which determines the amount of pressure the roller has on the rail blade. STOP ADJUSTMENT SPRING SPRING ADJUSTING NUT Figure 8.1-6. Each roller arm has two adjustments: one for spring tension. • MM. (See Figure 8.139 8.Rails and Guides • SIDE ROLLER ~. The other end of the lever is attached to a compression spring wh ich maintains the roller in constant contact with the rail blade.1-5 . and a stop.) Each roller rides on a bearing and is mounted on one end of a lever. Tires will give long service if the roller is properly lubricated and spring pressure correctly set. To locate the defective roller guide.6 MM-139 • • . A three-roller version is supplied for "T" rail applications. turn each guide by hand. then on the left. a defective rubber tire. are symptomatic of incorrect spring pressure or incorrect adjustment of the stop.. A noisy ride is symptomatic of excessive spring pressure.8. No adjustment or maintenance is required unless a noisy ride or excessive sway is noticed when riding the car. a two-roller version for round rails. repeat test with the weight in the front. or lack of lubrication. If scraping sound does not occur.1. A scraping sound heard when the car is loaded to one side. add grease to the Alemite fitting. and finally on the right side. There is no spring adjustment for these side rollers. Some smaller roller guides utilize a single tension spring for the two side rollers. and are vulcanized directly to the metal. wheel. / • o Maintenance A properly lubricated roller guide should give long. Replace entire roller if rubber tire exhibits flat or worn spots. the fault is either excessive pressure or lack of lubrication. The tires are of a special rubber. trouble-free service. If heard. but there are stop adjustments. or excessive sway during full-speed runs. .Rails and Guides Several variations of the typical are in current use. ease up on spring tension. selected after extensive tests of many compounds. Run at full speed. ride the top of the car with a 600-lb weight in the back of the cab. o roller gu ide A springless guide for hydraulic applications uses rollers mounted on eccentric shafts. If necessary. take up on the mechanical stop as shown in Figure 8. To locate the source of the scraping.1-6 . If the roller cannot be easily rotated. Lubricate the pin and bushing area with Otis Oil NO. listening for the noise. The eccentric permits adjustment of roller position with respect to the rail blade.2. If the roller still appears stiff. Setting of Spring-Adjusting Block The same test can be made to locate the source of excessive sway. then release the pry and advance the adjusting nut two turns for 7 7/8 inch rollers. If any springs are readjusted.Rails and Guides • IF GAP IS ALWAYS GREATER THAN l/l6-INCH. Back off if the roller arm touches the stop.1-7) is always more than 1/16 inch. or one turn for 3 3/4 inch rollers. If the space between the roller arm and the stop (Figure 8.1-7 . by turning in or backing off the spring-adjusting nut or stud.1-8) A good starting point is to pry the car until the slot in the guide stand rests solidly against the rail blade. (See Figure 8. It js permissible if the roller arm touches the stop occasionally during the test run. INCREASE NUMBER OF ACTIVE TURNS Figure B. The stops are set to prevent the guide stand from rubbing against the rail blade when the test run is made with the eccentric or unbalancing weights placed at each of the four platform positions shown earlier. Set the spring compression finger-tight. as needed. do not forget'to reset the stop nut. For roller guides that don~t have spring-adjusting blocks.I-7. increase the number of active turns set by the spring-adjusting block. the spring compression is either increased or decreased. MM-139 8. S. and turn it in a direction that reduces the pressure of the side rollers against the T-rail until one roller is just about to lift off the rail. (See Figure 8..l.0. reinstall the tie rod.. (See Figure 8. threaded like a turn-buckle.1-9. Setting of Spring-Adjusting Nut Ten-inch roller guides have two additional rideimproving adjustments: a tie rod between the front and back rollers and a dashpot on the postwise roller.1-8.) Both the tie rod and dash pot should be removed when making the stop and spring adjustments just described.) The tie rod applies a precompression force to the springs when the roller is just touching the rail..139 • . When the stop and spring adjustments are complete.Rails and Guides INITIAL SPRING ADJUSTMENT WITH GUIDE STAND PRIED AGAINST RAIL: 3-3/4" ROLLER GUIDE FINGER TIGHT PLUS 1 TURN 7-7/S" ROLLER GUIDE FINGER TIGHT PLUS 2 TURNS STOP ADJUSTMENTS • 't / - INCREASE COMPRESSION TO INCREASE STOP GAP DECREASE COMPRESSION TO DECREASE STOP GAP STAND Figure 8. Then turn the tie rod one-half turn in the opposite direction.S MM. which is. MM-139 TURN UNTIL ONE SIDE ROLLER IS JUST FREE OF RAIL.1-10.Rails and Guides • PIN AND RETAINING RING(2) DASH POT TIE ROD LOCK NUT(2) Figure 8. The half turn may be increasedslightly if a firmer riding effect is desired. Dashpot and Tie-Rod on to-Inch Roller Guide This keeps both rollers in contact with the rail and running. ( ) • Figure 8. THEN TURN 1/2 TURN IN OPPOSITE DIRECTION \ Tie-Rod Installation 8.'-9 .1-9. even if the car bounces back and forth during a run. loosen the screw and rotate the disc. Sliding Guide Shoes Sliding guides are sometimes installed on low-speed (hydraulic) installations with round rails.10 MM.1-11. (See Figure 8. check that the middle or medium-size hole in the disc is aligned with the pilot line in the piston valve. an advantage in a hydraulic installation where the car is supported principally by a telescoping cylinder with a tendency to tilt slightly when fully elongated.) The sliding guide offers greater resistance to sway than the roller guide.Rails and Guides • ROTATE DISC TO ALIGN CENTER HOLE WITH PISTON PILOT LINE FILL WITH OTIS NO. (See Figure 8. 41 OR lOW.1. If not. Dashpot Adjustment • The disc on the base of the dashpot piston has three orifices. 8.) As a starting point. each a different size to provide a different damping rate. Fill the cylinder with Otis No.1-11. then reinstall the dashpot on the roller guide with the piston end on top. The smaller or larger holes in the disc may also be tried to improve the riding qualities. 41 or lOW-3D oil to within 1 3/4 inches of the top.139 • .30 OIL SCREW Figure 8.1-12. ) Nylon has a low coefficient of friction. hence eliminating the need for guide rail lubrication. 8.1-131 at its minimum point. (See Figure 8. Sliding Guide Sliding guides are also used on low-speed counterweights with round rails.1-12.Rails and Guides • SHIM GUIDE SHOE CAR FRAME UPRIGHT (REF) • Figure 8. Maintenance Gib life is increased by Cleaningthe rails annually with Otis Cleaning Compound NO. • MM-139 Periodically measure the thickness of the gib (see Figure 8. compensate by adding a shim as shown in Figure 8.2.1-12. but the gap between rail and gib exceeds 1/16 inch.1-11 . If greater than 5/16 inch. replace gib. If less than 5/16 inch. Clean more frequently if rails begin to show an accumulation of gummy residue.1-13. The guide shoe is faced with a concave nylon gib at the point where contact is made with the round rail. Rails and Guides • (6) 1/4-20 X 5/8 FLANGED WHIZ BOLTS (TOP & BOTTOM HOLES) NYLON GIB (2) 380BS2 Figure 8.1-13. Installation of Nylon Gib • • 8.1-12 MM-139 . ' .2. separate from and independent of the normal slowdown circuit.140 As . be furnished to stop the car at the terminal.2. Only one Type 6072 switch is supplied per car.2 Stopping. actuating arm.1) is used in high-rise installations to slow down and stop the car at the terminal landing if the normal slowdown sequence should fail to occur. and Limit Switches • Figure 8.2-1. Type 6072 Stopping Switch TYPE 6072 Stopping Switch The Type 6072 stopping switch (Figure 8. • MM. and contact assembly. 8.1. but it is arranged to stop the car at both the top and bottom terminals.shown in Figure 8. This switch is mandated by the elevator safety code which requires that a device. this GWitch consists essentially of a roller.• OTIS 8.2. This emergency slowdown sequence is arranged to operate slightly behind the normal slowdown.2-2. the emergency slowdown has no effect.2 • MM. and the roller arm rail at the • PLATE • Figure 8. as the car approaches a terminal landing. 552. 8.2-2. ROLLER GUIDE CROSSHEAD the crosshead 8. the hoistway-mounted cams are shaped to gradually move the roller arm from its center. If normal slowdown is operational.Stopping & Limit Switches The stopping switch is mounted on of the carframe. slowing down and stopping the car at a somewhat more abrupt rate than the normal sequence. designated so forth. Stopping Switch Installation As shown in Figure 8. the emergency slowdown sequence gains control of car motion. The 551. initiating a slowdown sequence that reduces car speed and finally stops the car. non-actuating position to its extreme clockwise or counterclockwise position. If car speed is detected as being excessive at the terminal.140 . as shown in Figure stopping switch contacts.2-3.2. are sequentially opened as rides on cams fastened to the guide upper and lower terminal landings. With a relay controller. depending upon the direction of travel. motion of the roller arm opens the 55 contacts sequentially. 2-3 .Stopping & Limit Switches • ROLLER THIS SURFACE GUIDE RAIL • -. Stopping Switch Cams 8.2-3. (7' ~~I \-. '-"-'I~ ON ROLLER RIDES ON THIS SURFACE UP LOWER CAM -' • MM-140 Figure 8.J • UPPER CAM R IDES ON STOPPING SWITCH • CARFRAME J / . 2-4 L . Although available in a great many variations. Type 6098 Limit Switch The Type 6098 (Figure 8. If the tire is worn or loose.2-4) is a position-sensitive mechanically actuated switch. opening of a stopping switch contact will initiate an emergency stop. Type 6098 Switches • MM. Maintenance • The stopping switch and cams have been positioned during installation and should remain as originally set. if car speed is detected as being excessive at the terminal (indicating that neither normal nor backup software slowdown routines have functioned properly).a box of contacts.Stopping & Limit Switches With the microprocessor-based Elevonic controller. replace the entire roller. Periodically check that the cam operating face and the switch contact assembly are smooth and free of accumulated dirt.140 8. These switches require very little maintenance. Be sure that all joints between cam sections are filed smooth. • 'I ROLLER CAM TR IPPER Figure 8. all 6098 switches consist of just three parts .2-4. The rubber-tired rollers will emit noise if the rubber tire is loose on the roller or the ball bearing is not properly lubricated. including the bearing. and an actuating mechanism. a cover. 2-5) is supplied in many variations. cam and tripper . CONTACTS AND BASES Figure 8.2-5 . for single or double throw. including arrangementsfor single or double pole. RETURNING (NOT SHOWN) • MOVABLE CONTACTS (TWO USED) CONTACT BASE WITH STATIONARY CONTACTS CONTACT BOX COMPLETE WITH LEVER. • MM-140 8.2-5.2-4 and tabulated by application below. and provisions for auxiliary contacts.I Stopping & Limit Switches • ARM WITH ROLLER The contact box (Figure 8. SPRING.roller.are illustrated in Figure 8. Internal View of Tvpe 6098 Switch Three types of actuating mechanisms. the elevator approximately 12 inches bevond the One such switch landing. at each terminal. jaws to bring safety guide rails. disconnecting (as in a safety mechanism) pulls up the tripper. Release and turn the switch arm so that the pin engages the tri pper seat. operating the contacts within. Buffer Switch opens. power.2. tape or PPT drive Safety-Operated rod from speeds sufficiently into contact with Switch is operated by carrier if car over. Gate Switch approximately closed.2.6a. Motion of an actuating rod Broken Tape Switch power tape opens. when elevator platform depresses buffer plunger. Tripper. this switch must be manually reset. Once actuated. if compensating • Cam. remains open until plunger spring returns to normal position when platform is raised clear of buffer. To reset. 3) • MM. disconnecting power.Stopping & Limit Switches Type of Operation Roller. which shows the switch in its tripped position. terminal located when opens.6 . before closes when one half car door inch from is fully mo~es the switch Closing of this switch is required car can start.6b and perform the following procedure: 1) 2) Push up on mechanism that activated switch. if floating breaks. Motion of roller on the vane Applications Final Limit Switch power. disconnecting platform is is • actuates the switch arm. Motion of cam along a roller arm.2. Release of Tripper Switch Par:s essential to switch reset are shown in Figure 8. refer to Figure 8. releasing Compensation Sheave Switch disconnecting rope breaks. actuating the switch arm. Push tripper until seat is aligned with latch pin on switch arm.140 8. opens. Keep the surface of the cams clean and free of any lubricant or any gummy or sticky substance .2-6a. Reset Position Maintenance • Carefully check alignment of rubber roller with cam.2-6b.2-7 .Stopping & Limit Switches • SWITCH ARM TRIPPER LATCH PIN TRIPPER SEAT Figure 8. Switch arms that are self-centering should have only enough spring pressureto bring them back to normal position. Heavy spring pressurewill compress the rubber tire unnecessarilywhen it strikes and rides on the cam. Tripped Position Figure 8. Side or diagonal travel of roller wears the rubber tires. • MM-140 8. an action that tends to break down the adhesion that bonds the tire to the rim. There must be sufficient space so that the cables will not be crushed as the car passes.141 8. the cable loop may have to be adjusted.• OTIS 8. The chafed spots on the cable should be taped carefully. Maintenance • If sections of the traveling cable become worn or chafed. the broken wire should be locateq and spliced if the cable is otherwise in good condition." The remaining part of the run. The cables should be suspended at a point above the center of travel and hung on a hanger under the car. nor should the cable swing against the rails. or beam pads installed . is made in rigid conduit or in metal troughs. Further. The loop should be of just the right width so that the portion of the loop suspended from the center junction box will hang clear of both wall and car. The splice should not be soldered because of the stiffness this imparts to the splice joint . from the hoistway junction box to the machine room. If a cable is accidentally torn off.1 . there should be no obstructions that will damage the cable. These cables move with the car and hence are called the "traveling cables. The first part of the cable run is from a junction box at the bottom of the car to a junction box on the wall approximately half way up the hoistway.3. it may be spliced if the splice does not become part of the loop.3 Traveling Cable One or more multi-wire electrical cables connect the car to the machine room. When all spares in the cable have been used and a cable wire is broken. • MM. the rough wall smoothed. due to rubbing on rough spots on the wall or rubbing on the car or beams. CROSSHEAD 1/2 INCH GOVERNOR ROPE o • / '/" FASTEN TO TRIPPING LEVER \. \ . o The governor is a mechanical device that measures car speed.. . "'- WIRE ROPE CLAMPS .4-1) consists of the governor and the safety. When tripped.4 Governor and Safety The elevator safety system (Figure 8.142 SAFETY Figure 8.4-1. the safety mechanism grips the car guide rail. and trips the safety if the overspeeding increases when traveling in the down direction.~ PLATFORM • MM. bringing the car to a stop with a deceleration well within human tolerance.. Elevator Safety System TENSION SHEAVE 8.• OTIS 8.4-' . opens electrical contacts in the safety chain when the car overspeeds in either direction.~~ . For simplicity. 3/8 In. E F 8.4-1).2. and travels with the car.4-2) is installed on elevators operating at speeds higher than 150 feet per minute . counterweights located over occupied areas are also equipped with safety mechanisms (counterweight safeties). A 700 Ft 1. One end of the governor rope is fastened to the releasing carrier of the safety on the carframe plank beam.4. Since the rope is connected to. • Figure 8. only the car safety system is described. In a typical arrangement of an elevator safety system (Figure 8.Governor & Safety All roped passenger elevators are equipped with safety mechanisms (car safeties). the 7063 governor is equipped with any one of three sheaves.000 Above 1. Type 7063 Governor 7063 Type Max. the speed of the car. the governor sheave will rotate at a speed directly proportional to the car speed. depending 0'. Speeds (FPM) Sheave Size Rope Dia. Rise Ca. In addition. Both safeties work on the same principle.000 150-350 350-1200 1200-1800 12 In.2 16 24 1/2 1/2 MM. As shown in the chart. the other end is clamped at the governor rope hitch on the crosshead.142 • .. the governor rope makes a complete loop around the governor sheave in the machine room and the tension sheave in the pit.4. Type 7063 Governor The type 7063 governor (Figure 8. 8.4-3 • MM.4. If car speed continues to increase. driven outward by centrifugal force. trip an overspeed switch that cuts off power and sets the brake. the further outward motion of the flyweights trips the latching device which then releases a swinging jaw.4.142 . Figure 8. When the car overspeeds.• FLYWEIGHTS Governor & Safety SHEAVE OVERSPEED SWITCH TYPE 7063B TRIPPING ASSEMBLY LATCH • ROPE_ STATIONARY JAW Figure 8.3.3 illustrates the type 70638 tripping assembly that is standard with the low-speed 7063A governor. Type 70638 Trip Assembly All governors in this series are used with flexible guide clamp car safeties. the flyweights. through a bellcrank and connecting link. When the car overspeeds.4 MM.Governor & Safety OVERSPEED SWITCH SPRING • FRAME CAM SURFACE CAM SURFACE TRIPPER (OVERSPEED SWITCH) TR IPPER (MOVABLE JAW) JAW LATCH MOUNTING SLOT Figure 8.4-5).4. use the type 706~BB tripper assembly (see Figure 8. Higher-speed governors such as the 7063F. 8. It has two tripper arms.4. the flyweights will move out further and the second or outer tripper will be engaged by a flyweight lug. This outward movement of the rod is translated into a horizontal movement of a plunger inside the sheave shaft.142 • • . the end of the plunger actuates speed contacts (in a type 7063J switch box) and the tripper. Type 70638 Details Figure 8. The rotation of this tripper actuates a pushbutton switch module that opens the safety chain. The latch holding the movable jaw swings out of the way as the tripper cam rotates. If the car continues to gain speed. A rod attached to one of the flyweights moves out of the sheave hub as the governor comes up to speed.4-4. The inner and longer tripper is struck first by the flyweight lug as the car begins to overspeed.4 shows a more detailed view of the 7063B tripper assembly. The connecting link is pulled towards the sheave. the resulting motion of the cam will actuate the overspeed switch. but in either case. 8. therefore.4-6 illustrates the basic speed-sensing mechanism of the 7063F governor. The end of the plunger is connected to a second bellcrank that actuates the tripper assembly. The direction of rotation will depend on the arrangement used.4-5. Type 706388 Trip Assembly • MM.4-5 .142 Figure 8.• ROD BELL CRANK CONNECTING LINK TYPE PLUNGER 7063Y TRIPPER 7063J GOVERNOR SWITCH Governor & Safety • Figure 8. the plunger will have moved far enough for its shoulder to rotate the bellcrank. the rod attached to the flyweight is pulled out of the sheave hub. The other end of the rod is attached to a bellcrank that moves the plunger inside the sheave shaft a distance proportional to the movement of the rod and flyweight and. causing the tripping lever to rotate. to the car speed. Further overspeeding causes the latching lever to swing out of the way and release the movable jaw. If the car begins to overspeed. As the car comes up to speed. will cause the latching lever to swing aside and release the movable jaws.4-6.4.142 8. the lever will rotate on its stationary pivot pin. This forces the spring-loaded cam to open the pushbutton overspeed switch contacts. Speed-Sensing Mechanism " As the bellcrank pulls the connecting link towards the sheave. Further overspeeding causes the lever to make contact with the tripper arm which.6 . • MM. in turn.Governor & Safety PLUNGER -FLYWEIGHT BELL CRANK CONNECTING LINK BELL LEVER CRANK • ROD TRIPPER ARM OVERSPEED SWITCH • CAM LATCHING LEVER Figure 8. 142 Read and observe the following precautions before doing any work on the elevator safety system.4. 8.inch (types 7063E arid 7063F) governors may be fitted with a switch providing contacts for field control and potential switch slowdown operation.7.7 . Adjustments • MM. the 16. Governor Checkpoints When required.4. and 24. Governor tests must be made by competent elevator personnel familiar with elevator safety practices.• Governor & Safety OVERSPEED SWITCH ROPE GRIP TRIPPE R ARM TYPE 7063B TRIPPING ASSEMBLY LATCH • FLYWEIGHT LUGS Figure 8. Fit a 3-inch sheave into the drill chuck. The Type 7063A governor (with 12-inch sheave) is tested as follows: 1) Manually operate the overspeed switch tripper arm (Figure 8.4.Governor & Safety Elevator must be removed from normal passenger service during the checks and adjustments described below. first free up the governor mechanism by cleaning and lubricating the parts. Run the car at contract speed and check that there is no contact between the flyweight lugs and the tripper arms. If trip speeds are off. Then operate the rope-grip tripper arm and check that the movable jaw is released.4-8) held against the sheave' rim. Measure governor speed using a tachometer fitted with a 6-inch drive wheel (Figure 8.8 . Governor will be driven in the next test by a 1/2-inch electric drill with a rheostat-controlled ac supply.142 8. Wrap a 6-foot rubber-link V-belt around the governor sheave groove and the 3-inch sheave. • 2) 3) HAND TACHOMETER Figure 8. then retest. Tachometer 4) Overspeed the governor and check that both the overspeed switch and the rope grip trip within j: 5 fpm of the test speeds marked on the data plate. Remove governor rope.4-7) and check that the switch is actuated. 5) • MM.4-8. If uncertain as to correct speeds.• l. contact your local Otis office for assistance. please have this procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company. If familiar with setting governors. Governor & Safety 6) If trip speeds are still off. WASHER (ALSO ATIACHES SPACER AND BEARING COVER) BREAKING Figure 8. Governor Switch Contacts • MM.and 24inch sheaves) are tested as follows: 1) Run the car at contract speed and check that the contacts of the 7063J switch (Figure 8. • BREAKING OLT.4-9. Under no circumstances should inexperienced personnel attempt to adjust any element of the elevator safety system . If unfamiliar with governor adjustment.4-9) open and close at the proper speeds. governor requires readjustment. add or remove washers to adjust tension on flyweight spring.4-9 .142 The Type 7063£ and F Governors 16. 8. If trip speed is off. adjust actuating speed of the switch box contacts by increasing or decreasing the length of the rod attached to the flyweight.4-10. 2) Check also that the overspeed switch and the rope grip do not trip during a run at contract speed. If familiar with governor adjustment. Overspeed the car and note speed at which tripper operates. Governor Adjustmeys 4) Short out the overspeed switch contacts and block the movable jaw so that it can release. 5) r 6) • 8. (See Figure 8. in turn.4-10.4-10. please have this procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company.4. correct the tripping speed by lengthening or shortening the connecting link.10 MM-142 . 3) -SWITCH IS ADJUSTED BY REMOVING BALL JOINT FROM WEIGHT AND ROTATING ROD TRiPPER ADJUSTMENT is MADE BY REMOVING BALL JOINT FROM TRIPPER AND ROTATING CONNECTING LINK • Figure 8. (See Figure 8. then retest.Governor & Safety Measure speed using a tachometer fitted with a 6-inch drive wheel (Figure 8.) If unfamiliar with governor adjustment. but will not actually engage the governor rope.) This. If necessary.4-8) held against the sheave rim. adjusts the length of travel of the plunger. first free up the governor mechanism by cleaning and lubricating the parts. 4. SPEED SWITCH ACTUATOR) OVERSPEED SWITCH FRAME MOUNTING HOLE • 7) Figure 8. After the tripping speed has been set by adjusting the length of the link.4.12) consists of two safety clamps (one per guide rail) bolted to the bottom member of the elevator carframe and connected by a system of rods and Iinkages to the governor rope.142 . the jaws remain in the "ready" position where they do not touch the rails. (See Figure 8.4. "Y" Tripper Adjustment Screw Under no circumstances should inexperienced personnel attempt to adjust any element of the elevator safety system.4-11. When the elevator car is traveling at normal speed. set the ropegripping mechanism for a higher' tripping speed by turning the adjusting screw on the tripper. If the elevator overspeeds in the down direction. the 8.11.• TRIPPER ARM (MOVABLE JAW ACTUATOR) ADJUSTING SCREW Governor & Safety LEVER (LINK MAY BE MOUNTED IN EITHER HOLE) CAM lOVER." • MM.) Flexible Guide Clamp Safety The car safety (Figure 8. Each safety clamp has two steel jaws to grip the guide rail and a heavy spring to regulate the pressure exerted by the jaws . PINCHING AND BRINGING GUIDE RAIL CAR TO A HALT SPRING. . . . . .4. LOADED WEDGES • Figure 8. .142 8. .12 .4.Governor & Safetv • SAFETY RODS SAFETY DRAG ON SAFETY CABLE (SHOWN ABOVE) PULLS UP RODS. "WHICH YANK UP BRAKE WEDGES. •. .12. . . . . . Flexible Guide Clamp Safety MM. . The lift rods in turn "set" both safety clamps on the 'elevator car and bring the wedgeshaped safety jaws in contact with the guide rails. Re-establish the normal shunt field circuits . • Safety Tests The top of each lift rod is connected to the lift arm by two polyurethane bumpers with cup washers at top and bottom and two nuts. lubricate all working parts releasing carrier. "Practice for the Inspection of Elevators.4-13 . Re-establish the action of the governor slowdown switch. clean." Releasing Safety Perform the following preliminary before raising the car: 1) 2) Open the main-line switch. Escalators and Moving Walks. and of both safety and rails must be clean lift rods and check freely and smoothly.Governor & Safety governor trips.2. Adjust the nuts so that the bottom of the safety jaw is slightly higher (by approximately 1/8 inch) than the cage portion of the clamp assembly. Further motion of the car causes these movable jaws to wedge themselves between the rail and the arms of the clamps until sufficient clamping force is exerted by the heavy safety springs to bring the car to a smooth stop. procedures Take neighboring cars out of service if ropes and cables from this elevator interfere with adjacent hoistways. exerting an upward pull on the lift rods. Safeties are tested at annual and five-year intervals per procedures given in American National Standards Institute (ANSI) specification A 17 . Adjust roller guides if necessary. Manually operate the that the safety clamps operate Running clearances between each safety jaw and the rail should be the same on both sides. • MM-142 3) 4) 8. Adjustments Inspect. The guide and dry. Governor & Safety 5) Examine drive. car and hoistway door interlocks Use auxiliary controller to move the safeties are clear and wedge are down in the normal running governor Make sure are closed. 10) Reset safety-operated mechanism back switch and remove jumper.' Elevonic elevator Raise the microprocessor-based off the safety as follows: 7) Jump out safety-operated switch. and deflector sheaves to ascertain that the hoist ropes are in their proper grooves. secondary. Reset the governor jaws and the governor switches. car up until mechanisms position. Inspect traveling cables. and sheaves for damage. it to service: Inspect car as follows before returning 11) If any hoist or compensating ropes jumped their grooves. Examine the governor rope where it was clamped by the governor and ascertain if the deformation is objectionable. governor 8) Reset the switches. ease the car upward until the safeties are clear and roller or wedge mechanisms are down in the normal running position. Make a round trip at slow speed and inspect to see that everything is intact . 12) 13) • MM-142 8.4-14 . Snap the releasing carrier mechanism into running position. compensating rope or chain. elevator off the safety as follows: • 6) Raise a relav-controlled 7) Put in the main-line switch and by manual operation of the controller switches. hoist ropes.. jaws and the 9) Snap the releasing carrier into running position. back 8) 9) 10) Check the safety-operated switches to see that they functioned and reset them. they must be replaced before moving the car any further than absolutely necessary. • • . • . The buffer is not designed to stop a freely falling car. oil buffers are required. Note that the function of the buffer is to protect the passengeragainst some malfunction of the control mechanism which allows the car to descend beyond its normal limit of travel.5-1 o . With large cars or heavy loads. each rated to carry an equal portion of the total load. a heavy steel plate under the car frame strikes the rubber contact block on the top of a steel plunger.5-1) consists basically of a spring-loaded plunger and an oil-filled cylinder.• OTIS 8. heavy-duty coil spring. except for normal cleaning and inspection. this function is performed by the elevator safety mechanism.5 Buffer The pit-mounted buffer is designed to bring an elevator car or counterweight to a cushioned stop if it overtravels the landing at the lower terminal. Type 6136R Oil Buffers An oil buffer (Figure 8. Buffers are installed on all power elevators. electric or hydraulic. The buffer is built to absorb the impact of a fully loaded car descending at full rated speed. • o • MM-143 If the descending elevator car overtravels the lower landing. several spring buffers may be used. If rated speed is 200 fpm or less. For higher speeds. Spring buffers are rated according to the load to be stopped. Further descent of the car drives the steel plunger into the oil-filled inner cylinder of the 8. Operation of an oil buffer is described below. a simple spring buffer may be used. which in turn is used for mounting the buffer in the pit. Spring Buffers The spring buffer is basically just a large. welded to a base plate. No maintenance is required. This rubber block absorbs the first shock of contact . a compression spring returns the plunger to its normal position at the top of the cylinder. This forces the oil through the escape holes in the side of the cylinder. RUBBER CONTACT BLOCK • SPRING STEEL PLUNGER OIL LEVEL INDICATOR SPRING OIL RESERVOIR OIL DRAIN PLUG • Figure 8.5-2 MM-143 • . but the speed at which the car or counterweight strikes the buffer is limited to the value for which the reduced-stroke buffer is rated. Where a full-stroke car or counterweight buffer cannot be provided because of space and speed conditions. a shorter stroke buffer can be used. 8.Buffer buffer.5-1. The buffer stroke (distance plunger can be depressed) depends upon the load and speed. This permits the oil to flow from the reservoir back through the escape holes into the inner cylinder and the buffer is again ready to function. and produces sufficient oil pressure to retard the descent of the car and bring it to a smooth stop. It is figured to stop the car or counterweight from governor tripping speed at any retardation of gravity. o When the car is lifted from the buffer. a switch operated by the depressed plunger either prevents further motion or allows motion but at low speed only. Type 6136R Oil Buffer If the buffer in a traction elevator should fail to spring-return. buffer must be disassembledand cleaned before being refilled. Examine fluid that leaves reservoir. In this circuit.the car passesthe switch. This usually requires disassembly of the buffer. it must have gone beyond the final limit of travel. This limit switch must be jumped out in the machine room in order to move the car off the buffer. where a buffer switch (BFS) is provided. If unfamiliar with buffer disassembly. PSS is furnished at the lower terminal. this switch must also be jumped to move the car. For a reducedstroke car buffer. If It contains . a limit switch is installed in the hoistway at a position above the buffer. In Elevonic installations.sediment or mud. and have opened the final limit switch in so doing. The buffer contains heavy-duty springs under compression. If the plunger fails to spring return after the car or counterweight is lifted from the buffer. When a reduced-stroke counterweight buffer is used. When .• Buffer Car or counterweight speed is reduced by the potential switch slowdown (PSS) circuit. Refill to required level with Otis approved buffer oil. Check the oil level every three months through either the sight gage or the dip stick. the switch contacts are opened. Maintenance' • There are no adjustments to be made on the buffer. empty reservoir by opening drain plug at bottom. slowing down the elevator to a speed safe for the buffer stroke. • MM-143 After buffer has been drained. Restoring Service after Buffer Compression For the car to have contacted the buffer. please have this procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company. If unfamiliar with buffer disassembly. If pit has been flooded. and if necessary cleaned internally.5-3 . please have this procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company. Be sure all external parts of buffer are dried to retard rusting after the flood. 8. service cannot be restored until the buffer is thoroughly examined to determine the cause. refill reservoir to required level with Otis approved buffer oil. PSS is arranged at the upper terminal. Buffer contains heavy-duty springs under compression. Pump out buffer oil through oil port.5.Type R06136 "HP" Oil Buffer The "HP" oil buffer (Figure 8. Check the fluid level every three months through the oil port.2. Th is buffer is of sealed construction so that flooding of the pit should not present any problems unless the water reaches the level where the plunger enters the reservoir. If it contains sediment.5. " 3) • 4) PLUNGER __ SPRING RESERVOIR • OIL PORT Figure 8. "HP" Oil Buffer • MM. Refill reservoir to required level with Otis approved buffer oil. raise elevator.143 8.5-2) performs the same functions as the Type 6136. try flushing out reservoir with water until sediment is washedout. Examine oil. Hose down and dry off exterior. Maintenance • There are no adjustments and no replaceable parts on this buffer. and unless the buffer has been compressed at the time.4 . If this combination of circumstances occurs: 1) 2). Refill to required level with Otis approved buffer oil. but is of simpler construction and designed for lighter-duty applications. Drain pit. minimizes friction between wires and strands during normal operation. Careful examination should disclose whether this is\ contributing to the wear of the sheaves or the ropes. If this condition exists the sheave should be regrooved or replaced. Differences in the relative depth of grooves will result in unequal rope travel and unbalanced rope tension.6-' . A new rope operating in a worn sheave groove is subjected to considerable abuse and needless wear. It is possible that the hitch on the top of the car may have shifted. It is important that ropes have proper and equal bearing in the grooves of the sheaves over which they pass.6 Ropes i Maintenance The following fundamental safeguards should materially aid in prolonging the useful life of wire ropes. causing a side pull on the ropes in their relation to the alignment of the sheaves. the grooves may be worn or corrugated and the sheave may be out-of-round. Lubrication: Sheave Grooves: • • MM-'44 8. A corrugated sheave should also be regrooved or replaced. I 8.OTIS I. check groove sizes and depths. and retards corrosion. Lubrication of ropes (see lubrication section) effectively preserves the pliability of the rope. A sheave out-of-round throws a "whip" into the rope and causes wire fatigue at the point of hitch. Examine sheave grooves periodically for unusual wear and. Check also the alignment of the counterweight ropes. When wire ropes have been in use for a long while. if necessary. Misalignment of the sheaves and hitches may cause wear on one side of the sheave grooves. please have this procedure performed by Otis Elevator Company. even if only one shows excessive wear. Rope Replacement • Ropes require replacement when rusted and broken strands can be seen on the exterior. All ropes on a particular car should be replaced at the same time. to equalize the set.Ropes Tension (Equalization): Wire rope tension should be checked at frequent intervals during the life of the ropes. and adjustments made. If unfamiliar with the procedure for replacing ropes.6-2 MM-144 . • • 8. Unbalanced tension will result in unequal rope and sheave wear. Ropes should never be twisted when making adjustments as this disturbs the natural lay of the ropes. as necessary. • • • . • C-609L RESISTANCE TUBES AND GRIDS. RHEOSTATS AND POTENTIOMETERS • PARTS LEAFLET C-609L JULY I. RESISTORS. 1967 OTIS ELEVATOR IN ALL OF THE COMPANY PRINCIPAL WORLD CITIES • OFFICES THIS LEAFLET CONTAINS THE DATA FORMERLY • IN LEAFLET C-GOSAND SUPERSEDES THE LATTER . 2 .-. FIG. 2 FIG. 5 Lava Fig. • RESISTANCE J -Number Glozed TUBES Glazed Fig. 2 232AA RESISTUR - FIG. 3 700 WATTS. CONTINUUUS Port With No. One Resistance Wi th Two Part LAvA Rrm~e. In 0 ms Without 128559 126544 127 402 127403 127404 127 405 127406 127784 127718 127 7 36 1277 45 127 407 126547 .232E124 232E125 127030 232EI26 126549 232EI27 127 408 232EI28 127746 232EI29 232EI30 232EI31 232EI32 232EI33 232EI34 232EI35 232EI36 232EI37 232EI38 232t: 139 232Et 40 232E141 232E142 232E143 232EI44 128515 . 15 .3 .4 .6 .9 1.2 J .7 3.5 5 7 10 15 20 22 25 30 31 40 45 50 62 75 90 100 125 150 1'j 5 2G0 250 300 350 400 500 600 750 1,000 I, 500 2.000 2,500 Adjustoble CI amp 232MI 232M2 232M3 232M4 232M5 232AA6 232M7 232AA8 232M9 AdjulltobJe Adjustable Clamps In Ohms I. 32 I. 65 2.08 2.61 3.82 4.93 6. 12 9.28 14.1 CI nmp 232M30 232M31 232AA32 232AA33 232M34 232AA35 232AA36 232M 37 232M38 232EI21 232E122 232 EI23 232M40 232M41 232M42 232M43 232M44 232M45 232M46 232AA47 232M48 • GRIDS 5 Pattern 30 Po rt Number R£SISTOR • FIG. 4 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY NON. ADJUSTABL E RESISTANCE fi9. Ra ngc. PaT t ~r ADJUSTABl E Range, In Ohms 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 750 800 1,000 1,250 1,500 2,000 Part Number 232BA22 232BA23 232BA24 232IJA25 232BA26 232BA27 232BA28 232BA29 232BA30 232BA31 232IJA32 232BA33 232BA34 23211.A35 232BA36 232BA37 232B,\38 232B,\39 NumP..u.. A1600 Al 614 AI662 A19 23 A3285 A3286 A3287 A3288 A3289 A3290 A3291 A329 2 A329 3 A3294 A3295 A3296 A3297 A3298 A3299 A3300 A3301 A3302 A3371 A3372 A3384 6. CR- 1 6 -CII- 2 27-CR- I In Ohms 2.250 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500 5,000 6,000 7,000 7,500 8,000 9,000 10,000 12,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 129722 The ohmic resistance of each stamped on the end, on one of the bcmds or on the side. in the case of the resistor. Lava tubes are oh'oys furnished witli three terminal bands. as illustrated. Pot tern Numbers are cast on all cast iron grids, so that from the pattern numbers, corresponding part numbers can be obtained. 232BI 232B2 232B3 232B4 232B5 232B6 2321J7 232B8 232B9 232BI0 2321JII 2321J12 232BI3 232B!4 232BI5 232BI6 232BI7 232BJ8 232BI9 2321J20 232B21 t 2526 12519 12506 12507 12527 12528 12523 12522 12521 12524 12525 12518 12517 12516 12512 125 II 12510 125 13 12514 12509 12508 12505 12515 12504 12529 12091 12092 1250 I • " ..'.' ... 3 • Part ------':lIIl!I.-- _ ~~.~ MAX. ===~==ellD:Iii'i,-----112:' MAXI----'3Z . FIG. 7 FIG.6 232f . RESISTOR - fIG 6 1/2 WATT MAXIMUM CAPACITY No. Hesistance In Ohms Color 232G Part No. Resistance In Ohms RESISTOR - fIG. 7 1 WAIT MAXIMUM CAPACITY Color 0 Si her 5i lver Si lver Silver Si lver Silver A Brown Orange Brown B Gray White Black Code C A Red Orange Blue Green Brown Brown B Violet White Gray 131 ue Code C 0 Silver Silver Silver Si Ivcr Si he r Sil vc r • • 18 232f44 232f20 39 232f45 100 232f6 220 232f46 270 232F7 330 232F49 330 232fl8 470 232f38 510 232F27 1,000 232F5 2,200 232f29 2,200 232f4 3,900 232f39 4,700 232f11 5,600 232F40 10,000 232fl5 12,000 232fl6 15,000 232f41 15,000 232f42 20,000 232f47 22,000 232f48 27,000 232f3 47,000 232f28 51,000 232f43 56,000 232F32. 68,000 232f22 100,000 232F8 120,000 232f30 150,000 232fl0 220,000 232f33 390,000 232f9 470,000 232f23 510,000 232~-34 680,000 232f35 750,000 232f36 820,000 232f24 1,000,000 232fl2 1,500,000 232f37 1,500,000 232fl7 1,800,000 232f21 2,400,000 232f25 2,700,000 232fl9 3,600,000 232f26 3,900,000 232f31 4,700,000 232f2 6,800,000 232fl4 8,200,000 232fl 10,000,000 232fl3 22,000,000 Black Black Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Red Rcd Orange Orange Yellow Green Brown Red Violet Orange Ora nge Violet Brown Black Gold Si lve r Rcd ncd Orange Yell ow Green Black Brown Brown Brown Rcd Rcd Wh i te Violet Blue Brown Red ncd Rcd Rcd Rcd Rcd Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Ye llow Yellow Yellollo' Yellow Yellow Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Blue Blue Gold Gold Si lver Gold Si lver Gold Si I ve r Gold Si lver Si lve r Rcd Green Green Black 232GI2 232Gl3 232GI4 232G5 232G8 232G4 232Gll 232G3 232G6 232G2 232GI8 232G9 232G7 232GIO 232GI 232GI5 232GI6 232GI7 2.7 3.9 6.8 560 1.000 1,500 2,700 3,300 8,200 10,000 15,000 18,000 22,000 33,000 39,000 47,000 62,000 68,000 Gold Gold Gold Brown Black Green Violet Orange Rcd Orange Gray Brown Brown Brown ncd Black Grecn Gray Rcd ncd ncd Rcd ncd Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange Gold Si Iver Silver Si lve r Silver Si Iv er Silver Si he r Si he r Silver ncd Orange Orange Yel.low BI ue Blue ned Orange Wh i te Violet ncd Gray Gold Silver Rcd Rcd ncd Yellow Green Green Blue Brown Brown Brown Gold Gold Silver Silver Silver ncd Violet Violet Brown Blue Gray Black Gold Si her Silver Silver Silver Si lver Silver Red Green ncd Ora'nge Yellow Green Blue Violet Gray Brown Brown Brown Brown Rcd Wh i te Violet Brown Gray Green Gold Gold Gold Si he r Gold Silver 232AW RESISTOR - fIG •. 6A" 1/4 WATT MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part Rcd Bla ck Green Green Gray Yellow Violet Blue Wh i te Vi a let Gray Gold Si he r No. 232AWI 232AW2 232AW3 232AW4 232AW5 232AW6 232AW7 232AW8 II; Resistance In Ohms Color A Orange B W h i le Black Whi te HI ack Block Wh i te Green Code C Brown 0 Gold Si he r Rcd Rcd Orange Orange Yellow Blue Gray Brown Gold Si lve r Gold Si !ver Silver Rcd ncd Black Rcd Gold Gold Gold Silver 390 2,000 3,900 10,000 30,000 39,000 75,000 100,000 to above Rcd Orange Brown Orange Orange Violet Brown illustration Rcd Bcd Gold Gold Si he r Illock Orange Orange Orange Orange Yellow Gold Gold Gold Gold Si Ivcr Similar except 1/4" long. 4 .... ---- -~~~F====j FIG. 8 ~ '.---~-1 FIG. 9 ..• J -I ~-_.--ollll1E3~-===1 ---11~;rllAXfj • D RESISTOR. Part 1. R. C. FIXED. FIG. Color 8 Code C D 232T RESIS10R - FIG. 9 2 WATTS MAXIMUM CAP ACI TY Pa rt No. No. 186002 186003 186004 186005 IR6006 186007 Hesistance In Megohms .I TYI~ B Hesistance In Ohms Color Code A Red Blue Violet Brown Yellow Ye 11 ow Brown B Yellow Gray Green C I 2 3 3.9 5. I IlT.I Brown IlT.A Brown IlT.A Red BT-A Ornnge BT-l Orange Ye,1 low Black HI ack Green Si J vc r Block Block White Brown BT-A Green Green Green Green Green Silver Silver Gold Silver 5i I ve r 2321'13 232T7 232T8 232TJ8 232T6 232TJ 9 232T2 232T20 2321'1I 232T5 232T3 232T21 2 32TJ 4 2321'10 2321'12 232T9 232TJ5 232TJ 232T4 2 32TI 6 2 32T17 24 68 75 120 470 470 1,000 2,700 3,300 3,600 3,900 4,700 5,100 6,800 10,000 15,000 20,000 22,000 47,000 51,000 75,000 Block Blnck Black Brown Brown Gold Si lvcr Gold 5i 1 vcr 5i her Red Violet Violet Black Violet Orange Brown Gold Silver Silver Silver Hed Orange Orange Orange Ye 1101'0' Blue White Violet Green Blue Brown Brown Brown Grn)' Hed Hed Hed Red Hed Hed Red Red Orange Orange Orange Orange Orongc Orange Orange Gold Silver Si her Gold 5i lver Silver Silver Black Green Red Red Yellow Green Black Gold 5i he r Si he [' Red Violet Bro\/"n Green Violet Gold Gold • 232AT RESISTOR - fIG.~A' 5 WATTS. MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part No. Resistance In Ohms 10 232BB Part RESISTOR - FIG •. BA •• 2 WATT CAPflCITY No. ncsistancc In Ohms A Red Brown Brown Brown Color II B.lack Code C D 2321lBI 232BB2 2321J1B 232BB4 .•. Similar 2 10 15 180 to above Blo ck Green Gold llI~ck ilIa ck Brown Gray Gold Gold Gold Gold 232AT! 232AT2 232AT3 232AT5 232AT4 232AT8 232ATi 232AT9 232AT6 '* Similar ilJus. 15 50 120 250 500 2,000 2,500 4,000 in appearance to above except 15/16" long. illustration except 9/16" long. • l • aJn ~~,,~ FIG. 10 -- ----- ._- -- ---~ -- --_. -- _. __ .- . - ._-- - .. _._, I 5 y ~J:M~ 132 FIG. II ~ I FIG. 12 IL _ . ---- --~---- ------_. __ ._---_._~---~ 232H RESISTOR - FIG. 11 5 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part No. Aes is lance In Ohms FIG. 14 _J in Ohms Without Center Tap I • 232AE RESISTOR - FIG. 10 5 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part Ho. Resistance In Ohms 232Y RESISTOR - FIG,. 14 20 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Bcsislnnce Part 232AEI 250 232H3 232Hl 232H2 232H5 232H4 500 1,500 2,000 2,500 10,000 No. 232Y2 Wi th Cent.er Tap 232AF RESISlVR - FIG, 12 10 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part Hesislance In Ohms 232AN RESISlVR - FIG.12 10 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part RC!'listancc No. 232Af3 232AF2 232An No. In Ohms 3,000 15,000 25,000 232ANI 232AN2 232AN5 232AN4 232AN3 10 1,000 6,800 10,000 25,000 232AM RESI STOR - FIG, 14 25 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY • L 232] RESISTOR. FIG, 13 7 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part Resistance ] II Po rt. No. No. 232JJ Ohms Bes is lance In Ohms 3, 150 232MB 232AM3 232AM2 500 1,000 20,000 232Yi 0 232Yl4 232Y18 232Y20 232Y22 232Y24 232Y25 232Y26 232Y28 232Y31 232Y32 232Y35 232\'36 232Y37 232\'38 232HI 232Y42 232Y43 232Y45 232Y63 232Y47 232Y46 232\'49 232Y64 232Y51 232Y53 232Y52 232Y56 232Y57 232Y58 232Y60 232Y62 232Y44 5 50 100 200 250 300 400 400 500 750 800 1,000 1,200 1,500 1,600 2,000 2,400 3,000 3,200 4,000 4,000 4,800 5,000 6,000 7,500 8,000 9,000 10',000 15.000 20,000 25,000 35,000 40,000 40,000 6 • FIG. 15 FIG. 16 FIG. 17 FIG. 18 VARIABLE PArt RESISTOR - FIG. 15 Type <Jd POTENTIOMETER. 2 WATTS MAXIMUM Part No. flG •. 17 CAPACITY No. 186008 186009 Resistance ] n Ohms Resistance 0 to .5 0 to I Megohms Megohms CSM CSM or 011.137 232BC POTENTIOMETER. 3 WATTS MAXIMUM Part No. FIG. )SA' CAPACITY In Ohms 232W5 232W8 232W6 232W7 232W3 232WI 232W9 232W4 250 10.000 25.000 50.000 100.000 250.000 1,500.000 5.000.000 Resistance 232BCI .•Similar in appearance 15.000 to fig. IS except {or 3/4" dia. 232R POTENTIOMETEB • FIG. 3 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Par t • 18 232AD Pnrt No. DUAL POTENTIOMETER • fIG. 2 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY 16 No. 232Rl 232R2 232R 3 232R4 232R5 Resistance In Ohms Resi stance In Ohms 232AIlI 500,000 1,000 15,000 40.000 75,000 100,000 232AV POTENTIOMfTEB 112 WATT MAXIMUM Part • flG.23 CAPACITY Resistance No. 232AVI In Ohms 50.000 232AX POTENTIOMETER. FIG. 112 WATT MAXIMUM CAPACITY 23 FIG. 23 Pa.rt No. Resistance In Ohms • 232AXI 232AX2 J 00. 000 250,000 7 • ~~ r2~ ~Il FIG. 19 20 4" FIG. 21 232P RHEOSTAT - FIG. 19 50 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY FIG. 22 232C RHEOSTAT - FIG. 20 100 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Par t Diltl Wi thou t Resistance Shaft. • Port Np Hesistll.ncc In Ohms Shaft Locking Deyice No. In Ohms Locking ncv i ce f) i A J 2321'16 2321'17 2321'9 2321'10 2321'7 2321'3 2321'5 2321'4 2321'6 2321'8 2321'11 2321'2 2321'12 2321'20 2321'13 2321'21 2321'14 2321'22 2321'15 2321'18 2321'19 2321'1 .5 I 12 16 22 35 50 80 125 150 225 300 500 500 800 800 1.000 1,000 1,600 2,500 3,500 10,000 With With With Wi tit With Wi th Wi th Without. With With WiLh Wi th Wi th Wi th With With With With With With Wi til With With Wilh Wit.h 232C9 232C6 232C7 232C5 232C3 232Cll 232CI0 232C2 232CII 232CI 7.5 10 16 25 50 100 200 200 2.500 10,000 Wi til Wi lh Wi til With Wi th Wi til Wi til Without Wi lh Wllh With Wi. th Willi Wi th Wi th Without Wi th Without With Wi thout. 2322 RHEOSTAT - fIC. 21 150 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Part No, Resistance try Ohms Wi thou t With With Wi th With Wi th Shaft Locking Device With Wi th Wi th Wi th Wi th Wi th Wi th With With With Without With Without With Without. Without n i oj Wi ttl Wi th Wi th Wi th With Wi th Wi th With Wi th With Wi th Wi th Without Without , Part 232Z1 232Z3 232Z2 2 32Z 4 2327.5 232Z6 232Z7 232Z8 232Z9 5 7.5 10 15 25 35 50 75 100 232AH RHEOSTAT. 25 WATTS MAXIMUM No. Resistance In Ohms FIG •.I9A' CAPACITY Locking Device "'j th 232AB RHEOSTAT - fIG. 22 225 WATTS MAXIMUM CAPACITY Dinl Without Wi thout Wi thout Wi thout Pnr t Sh.ft No . net; istllnce In Ohms 4 • '32.1114 232A11l 232.1112 232A113 "Similar excep t 35 2,500 3,500 5,000 Wi th Wi th Wi th in appearance to above for 1.5/8" diameter. illustrated Rheostats 232ABI 232A1l2 232A113 232Nl4 232,~15 232AB6 232AIl7 15 25 50 75 100 200 -----TYPE 6098 MECHANICAL SWITCHES Parts Leaflet 05.6098 (Revision H) MAY 1982 • • File No.. C919G _UNITED I:iiI ~~fSHNOLOGIES . in turn. which holds the arm in place. Regular switch arms Ref. The switches with regular covers and those with oil pots can readily be identiHed from the material list number stamped on the front. in other respects. This is done to avoid any possible confusion which might result from the same number representing both a figure and a part . 50 to 73 are used. all use one or another of what is known as the 6151 contact box and contacts. 33 to 44 inclusive. 33 and 44.28 and 29. depending on which contact box. is used. instead of the plain ones. Fig. The switches shown in Figs. These contact boxes. 7 and B. • • . 45 inclusive. which on its inner end. however. construction of the latter is identical with that of the explosion proof switches. the two small rectangular perforations fitting over corresponding lugs on the outer face of the large pin. can be furnished with oil pots by the use of suitable oil tight covers. Figs. as shown in Figs. 30. The gasket Ref. The material list numbers have been purposely omitted from the other illustrations. The illustrations in this leaflet are numbered from Fig. shown in Figs. 119. The moisture proof and explosion proof switches consist of the 6151 contact boxes enclosed in heavy cast iron housings and housing covers. and 32. 1 to Fig. the reference numbers commence at 50 and end with 133. connects to the switch arm hub Ref.31. are composed of different arrangements of a few simple parts which aresmall and easily adjusted. since there can be several variationsof each switch. These same switches.General Information • The 6098 mechanical switches although made in several types. Figs. BB is used in moisture proof switches only. A more complete description of switches with oil pots will be found on page 2A. 27. 1 to 26 inclusive are shown with the covers most commonly used. The small hole in the center of the pin is tapped for a machine screw. the moisture and explosion proof types have the number stamped on one of the round bosses on the lower part of the cover. The following complete switches are no longer availabe. the top knockouts should be used for wiring. 18. use Otis Brake-Magnet any Otis office. for replacement see table below. replace cover slowly to prevent gushing of oil. For arms and adapters. When the oil needs replenishment. Replaced Switch 6098AYI 6098AY2 6098AY3 6098AY4 6098AY5 6098AY6 6098AY7 6098AY8 6098CC1 6098CC2 6098FCI 6098FC2 By . the switch case must not be secured to rigid conduit.isolating fastening which is furnished with the mounting parts. Standard stranded wire must not be used. pint can of oil. see pages 3. 4. oil causes the rubber to deteriorate and the space between the strands causes the oil to be siphoned from the pot. see page. Material List 6098CI 6098C2 6098C3 6098C4 6098C5 6098C6 6098C7 6098C8 6098Dl 6098D2 6098D3 609804 6098D5 6098D6 6098EI 6098E2 6098E3 6098E4 1iQ9SE5 6098E6 6098E7 6098E8 6098E9 6098ElO 6098ElI 6098EI2 6098E13 6098EI4 6098EI5 6098E16 See Material List 6098ALl 6098AL2 6098AL3 6098ASI 6098AYl 6098AY2 6098AY3 6098AY4 6098AY5 6098AY6 6098AY7 6098AY8 6098BCI 6098BC2 6098BC3 6098BC4 6098BC5 6098BC6 6098B) I 6098B)2 6098B)3 6098B)4 6098B)5 6098B)6 6098B)7 6098B)8 6098B)9 6(98)BlO 6098B)1I 6098B)12 See Page 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Page 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Material List 6098BZI 6098BZ2 6098CCI 6098CC2 6098CEI 6098CE2 6098CE3 6098CE4 6098CMI 6098CM2 6098FCI 6098FC2 6098FC3 6098FC4 6098FC5 6098FC6 6098FC7 6098FC8 6098FC9 6098FC10 6098FCll 6098FC12 6098FCI3 6098FC14 6098FCI5 6098FCI6 6098GCI 6098GC2 6098GC3 6098GC4 See Page 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Material List 6098HCI 6098HC2 6098HC3 6098HC4 6098HC5 6098HC6 6098HC7 6098HC8 6098HC9 6098HCIO 6098HCll 6098HCI2 6098HCI3 6098HCl4 6098HCI5 6098HCI6 6098ZAI 6098ZA2 6098ZA3 6098ZA4 A6098Al A6098A2 A6098A3 A6098A4 A6098Bl A6098B2 A6098B3 A6098B4 A6098B5 A6098B6 See Material List A6098B7 A6098B8 A6098B9 A6098BIO A6098Bll A6098Bl2 A6098BI3 A6098B14 A6098Bl5 A6098Bl6 A6098BI7 A6098Bl8 A6098Bl9 A6098B20 A6098B21 A6098B22 A6098B23 A6098B24 A6098B25 A6098B26 A6098B27 A6098B28 A6098B29 A6098B30 A6098B31 A6098B32 A6098B33 A6098B34 A6098B35 A6098B36 Sec Material List A6098B37 A6098B38 A6098AYl A6098AY2 A6098AY3 A6098AY4 A6098AY5 A6098AY6 A6098AY7 A6098AY8 A6098CCI A6098CC2 A6098FCI A6098FC2 A6098FC3 A6098FC4 A6098FC5 A6098FC6 A6098FC7 A6098FC8 A6098FC9 A6098FCIO A6098FCll A6098FC12 A6098FCl3 A6098FCl4 A6098FCl5 A6098FCI6 A6098GCI A6098GC2 See Page 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA Page lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA lOA Page lOA lOA II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II 11 II 11 II 11 11 11 11 11 Material List A6098BC3 A6098GC4 A6098GC5 A6098GC6 A6098GC7 A6098GC8 A6098HCI A6098HC2 A6098HC3 A6098HC4 A6098HC5 A6098HC6 A6098HC7 A6098HC8 A6098HC9 A6098HClO A6098HCll A6098HCI2 A6098HCI3 A6098HCI4 A6098HCI5 A6098HCI6 SF6012FI See Page II II II II II II 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 • For description of switches. the switch is secured to the mounting bracket with rubber sound . either kind can be secured from When used on the car as a Door-Zone Limit. After filling the cover with the correct oil to about 1" • from the top of oil pot. If the switch is to be mounted in the hoistway. Each is provided with sufficient H 16 solid copper "F1emenol" wire to run to the nearest pull box. A6098AYl A6098AY2 A6098AY3 A6098AY4 A6098AY5 A6098AY6 A6098AY7 A6098AY8 A6098CCI A6098CC2 A6098FC1 A6098FC2 Replaced Switch 6098FC3 6098FC4 6098FC5 6098FC6 6098FC7 6098FC8 6098FC9 6098FCIO 6098FCll 6098FCI2 6098FCI3 6098FCI4 By A6098FC3 A6098FC4 A6098FC5 A6098FC6 A6098FC7 A6098FC8 A6098FC9 A6098FClO A6098FCll A6098FCI2 A6098FC13 A6098FC14 Replaced Switch 6098FCI5 6098FCI6 6098CCI 6098GC2 6098CC3 6098GC4 6098HCI 6098HC2 6098HC3 6098HC4 6098HC5 6098HC6 By A6098FCI5 A6098FCI6 A6098CCI. • . With each switch there is furnished a v.2 6098 Mechanical Switches. 19. Otis specification #24 which is to be used if the switch is to be mounted on the car. or to eliminate the noise of striking contacts. A6098GC2 A6098GC3 A6098GC4 A6098HCI A6098HC2 A6098HC3 A6098HC4 A6098HC5 A6098HC6 Replaced Switch 6098HC7 6098HC8 6098HC9 6098HCIO 6098HCll 6098HCI2 6098HCI3 6098HCI4 6098HC15 6098HCI6 By A6098HC7 A6098HC8 A6098HC9 A6098HCIO A6098HCll A6098HCI2 A6098HC13 A6098HC14 A6098HC15 A6098HC16 Index to parts for switches shown in this leaflet. 5. With Oil Pot These switches are provided with covers having a receptacle in which the contacts are immersed in oil to protect them against noninflammable corrosive vapors.. These switches are neither moisture proof nor explosion proof and must be mounted vertically. Oil only. With this fastening. 267P3. SINGLE With With With With POLE Arm Arm Arm Arm A287E2.Moisture Proof Without Oil pot With Oil pot Explosion Proof Moisture Proof SIDE- With With With With SINGLE Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm 267J3 267J3 267J3 287J3 287J4 267J4 267J4 267 J 4 and and and and and and and and 327JA3 327JA3 327JA3 327JA3 327JA4 327JA4 C8"m 327JA4 Cam 327. • 17 17 & 26 17 & 31 17 & 31 16 16 & 29 18 & 32 16 & 32 EXIT PANEL 6096C5 6096C6 A6096AY3 A6096AY4 6096C7 6096C6 A6096AY7 A6096AY6 SWITCH.With Arm 267ARI 6098CM2 Without Oil pot. CONTACT with with 41 42 II II & 27 II & 30 II & 30 A6096Al A6096A2 A6096CCI A6096CC2 GATE TYPE Without Oil Pot Wi th Oil Pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof SWITCH.With Arm 287BA5 Explosion Proof Moisture Proof . 267P4.With Arm 287BA5 Without Oil) Pot .With Arm 287BA5 BRAKE TYPE SWITCH . 287P4.SINGLE POLE MAKING Uses Contact Box page 17 See Fig. No.With Arm . A267E2. _' 90YA18 25 6098AL2 Without Oil pot .JA4 Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam 39 39 39 39 36 36 36 36 CAR SWINGING POLE MAKING 90YA16 90YAI6 FLOOR 23 24 STOP TYPE 6096CMI Without Oil Pot .3 DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHES Returning Spring R at Location L • Part No. with with with with with wi th Weight Weight Weight Weight Weight We ight . With Arm 267AR2 SWITCH. 287P3.With Arm 287BA5 . with Weight 287P4.With Arm 287P3.With Arm Moisture Proof With Arm Without Oil Pot With Oil Pot roUBLE POLE BREAKING With With With With SWITCH.With Arm With Arm Without Oil Pot With Oil pot With Arm Explosion Proof . and Name of Switch BRAKE TYPE SWITCH .SINGLE POLE BREAKING 36 90YA18 90YA18 90YA18 9OHB8 99HB8 25 25 26 8& 30 8& 30 17 17 & 28 17 & 31 17 & 31 18 16 & 29 16 & 32 16 & 32 6098ALl 6098AL3 6098ASI 6098BZI 6098BZ2 Without Oil pot .With Arm 287BA5 287J3 287J3 287J3 287J3 267J4 267J4 267J4 267J4 and and and and and and and and Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam Cam 327JA3 327JA3 327JA3 327JA3 327JA4 327JA4 327JA4 327JA4 37 37 37 37 37 35 35 35 35 34 34 34 34 CAM TYPE SWITCH. of Spring M. 287P4. See Fig. A287E2. SINGLE POLE BREAKING 6098CI 6098C2 A6098AYI A6098AY2 6098C3 6096C4 A6096AY5 A6096AY6 CAM TYPE With Arm With Arm With Arm Explosion Proof Moisture Proof -. with Weight 35 35 35 35 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 34 34 34 35 34 . Raj ler Roller wi th Roll er with Roller 33 33 33 33 MAKING 90YA16 90YA16 90YAI6 90YA16 90YAI6 90YAI6 90YAI8 90YA16 • 10 10 & 27 10 & 30 10 & 30 9 9 & 27 9 & 30 9 & 30 13 13 & 30 13 & 30 14 14 & 30 14 & 30 10& 27 9& 27 6096El. A267E2. SINGLE POLE roUBLE THROW WITH AUX.With Arm 287BA5 Withou't Oil pot . 6096E3 A6096HCI A6098HC5 6096E2 6096E4 A6096HC2 A6096HC6 6096E9 A6096HC9 A6096HCI3 6098EI0 A6096HCI0 A6096HCI4 6098E13 6098£14 Without Oil pot With Oil pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof Wi thou t Oil pot With Oil Pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof Without Oil pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof Without Oil Pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof With Oil Pot With Oil Pot - - With With With With With With With With With With With With With Wi th Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm 267PI 267PI 267PI 267Pl 267P2 267P2 267P2 267P2 287P3. Wi thou t Oil pot Wi th Oil pot Explosion Proof . L. J . with Roller With Arm 287CH4. POLE 90YAI8 90YAI8 15 16 6098ZAI Wi thout 609BZA2 Without Wi th Arm 287Wl With Arm 287W2 35 34 . A287E2. of Spring M. with Roller 2 I A6098FC14 Explosion Proof 60988Cl Without Oil Pot 60988C2 Wi thout Oil Pot A6098B23 Without Oil Pot A6098B24 Without Oil Pot A6098B31 Without Oil Pot A6098B32 Without Oil Pot SWITCH SINGLE POLE Without Without Without Without SWITCH MAKING Oil Oil Oil Oil With Arm 287F6. 287CH3. with with with .SINGLE Pot POLE Atm • 90YAI8 90YA18 90YAI8 90YAI8 90YA18 90YAI8 16 16 4 3 3 3 SAfETY .S[NGLE Pot Pot.With Arm 287F20. MAKING DISPLACEMENT . 90YAI8 4 A6098A3 A6098A4 DIRECT SF6012Fl SAfETY SHOE 6098ZA3 With . Pot Pot Pot Pot With With With With POLE Arm Arm Arm Arm A6098B17 A6098B18 A6098B21 A6098B22 LIMIT TYPE 287CH3. I 27 I & 30 I & 30 7 8 2 I TYPE 2 & & & I & A6098B3 A6098B4 A6098FC2 A6098FC6 A6098Bll A6098B12 Without Oil Pot With Oil Pot Moisture Proof Explosion Proof Without Oil Pot With Oil Pot With With With With With With 34 34 34 A6098FCIO Moisture Proof With Arm 287F6. With 287W2 6098ZA4 Without A6098B25 Without A6098B26 Without A6098B27 Without A6098B28 Without SHOE TYPE Arm 287W3 Arm 287F2. with Pin Wi th Arm 6098FHl Wi th Atm 6098FH2 . with Rollcr With Arm 287BA3. 287CH3.SINGLE POLE (SAN.With Arm 287CH3.ith Roller Arm 287F4. Page 17 See Fig. A287E2. with Roller With Arm 287F6.DOUBLE BREAKING • 90YAI8 90YA18 90llB8 90llB8 90YAI8 90YAI8 90llB8 90HB8 90YAI8 90YA18 90YAI8 90YAI8 90YAI8 90YAI8 9OYAI8 90YAI8 2 2 & 27 2 & 30 2 & 30 I I & 27 I & I & 5 6 7 8 2 & I & 2 I 30 30 46 47 A6098B7 Without Oil Pot A6098B8 With Oil Pot A6098FC4 Moisture Proof A6098FC8 Explosion Proo f A6098B15 Without Oil Pot A6098BI6 With Oil Pot A6098FC12 Moisture Proof A6098FC16 Explosion Proof 60988C3 Wi thou t Oi 1. with with with with .ith Pin Wi th Arm 28781\3. with Roller With Arm 287BA4.With Arm 287F19. wi th Pin . with Roller Arm 287F6.5 DESCRIPTION OF SWITCHES Uses Conta«::t Box • Returning Spring at Location II L Part No. 287F6. with Pin With Arm 287BA3.With . 287F2.With Arm A287E2. Arm A287E2.DOUBLE POLE With Arm 287F2. with Holler . with Holler . wi th Roll er With Arm 287BA4. with Roller With Arm 287BA3. 287CHl.SINGLE POLE BREAKING Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm Arm 287F2. with with with with Roller Roller Roller Roller 39 39 39 39 38 38 38 38 38 39 38 39 39 38 39 38 LIMIT 90YAI8 90YA 18 90YA18 90YAI8 12 12 12 12 LIMIT & & & & 30 30 30 30 TYPE 6098CEI 6098CE2 6098CE3 6098CE4 SWITCH Moisture Moisture Explosion Explosion Proof Proof Pr-oof Proof POLE Oil Oil SINGLE Pot Pot 40 40 40 40 .With • With . with Holler BREAKING With With With With Arm Arm Arm Arm AND MAKING A287E2. 287CH2. with Holler . SWITCH . 287CH4. fRANCISCO DESIGN) Without TYPE Without Oil Pot. with Roller With Arm 287CH3. with Roller Arm 287CH4. With . MAKING • 34 35 SWITCH Oil Oil Pot Oil Pot Oil Pot Oil Pot Oil Pot . with Roller BREAKING 33 ++ 33 +t+ 33+++ 33++ SWITCH Oil Oil . with Roller Arm 287CH3. A287E2. AUX.DOUBLE Without Without THROW WITH cmTACTS with with Roller Roller 44 43 12 12 PUMP SWITCH. 331 331 331 331 .L.With Arm 287CH3.ith with Roller Roller Roller Roll er Roller Roller 35 35 35 35 LIMIT 90YAI8 90YAI8 901188 90llB8 90YAI8 90YAI8 90HB8 90HB8 90YAI8 90YA 18 9OYAl8 90YAI8 90YAl8 90YAl8 LIMIT 90YAI8 90YA18 90YAI8 90YA18 2 2 2 27 30 30 . with Roller With Arm 287F2. with Roller With Arm 287F2.''\lith Arm 287CH4. 287F2. See Fi g • and Name of Swi tch No. with Holler WITH AUX. with Roller With Arm 287F6. With Arm 287CH4. With AND BREAKING . with Holler .With .ith CONTACTS Roller Roller Roller Roller 34 34 35 35 34 34 35 TYPE 4 3 4 3 AND BREAKING. . with Roller With Arm 287F6. Po t 60988C4 Without Oil Pot 60988C5 Without Oil Pot 6098BC6 Without Oil Pot A6098819 Wit~out Oil Pot A6098820 Without Oil Pot A6098B35 Without Oil Pot A6098B36 Without Oil Pot TYPE SWITCH . with Pin Arm Switch. ++ +++ Same a~ Fig. Oil Ti~t Switch Box with Tripper Spring. No. Fig. with Roller Arm Switch.38) Box and Contacts for details sec f:ge 17. Oil Tight Switch Box Box and Contacts ror I I I * Arrow + Not currently used. Ref. Lining and Tripper Cover.L. Switch Box with Pin. Oil Tight Switch Box with Cam Cover. 14 27 77 Box and Contacts for details see page 17. F. No. Fig. 33 l'"xccpt the base contact A306Gl0 instead of A306G7 Same as Fig. 33 except IJ(lse contact A306Gll illS/ead of A306G7 ( List Of Parts Fig. Switch Box with Pin. Switch Box with Pin. Lining and Cam Cover. Fig. Oil Tight Switch Box with am Cover. Fig. Linin and Tripper Cover. Material List and Quantity 2 6098C 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 6098D 3 4 5 6 Description I I 19 20 17 18 55 56 57 58 17 18 19 20 28 29 28 29 78 79 80 81 19. 35 Box and Contacts for details see page 17.20 98* Arm Switch. Lining and Cam Cover. Fig. 287HI 287H2 287J3 287J4 6151BI 615lB2 6151CI 615lDI 320Tl + A346MB5 A346MB6 A346MB7 A346MB8 346BC3 346BC4 346BC5 346BC6 907Al8 .'* Same as 6151B1 except the Base A306G2 instead of A~06G5. Switch Boxwith Pin. with Pin Arm Swi'tch. ]0-13. 34 . No. 39) Bumper. available jor service replacement indicates location.g. Box and Contacts for details sec page 17. Mova Ie Contact Base Returning (Used at location given in "Description of Switcher) • I I a I 1 Fig. 35l 9. with We~t etails sec page 17. 59 60 6] 62 Part or M. rubber (for stop pin on x) Cover. Fig. No. No. with Roller Box and Contacts for details sec pagc 17.L. Oil Tight Switch Box with Tripper Cover. 35 Box and Contacts for details sec page 17. Ref. with Weight Switch. Switch Box with Lining Cover. Fig. No. 39 Bumper. 287PI 287P2 287P3 287P4 615lBI 615lB2 6151CI 615lDI 320Tl A346MBI 346BC2 Description 2 3 4 5 6 7 Material List and Quantity 6098E 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 10 9 13 14 Arm Arm Arm Arm Switch Switch Switch. 38 Box and Contacts for details see ~ge 17. rubber (for stop pin on x) Cover. Part or M. t!1Cpart itself not showing in the illustration • . Not currently used. with Pin Bar.2(' 25 ncr. 1 1 1 1 22222222 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1111111 2 2 I 1 1 I 1 1 Fig. 5-3/4" long (for Lug) Spring. 11/16" Ln. rubber. 25. rubber. with Lining Cover..Moisture.2(' 93 94 95 9fi 97 98- 9 (. 25 26 75 76 38) Box and Contacts 31('KV2 Bracket 316PYl 320Tl t Bumper. see see see Page Page Page 17. 391 Bracket. Switch. Fig. Switch.0. .. No. brass. with Cam Gasket (for Moisture-Pr-oof Switches) Iiousing.(. * Not illustrated. Part or M. details.0.or ExplosionProof Switches) Lever. 5/16" thick (for Outlet .1129 90Y. 34) Box and Contacts 1 I 1 1 1 1 (for (for see Page 17. 17 IR 7. details. 25/32" long (for Lever to Bar) Pin.8 5. 17. }" 0.32 31. 35) Box and Contacts Fig.Moisture-and Explosion- Fig.'rm. details. No. Connecting Box and Contacts Fig.2(' 25 32 31 31. 1-3/16" 0. 36) Box and Contacts Fig.2 3 Material List and Q4antity ('098AS6098AY6098BC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 I I 1 1 1 57 .. see Page 17. Movable Contact Base Returning (Used nl location given in "Description of Switches It) 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I • Arrow indicates location.8 71 72 73 74 287.13 287. tile parts themselves not showing in the illustration. Arm. . Arm. Housing. 5/16" thick (for Outlet . 1"/4" diam. 17.15lB I ('151B2 615lB3 615 lB4 6151( I 615ml Arm. Switch Box. I1escri ltion ('098AL1. 1/4" diam. 1/2" 1. Arm. when. Switch Box. 25.\3 28713014 2871JA5 29911(2 (. with Pin 1 1 1 Proof Switches) Bushing'.. rubber (for Stop Pin on Box) 334111"' Bushing.. 37) Box and Contacts (for~details. (for (for (for details. with Cam Cover.L. 87 88 89 90 91 92 A346MBI 1 1 1 1 A34fiMll10 6368014 63('8A5 37 ('IIAI A39fiPAl 28 7CAl' 288ARI 288M2 4 32F I 72AII2 79M 3 I I III 26 26 25 25 2(. Switch. 5-8.32 31.0.rec. available for Service replacement.. Switch (for Moisture.7 Lt ST OF PARTS • Fig. No. Switch. with Lilling Cover. Housing.14 287B.or ExplosionProof Switches ) Lever Lever (for 6098AL3 only) Lug Nut (Arm to Hod) (for Rod) • 5-8.\ lR Pin. Switch (for Moisture. see Page 17. Switch. with with with with Roller Roller Pin Roller I I details. I" long (for Lever to Bar) Hod.uired. brass.32 25 25 77 82 8(.. 5/1fi" dianl.and Explosion-Proof Swi tches) Cover. with IblJer Material List and Quantity 6098BJ 6098BZ.. I . illustration • . 35) Box and Contacts (for details see page 17 Fig. Switch. 6I5ICI 615101 6I5IEI 6I5IFl 6I51F2 320TI . Switch. .O. Switch. Moisture and Explosion Proof SW1 tches) &shing. with Pin Box and Contacts (for detail s. the parts themselves not showing in the illustration.---- I I I I ] 1 • Arrow indicates • Not illustrated. I s. Fig. I 21-24 30 30 30 30 77 A346MBl 83 88 6368AI 3761IAI A396PAI 287CAI 90HBB 89 90' 98' 8 12. 1-3/16" D. Switch (for Moisture or Explosion Proof Switches) Spring. Arm. 66 67 68 • 1 I 65 66 67 68 21. 38 Box and Contacts (for detail see Page 17. Fig. 34) Box and Cont acts (for detai 1s. seePagel7. with two Pins Arm.! Switches) Housing. . location. 5/16" thick (for Outlet. Swi tch Arm. above available Fig.D. -I I 1111-..21. Switch Box with lining Cover. Switch. Fig. t Not currently • . wi th two Pins Arm. wi th Pin Arm.. Swi leh. 5/16" thick (for Outlet.. with Pin & Link Arm. wi th two Pins & Link. 41) &x and Contacts (for detail see Page 17.6098CE. 33) Box and G:mtacts (for detail s.I I 1 I I I I ] 50 65 I I I I 21 22 Arm. 11/16" I. 39) &x and Contacts (for detail see Page 11. I I I 1 I I I 1 • 6 I 51BI 6I51B2 615184 .I I I 1 I 1 . Part or M. 42) fumper. I s.23. 21 22 21.I . 11. Svi tch. Housing (for Moisture or Explosion Proof Housing) Gasket (for Moisture or Explosion Proo. with two Pins & Link Arm.L. I I s. Fig. 98' 90YAI8 24 Bushing. Switch (for Moisture or Explosion Proof Switches) Lever. I I I .60980\1I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J 0 IllI I 2 I 2 I 2 3 4 1 2 I I I I I I . No. Movable Contact Base Returning (used at location gi vel' in "Description of Switches") • .O. s.No.12 Ref. Fig. 22. 40) Box and Contacts (for detail see Page 17.Similar to the used. Switch. 2 2 2 2 I 1 I I I I 1 1 I I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1 . 22. No. I s. }" D. Fig. rubber. 334HIw see Page 17.D. No.6098CC. "SNiteh. Fig. Movable Contact Base Returning (used at location given in "Description of Svi tches ") Spring. Fig. Moisture and Explosion Proof Switches) Cover. Switch. see Page 17. A287E2 287 AMI 287AM2 287 AM3 287AM4 287 AM5 287AM6 287 AM7 287 AM8 287 AIU 287AR2 287BA5 A6151Al Descriotion Arm'. 1/2" I. I 1 I .23 24 8 69 70 73 Ann. Arm. rubber. rubber (for Stop Pin in &x) . for Service replacement except for when required Link which is • not ahown. wi th Pin Arm. Swi tch wi th Pin & Link 22. l 1 1 I 1 I I 1 2 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I . 37) Box and Contacts (for detail see Page 17.8 LI ST OF PARTS Fig. Swi teh. * t Not currently used. 1 3 19 20 51 52 53 54 55 56 287f2 2B7f4 287f6 287F8 287111 287H2 6151B1 615182 6151CI 6151 Dl 320Tlt 334111* 334112* 6368AI 6368A2 6368A3 376HAI A39 6PAI 287CAI 901188 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 22222 2 2 2 2 222 30 32 31 30. Bumper. Switch (for Moistureor ExplosionProof Swi tches) or ExplosionLever. Box and Contacts ( for details. Switch. .1 I I I • Arrow indicates location. Housing. with Roller Arm.32 30-32 83 84 85 88 89 90' 98' I I I I I I I I I I I I . with Roller Arm. 11/16" LO. 38) Fig.. the parts themselves not showing in the illustration. Description Arm. see Page 17. Switch. Housing. 39) Fig.0. 1/2" LO. 5/16" thick (for Moistureand ExplosionProof Switches) .4. 6098 fC2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12131415 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2 2 2 I 2 I 2 2 2 I 2 I I I I 6098GC16 I 2 3 4 2 4. Switch (for MoistureProof Swi tches) Spring.I . 35) Box and Contacts ( for details'Jsee Page 17.32 I. with Roller Arm. Switch.-":j . Box find Contacts see Page 17. Cover. 1-3/16"0. L. Switch.A396PAI) Gasket (for Moisture-Proof Switches) Housing. when required. Swi tch. Fig.I . (Used at location given in "lk:scription of Swi tchcs") I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I • 30 . 2 3. Switch. rubber. Not illustrated. 19. I" 0.I . Part Li st and Quantity Fig. with Pin Arm.20 9B' 90YAI8 I - I . No. Housing (for MoistureorExplosionProof t1ousing) wi th Tr ipper (for Housing Cover.A396PAI) Cover.0 •• 5/16" thick (for Moistureand Explosion-Proof Switches) Bushing. see Page 17.. rubber. 34) Box and Contacts (for detail s. with Tripper ( for Housing . or No. M. . wi th Pin (for details. 9 LIST OF PARTS • Material Ref. availdble for Service replacement. rubber (for Stop Pin on Box) Bushing. Movable Contact Base Returning (Used at location given in ~Description of Swi tches It) Movable Contact Base Returning Spring. with Roller Arm. Fig. No. see PBge 17.or ExplosionProof Switches) Lever... 10 9 13 14 IS 16 16 liST OF PARTS Ref. see Psge 17.. Switch Arm. No.16 30 30 30 30 9.. with Weight Weight Arm. 59 60 61 62 63 64 64 Part or M. 334H2. Switch (for Moisture.orExplosimProof Housing Gasket (fOf Moisture-Proof Switches) Housing. 13-16 77 83 88 89 90' 98' Switch Box. * • Not t Not currently illustrated. Housing (Cor Moisture. rubber.showing in the illustration. Monble Contact 8eae Returning (Used at location gi. 1" 0.and ExplosionProof Switches) CoYer I 15. used. No. . Switeh. I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I • " Arrow indicates location. 11/16" J.. 287PI 287P2 287P3 287P4 287WI 287W2 287W3 615181 615182 6151CI 615101 320Tl .en in "Description of' Switchu") .. Switch. Switeh Arm.0.ith Lining Conr.10.. Switch Arm. 38) Box and Contacts ( for details. . Switch (for Moisture.oof. .ee Page 17. .ith Arm. Fig.and Explosion-Proof Switches) I I I 2 2 2 . Bushing. Bushing.0. Switen Arm Switch Material List and OJ8l'ltity 6098HC6Q981A10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 234 2 3 456789 I I 1 I I I e Box Bnd Contacts Fig. No. 34) Box and Cootacts Fig.10 Fig. I I I I I I I I I 222222222 I I I I 2 I 2 2 I 2 I I I see Page 17. 39) rubber (for Stop Pin on Box) Bumper. 35) Box and Con ta c ta ( for ( for details details.0. available for ~ervice replacement when required.L. 334HI.~itches) Spring. _Pr. Fig. A346M81 6368A I 376HAI A396PAI 287CAI 90YAI8 Oeseri tion Arm. rubber.D.I I I I 1-3/16" 0. the parts themsel ves not . 5/16" thick (fOf Moisture.or Explosion. 1/2" 1. 5/16" thick (for Moisture... I ( for detai Is . 40+ + +) + Bumper Rubber ' (for stop pin on box) Cover.1 .. Fig. Fig.________ 1 ---1---1------_________ 1 1 1 _ . available for service replacement when required M.1 .. Switch BOxwith lining 1 .L..I .. 38) Box and Contacts (sec page 17. (see page 17.1 ... L. A6098B19 & 20 similar in appearance to Fig. 44) Box and Contacts (see page 17.... 1 & 2 except for booring and roller on switch ann. Fig.------1----------- .-. Part or No. 40 except bme A306Gll Instead of A306G7 * + ++ + + + • .1 . Fig. 1l-12 77 98 A346MBI 346BC2 9OYA18 Box and Contacts (see page 17. 39) Box and Contacts (see page 17. 40 except bme A306GI0 Instead of A306G7 Same m Fig..I I . 1 .. Fig.1 1111 -----1--- --------- -------1__ 1 -1---1---..lOA List of Parts • Fig.I .. Fig... Fig.... movable base retw- ning (use<l at location given in "Descrintion of Switches") Arrow indicates location. Ref... Fig.. 46) Arm (see page 19. 33) Box and Contacts (sec page 17..I - -------1- 1---1-1 1--------1-------11---11----11--I I --I I -I I I _________ ----11-- -1------1--- A6151BI A6151B2 A6151CI A6151C2 AJI51D1 A6151D2 A615lPI I i (sec page 17. the parts themselves not showing in the illustration Not illustrated Not currently use.I ...12 2 4 I 50 51 52 53 54 3 2 I 4 3 2 I 51 53 52 54 51 53 A287E2 267F2 267F4 267F6 267F8 267F19 267F20 267CHI 267CH2 267CH3 267CH4 6098FHI 6098FH2 A6151AI A6151A2 Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arin with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm with Roller Arm (see page 19.1. Fig.. 47) Box and Contacts (see page 17. Description 1 2345 Material List and Quantity A6098B/l 7 8 9 lOll 12131415161718 192021222324252627 282930313233343536 A6098A373S 1 234 1l. 33) Box and Contacts ___________ --1---1I I -1---1--. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1-1-1-1-------111111111111111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1111111111 I -I I I - 27 1-4 Cov"'.1 .J - -I -I ----I 1 .1 . Oil Tight Box Spring. M. Fig..I .. 34) Box and Contacts -----1------1---I 1- 1 - 1 - 1I . 35) Box and Contacts -1------- (sec page 17.-1. Same m Fig. Fig..I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .-.1 .. 40 + +) A615lRI • 32OT1 1-4. Fig.. No . 43) Box and Contacts I I I I - 1-------_________ -I I -I 11--1--1- (sec page 17.. No...I . . 35) see Page see Page on Box) 38) 39) Box and Contacts (for details. with Roller Arm. No..0 . 17. Sj16" thick (for Moistureand Explosion-Proof Switches) Bushin~. No. rubber. }" 0. Box and Contacts (for details. 38) . Arm.. 33) 34) A6098AY2345678 6098CC12 17 18 50 57 58 1 1 1 1 1 80x and Contacts Box and Contacts • Box and Contacts (for details. Fig. Switch. Box and Contacts 35) (for Page 17. Switch. with Pin Box and Contacts (for det~ils.• 5/16" thick (for Moisture. Switch. Switch.L. Housing (for Moistureor Explosion-Proof Housing) Hous ing.4. rubber. 1-3/16" O. L.or Exp losion -Proof Hous ing) Housing. * used.and Explosion-Proof Switches) Cover. 1/2" 1. D. Fig.D. P~rt or M. wi th Cam ( for Mois ture .2 3.. Bumper.. Switch Spring. Not currently the' parts themselves not showing in the illustration.and Explosion-Proof Switches) Cover. Ref. Lever.0. Fig. with Roller with Roller with Roller (for (for details. 11/16" LD. see see see see Page 17.over. No.'1 6368A2 6368A3 376HAl A396PAl 287CAl 90llB8 90YA18 84 85 88 89 90' 98' 98' * Arrow indicates location. (for Moisture-Proof Switches) Housing. Arm. 1/2" 1. 1" 0. Housing (for Moistureand Explosion-Proof Housing) Cover. rubber (for Stop Pin Bushing. 5/1 fi" th ick (for Mois ture. details.11 LIST Fig. Des cripti on 2 4 51 1 3 52 53 54 55 56 19 20 287F2 287F4 287F6 287F8 287111 287H2 615 lB 1 6151B2 6151Cl 615l1Jl 320Tlt 334Hh 334H2* Arm. Movable Contact Base Returning (Used at location given in "Description of Switches") 30 32 31 3O~32 30-32 30-32 1.. 17. 39) rubber (for Stop Pin on Box) rubber. Switch. Box and Contacts 34) (for details.(for Box and Contacts Bumper. Fig. available [or Service replacement.11 22222 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 83 32 31 30-32 30-32 30 -32 86 87 88 89 90' 63h8Al 6368A4 6368A5 37611Al A396PAl 28 7CA1 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 1 1 1 111 1 1 1 1 1 Fig. No. (.0. when required. see Page 17. see see Page Page 17.n.. with Pin Arm. II OF PARTS Material List and Quantity Ref. with Roller Arm. 5/16" thick (for Moistureand Explosion-Proof Switches) Bushing. Not illustrated. Fig. A287E2 287 J 3 287J4 615 lA 1 6151Bl 615lB2 6151Cl 615J1)l 3 20Tl t 334111* 334112* Description Arm. Cover. with Roller Arm. Switch. rubber. • . 11/16" I . Page 17. Housin g. Iiousing. No. No. Switch. with Roller Arm. 1-3/16" 0. Fig. 17. Fig. Bushing. Page 17. wi th Tri pper Cover. details. Fig. Switch.. with Tripper Gasket. Switch Lever. Switch. Fig. 83 6368.. details.0. with Cam (for Moisture-Proof Switches) Switch Switch 11111. Gasket Housing. Part or M. MovllbleContact Base Returning (Used at location given in "Description of Switches") Spring. 1I0x iUld Contacts (for Page 17. see Box nnd Contacts (for Pngc 17. ----- "------ ------ ---_. wi th Lining Cover. Fig.. Arm. Fig.D •• 1-3/16" and 5/16" thick (for MoistureExplosion-Proof Switches) Cover. 4 Making • FIG.-itch Box.. Fig.) it I 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I ] I 1 I 1 ] 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 ] 1 ] 1 ]]]] ] I ] I 1 I I '] I 1 I ] ] ] ] ] I I I I I ] 1 I 1 1 I I ] 1 i I • : A San francisco removes Base fA306G5 and replaces location.'i tch. Arrow indicates illustrated... Bushing.L. Fig.D . No. Arm. Pnge M09811C2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II I I 12 13 14 15 16 SF6012FI 4 10 9 13 14 sY. Swi teh Swi ten Swi ten. L. 1" Q 0. FIG. S. I Breaking FIG. 287F4 287PI 287P2 287P3 287P4 6]511l] 6151 B2 6151C 1 615101 320Tl .9-14 77 83 88 89 90' 90' A346MBI 63 68A 1 37611Al A396PA] 287CA 1 90YA18 11/]6" l. __ . with Weight 34) details. No. Movable Contact Base Returning (Used at location given in "Description of SNitches . Explosion-Proof rubber. 3 Making . Arm. 38) dct'8iJs . 52 59 60 61 62 Part or Oeseri Jlion M. 35) (for Box nnd Contacts Page 17. with I see see see ] ] Switch.. 39 ) Bumper.} o . Not t Not currently used. detnils. Hef. themselves 1I0t showing ill the illustration . 334111* 334112* Arm. wi tn RoJ ler Weight (for details. tile parts with Base A306G2. Arm.n . Swi tch Spring. Housing Gasket (for Moisture-Proof Switches) Switch flousing. Lever. R $ . 2 Breaking FIG.-~_. rubber. (for MoisturcSwitches) I ] I ] 1 1 1 1 1 I I 222222222 nnd 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 30 30 30 30 4. available for Service replacement. I ] Box nnd Contacts I I ] 1 17. o. Fig. rubber (for Stop Pin on Box) 1/2" I. when required.12 LI ST OF PARTS Material List and Quantity • No. 5/16" thick Bushing. 11 floor Stop Type FIG.13 rr~ L R" " # L R \~ \~' 71 • 73 • FIG. 14 Making FIG. L R L R L R •• 98 • W ~ Q !-98_ I " 59 0 - 50 77 77 • L R 0 FIG.J. 9 Makin? FIG. 8 Breaking L R . 61 62_ _98 _ • . 5 Breaking FIG. J 2 Breaking and MokinQ L R g" ~ (l) -J "" f. 7 Breaking FIG. 16 Breaking • .\ ~ @ Q 0 77 0 a 0 77 l) e- FIG. 6 Breaking FIG. _ 98-. 13 Making FIG. 10 Making FIG. 15 Breaking F1G. -80 55 56 81 58 79 FIG. 26 Breaking . 20 Breaking L R L R L '-~-:--~- e e .' FIG.' i 66 68 • • ""--65 67 -). 77 0 0 :. 22 Breaking FIG. 24 breaking 82 77 93 94 73 97 92 96 91 73 • 98- ~ FIG.. L '. 23 Breokin9 FIG. Ill8reaking FIG. 17 Breaking L I. R L R L R --78 --57. Making 2S or Breaking e:::: FIG. 19 Breaking FIG.14 • FIG. 21 Breakina FIG.: l. . 30 FIG. 28 FIG. 31 FIG. 32 • .' 89 86 IJ • FlG.15 FIG. 27 FIG. 29 88 '. - 102 105 FIG.. 37 FIG. -108 -- .. 40 110~ 118 122 100 99 "' 115 111- 102 • FIG. 44 .. .--120 121 --liB . 42 FIG.-117 . 41 FIG. 33 -. 35 FIG. 38 FIG. --IOB- - • FIG. 43 FIG.16 • FIG.--- . 39 FIG. 34 VIG. 3" . M. Fig. 6151B4. 33 Fig. A6151AI.L. 44 40++. # 150H4 Ba<. 44 40++.40+++ 33 40++. Contacts Single Pole. M.L. Make and Break Single Pole. Contact (stationary) I-Base Contact #A306Gl I-Connector # 176El I-Connector #176Fl 2-Contacts # ISOH4 Ba~e Contact (stationary) I-Ba'ie Contact #A306GI I-Connector #176El I-Connector # I76F3 +: 2-Contacts # lSOH4 Bao. with Pin and Bracket Connector Connector (for guide) Contact. Spring Spring (for Pin) Wa~her 1/32" thick (for spring contacts) Wa~her liS" thick (for spring contacts) 2 2 2 2 I I 2 I I 3 I 2 I I I I 2 2 3 3 I I 2 I I 2 2 3 I 2 I I 2 2 2 I 1 2 I I 2 I I 2 I I 2 2 2 2 2 4 I 4 I ++ + + + * Not fllrilL~hed separatel'l/ for repfacement order a~sembled ba~e Some a~ Fig. 44. Single Pole. Fig. Single Throw Double Pole. 40 exc(.40++ + 41 42 33-37.L.L. Single Throw Double Pole. 99 I()() 101 Description Barrier. Contact stationary) I-Base Contact #A306GI 2-Connectors # 176H 1 2-Contacts. Make and Break Single Pole. Insulating Base.44 33-44 33-44 33. Part or M. 43. 43. Single Throw Double Pole.44 34. 6151FJ.43 39.615ICI. 615101.615183. M.37 33.eContact #A306Gl 2-Contact<.. Spring Contact.L. Single Throw Single Pole. M.L. A6151RI.Ba<.36. Single Throw Single Pole. No. Switch. Switch.43. Aux.L. 43.37 34-40. Double Throw.615IB2.36. Contact Spring Housing.44 33-44 38-40. S~ring Hub.43. M.37. #I50F4 3-Contacts #150H4 Base. Single Throw Double Pole. Fig. Single Throw Single Pole. Switc Arm Lining (for stationary contact base) Pin. Single Throw Single Pole. Fig.42 35. Fig.44 33. Fig.42 36.41. Single Throw Single Pole. Contact ~movabIe) Base. 40 excc.43.44 102 104 *' A306C4 consisting of: * * I 39. M. 120 and 121 jor details of contact boxes see page 17A. 40++. M. Single Throw Single Pole.L. with Aux. 117.43. 275EI B306FI A306C2 Material List and Quantity A6151A6151A6151I 2 BIB2B3B4CIC2DID2E1FIl'2PIRI I I I I 1 I No."pt )a~e A306G10 illStcod of A306G7 Some a~ Fig. Make and Break • I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 + Same a~ Fig. 33 except without Ref. M.43 102 103 * * *' * consisting of: A306G3 * consisting of: 38.40+++ 40++.eContact (stationary) I-Ba<. 33-44 33-44 33 Ref.37. M. Spring Contact.42 40 40 40+ + 102 105 102 106 102 107 A306G5 * consisting of: consisting of: I I A306G6 A306G7 * • 2 2 2 2 2 2 I I consisting of: * 102 107 102 107 102 108 109 110 III 112 113 114 115 114 113 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 A306GIO * * * consisting of: 40+ + 40+ + + 40+ + + 33-40. Double Throw. Fig. 40+ + + M. Contact Single Pole. Spring Contact. No. with Pin and Bracket Box. Fig.41 34. 6151El.L. M. List Of Parts Fig.40+++ 38-40. Spring Cuide.41 35. 615102.44 40++. A 6151PL M.L. Fig.eContact (stationary) 1.615IC2. Fig.40+++ 36. M.Ba'iC Contact #A306Cl 2-Connector # 176EI:tc 2-contacts # 150H4 Bao. M.17 DESCRIPTION OF 6151 CONTACT BOXES Fig..eContact (stationary) I-Base Contact #A306Cl 2. 34 35 36 37 38 43 39 44 40 41 42 40+ + Fig. 33+ Fig. 6151F2.L.>ptba~e A306Gll illStead of A306G7 • . 6151BI. Fig. M.L. with Pin Box. Switch. with Aux.L.L.40+++ A306GlI consl<. Spring I 1 I 2 I 2 I 2 2 I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Contact.L.e Contact #A306Cl 2-Contacts #I50H4 Ba'ie Contact (stationary) I.ting of: * B308GAZ 308BDI 308BD2 176Dl 176AAI 932A2 150P4 I50H2 150P44 150P45 385)1 396B I A397AI A429Cl 77TAI 9OCB6 128H1 128H3 Box.L.Connector #176El 2-Contacts #150H4 Base Contact (stationary) I-Base Contact #A306Cl 2-Connectors # 176EI 2-Contacts # 150H4 33 38. A6151A2. 6098BP.. Adapter Adapter Adapter Switch A6098B5 A6098B7 A6098B3 A6098BI A609RB3 A6098B3 A609BB7 Repl!Qng.45 ~' 133 " • ROLLER ARMS (WITH ROLLER) . Adapter Adapter PI ate. Part No. of Arm 288NB2 A288LB2 288JB2 288JB2 288052 288KB2 288KB2 288MB3 288BF2 288BF4 288MB4 288MB6 A287AW2 Similar Similar Ref the 6098E Gate Switches replace other types. Where Used • No. of Arm 288KMI Where Used With Single Slide. 2 Speed. Dwg.Parting Gate. 133. ~5 now used {or new changeovers-when Ref. Type A6098B Limit Switches replace other •• •• 133 133. 2 Speed. Freight Enclosure: Owg. Adapter PI ate. 6098CB ADAPTER AND ADAPTER PLATES . A60980F long) I-K~ 1 or 10"K-I N-I N-2 With 6806 Vertical Lifting Car Gate. Q) I 1 . 0 ~-128J ~129Q ~) 126 125 124 at \ :: --I " " =1 ~~"~ 131 130 132 ___ . 0 0. 124 124 125 126 126 127 127 Part No. With Luzy Tong Sliding Freight Gate. 609888 Same . except roller on inside • to ReE. Freight Enclosure: Owg.Owg. 2-K-2 2-K-I With Bi-Parting Gate. 128 129 130 130 • B288KMI With Bostwick Passenger Sliding Gate. Owg 6098BN With Bostwick Manually Operated Passenger . Dwg. . ReI. 6098FB Wit:\ 6378A Safety Manual} y Operated With Single Slide. Part No. Owg.for Car Design 14247. A6098AB With Vertical Sliding Wood Gate. FIG.Gate: Owg. . Freight Enclosure. R-I or R-2 Dumb.18 • .FIG. Adapter PI ate. Freight Enclosure.FIG. Owg. 6098E8 and (Arm 6" long) "A" l-K-2 or 10-K-2 • With Lazy Tong Sliding Freight Gate. Center Open • ing or 2 Speed Center Opening. 6098GB With Vertical Sliding Wire Mesh Gate.} No. to Ref. 60980B With Bi.oiter woiter 6098BG Cor. 133 With Bostwick Service Sliding Gftte. 6098AP(Arm 6-3/8" 6098 AP (Arm 7-3/4'lg. (Arm 13-1/2" Owg. ~5 For use •. Type 6970A Operator. Freight Enclosure. Type AU Hangers (Arm 6-3/4" long) Passenger Gatc.) 19. Freight Enclosure. Dwg. No. Center Opening or 2 Speed Center Opening. 132: • Similar •• to ReE..(or Strikers) installations are also used for Service ReI. 386EKI 38 6EKI 270BI 386DK 1 3B60KI 270AI 270Al For When Description PI Ate.. If) -!!! . Owg. 130. . Type 6970A Operator.Hangers (Arm 5-1/16" long) The following Holler Arms. 6098H8 With Vertical Sliding Wood or Wire Mesh • 131 131 132 Gate.hen types. Type AU.Owg. Freight Enclosure. 5-1 or 5-2 DumbCor. 19 = 0 0 = 0 0 0 = 0 = • 140 137 FIG.47 • .46 FIG. • • • . A626I HI AND 2054 D4 PARTS LEAFLET C-1041 APRIL 1.C. L. 1965 .~ OTIS OFFICES ELEVATOR IN ALL OF THE COMPANY PRINCIPAL WORLD CITIES • .I041 • TYPE (A6261 H) 4-%" ROLLER GUIDE M. . . 21 active turns. No.. 1/4" thick. leather (for Stand) Bumper.).62" dill. leather (for A288W2) Bushing. x 7/8" 0. 3/4" dia.. 1_1/8" wide. 2-9/16" long.075" dia. Part No. wire Stand (less Bumper) Stop Washer.0 •.124CA1 91818 90HC4 A471CG1 A477EAl 127VB31 2 3 1 '" 2 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 Pin Ring. 3" long.S. 1 M. Description Bumper.A. 1_1/8" long Oil-less (for Levers) Guard Lever. 1/16" thick • . 21/32" L D. . wire Spring. tity 1 • PRINTED U. Spring.u 5 • FIG. 1-1/4" o. I PARTS F'OR TYPEA6261l1ROLLER GUIDES (4-7/8" DIA.L. Spring Adj.D. ROLLERS) . 2" lang. 17/32" L D.FIG. x 1/4" thick. Seat. A626lH1 and 2054D4 Ref. with Bump~r and Bushing Lever Nut 1 2 3* 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 320BR1 320BM1 335E84 A384LK1 A288W2 A395D2 67E14 A77TN1 172DR3 456C~14 . Retaining Roller. 21 active turns. Quan.. with Bearing Screw. . D. 5/8" O.. 3/4" LD. N 3 ML 6481Gl ML 6481PI ML 6481 TI • PAR T S LEA ] UN E 1. N 2 FIG. • TYPE 6~BI GOVERNOR ROPE TIGHTENER.•.N 1 FIG.l 0 9 4 • OTIS ELEVATOR OF THE COMPANY PRINCIPAL CITIES WORLD OFFICES IN ALL • ." •. FIG. I C-I094. f LET 1 9 72 C. .6 • _____ . 1 335E22 2 374NRI 3 4 ~ QUANTITY r.. 0523A2 PiP'. NO.ESCRIPl'IOO 2 1 Bushing Frane 385KH1 82G5 2 1 Guide Pin 172rn6 267J1 2 Ring 1 7 345BT1 Sheave W. L.2 ( I. PARI' NO. " • FIG.Bushing Weigtlt(Quantity Per Contract) • .!_ . I PARIS FOR ML 648101 ROPE TIGHTENER FIG. #1 FORM 052lA2. . l! QUANTITY 2 2 1 1 2 1 7 DESCRIPTION Pin Pawl Plate Sheave SpI'ing Washer Heigtlt NO.IPTION Bearing Bushing Cover Fitting Frarre Nut Nut Pin REP. pART NO.u. 2 PARIS F'OR I-'L 6481Pl ROPE TIGHTENER. fSAPT NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 .6tJtM:ed.'<0. 207218 3~5E49 2 5BXl • 435C2 374PJl 67E13 67E14 8 77WHl • PtVr-t not . #2 FORM 0524-1. PIG.i._ 2 6 10 13 1 14 SECTION A-A 15 FIG.. 10 11 12 13 14 15 81AX24 439AEl 386AYWl 265ADl 92ALl 127VB122 344BCl .U. QUAllTITY 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 DESCP..-----+---- TIGHTENEIt 5 • _________ J.. 0525 REF. . NO. --_.Mj 2 1 Bearing Fitting 2 1 1 Nut Shaft Sheave Strip WeigJ1t 7 344501 2 1 • . PARI' NO. 3 seCTldN A-A PM'IS 'FOR ML 6481'£1 ROPE TIGHTENER FIG. Pt-tC \ 2 4 5 6 PRINTED • IN U. #3 FORM0524-1 REF.-~. 7 FIG. QUANTIT'f DESCRlPTIOt'l 1 2 3 4 5 6 207218 435C2 67E14 495CN1 265AD1 298P.A.~J¥--.S. / \ I /)1 // I /J / / / I I I I \ \ ) / / FILE NO.3013 • ~UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS . .SERIAL. 209948R 209948C June 1981 20 9948R .SERIAL. C. /'" -71 / / / / / I I I • 20 9948C .Parts Leaflet • 9948R ELECTRONIC DETECTOR & 9948C POWER SUPPLY BOX. ." • • . I I I I I 2 F 1 i . 9948Rl L0147LNl 2 Faceplate • . .... ..T I I ./:' I I I • ! . \ • "1 I I I ":: I . . I I I ~ ':. L __ - -" - I . ..- -"1 I I • I I I I I 1--1 I "i\. ".- - - - . .SPARE PARTS r- I I . 1 I i -_. Detector complete DESCRIPTION PART OR M L.. ~ .J - I I I I I - - - - _____ J I SERIAL L.. I • ." .II . ~I I I I I ...2 9948R ELECTRONIC DETECTOR ... .e.:-' •• ~.Ol REF No.~:.. :.~-~ir~. 1a 1b Cable.-"' E -" L • SERIAL L..9948R ELECTRONIC DETECTOR . I DESCRIPTION PART OR M.L L0174HHl L0174HH2 L = 3.01 REF. Cable. No.. • .[ ~ • -.75m L = 6m.SPARE PARTS 3 • ~Ia: Ib ... I DESCRIPTION PART OR M L.4 9948C POWER SUPPLY BOX • • SERIAL L01 REF No. ~ Parts Leaflet 2Q-99488/C 1 Power Supply Box . C.• Parts Leaflet 9948B DOOR DETECTOR & 9948C POWER SUPPLY BOX 20 99488 209948C JANUARY 1977 • 20 9948 C 20 9948 B * SERIAL * * SERIAL * •m FILE NO.3014 UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS ELEVATOR . - 4 13 @"t.~ lV' J / 12 ~ .~ ~ "'" I I I I ~ " :'D~ : I I I I fI!IIP -- "'~ " I ~ ~I I I I L ___ - I ~ I- '" "''.. • 1 1 :-.J ~ ~ "".1 " 2 6 "'~ 7 I I • . ":I I I I .2 99488 DOOR DETECTOR 5 11 3 1.' I '" I T--J 8 I . ~ I '" --------. I • . LXA 147F B501 LXA147EY1 L0275J1 LXA 147FC502 LXA147EW2 L0275J1 2 3 Bottom faceplate I I - Insulation barrier 1 ~ Top faceplate LXA 147FC501 2 ---! c::-:: --__ -=-::J Bottom faceplate LXA147EW1 3 .Insulation barrier L0275J1 Control unit.L.Top faceplate Bottom faceplate '-. Phillips. Phillips. M4 x 12. type Z. internal 9948D1 L0174GS2 L05000E363 LX336CZ502 11 12 13 - • . 1 2 3 1 ---! 3 I DESCRIPTION .6 x %. NO. pan head. flat. black finish Screw.Top faceplate LXA 147FC502 2 Bottom faceplate LXA147EW2 '---c=-: __ 3 4 5 6 7 8 :-=-:::I .Insulation barrier L0275J1 1 . M3 shakeproof. '-.NO.4 x %. self tap. Printed circuit board Cable [length = 3734mm (12' 3")] Screw. black finish Plug+ spacer + Omm@ Cable clip. Insuloid type NX2 Screw.No. pan head Washer.Insulation barrier .Top faceplate lI PARTOR M.99488 DOOR DETECTOR SERIAL L01 REF. - • I I I I I I. I I REF NO. 9948J1 L0613E1 • ~ '" .- - - - - - I I I • " ~. C SERIAL L01 .-} ~'~ I I I ~~ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1-1 I I I I I I I I I -. complete Printed circuit board assembly Relay 9948C1 . - - - I ~ ~ " 5.4 9948C POWER SUPPLY BOX - _.L. 1 2 3 Power supply box.DESCRIPTION PARTOR M.. Parts' Leaflet • TACHO GENERATOR « C.-3017A GAMMA 160 S» DECEMBER. 1983 10 970BG SERIAL * • • 11 UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS . -.------I I I --.--1 I I I • DESCRIPTION Tacho Generator Coupling for 17CT & 215DT Machine L2 I I ---. 970BG3 GOA215R1 • I .J I I I REF NO 1 2 PART NO.TACHO GENERATOR 9708G 1 • r-. • Parts Leaflet ADVANCED FIXTURES HALL PANELS & FIXTURES OCTOBER.. 1983 C-3031 ( • .._--- J . OJ • et UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS . 3039) Jewel Module.St. Board Guard.740" X 4.. 8* 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PART NO: 7069AR.7069AG13 7069AH9 SCMA PP6.5" LG Washer..No. 7..7069AH40 OR 41 7069AH. . I 1 1 1 I 1 2 "- ~ 1 1 7-111 1 I 1 1 1 I. 1 I I . PhaseI (See Detail Page5) Keyswitch Module. .. 3 """- () .7069AS1 7069AF. 10. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7.3039) Ke switch Module SES PhaseI (See Leaflet C.._____ • REF NO. • . "- . ' /1 . .C.3032) Button Module Hall Call Up/Down (See Detail Page4) Keyswitch Module Hall Call Up/Down (See Leaflet C. 16 ~ I) /1 ' 1 1""'" / / .40X1/4ZP aTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 6 6 1 1 1 1 4 8 5 Gang MasonaryBox HousingPanel.6-Module.82" Standoff .6 Pan Head MachineScrew.800730 2 Stop Hall Position Indicator (See Leaflet C.• - .62" LG Pan Head Machine Screw. . "- "- ....830" Faceplate.___ 12.. 'I 1 I I 561 .50" X 2. (LRV-3) --. Complete (SeeTabulation Page) *These Items are an Either/or Condition Per Contract Re uirement .Box 699 396JP1 147NF7069AG. . "- 14 13 1 I I _______ -l "'.25" LG Hall Panel MicroprocessorAssembly (Items: 16-19) P.25" LG • (SeeTable) DESCRIPTION Hall PanelAssy. SCMA PP10-32X1/4CP 7069AP1 A8121AY1 384TV1 STANDOFF 8085..32X1/2CP W5R STD6BRCP. Access(See Leaflet C-3039) Pan Head Machine Screw . Steel W/(4) Set ScrewsVP.A-0440 SCMA P4. C)C) C) C)CJ CJCJ \)CJ I 1 . Slotted.3032) 3+4 Stop Hall Position Indicator (See Leaflet C. SES.1 TYPE: 7069AR MAIN HALL PANEL ASSY. :..J .:.15 2+3+4+6+*+11+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+11+12-15 2 • NO. r---.i • r--I L __ .---.:~ L~S~~ FACEPLATE PART 147Nfl 147Nf2 147Nf3 14711'4 147Nf5 147Nf6 147Nf7 147Nf8 147Nf9 TABLE CUTOUT POSlTIONS 2...6 2.. L.6 1.:.3..3 6 1 246 1.TYPE: 7069AR MAIN HALL PANEL ASSY.3 5 6 ALL6 '---I '---I POS'.5. OF STOPS 7069AR PANEL LANDING LOCATION Bottom 2 Stops 5 6 7 B Top 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Bottom 3&4 Stops 17 1B 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2B 29 - • 3&4 Stops Top Intermediate .~s-. (LRV-3) 7069AR-ARR 1 2 3 4 ASSEMBLY CONSIST OF ITEMS 2+3+4+5+*+12+15 2+3+4+5+*+11+12+15 2+3+4+5+*+9+12+15 2+3+4+5+*+9+10+12+15 2+3+4+5+*+9+11+12-15 2+3+4+5+ *+9-15 2+3+4+5+*+12-15 2+3+4+5+*+11+12-15 2+3+4+5+*+9+12-15 2+3+4+5+*+9+10+12-15 2+3+4+5+*+9+11+12-15 2+3+4+5+ *+9-15 2+3+4+6+*+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+11+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+10+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+11+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9-15 2+3+4+6+*+12-15 2+3+4+6+~+11+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+12~5 2+3+4+6+*+9+10+~2-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+11-15 2+3+4+6+ *+9-15 2+3+4+6+*+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+12-15 2+3+4+6+*+9+10+12.3.6 2 5 6 r----. LO_S.2..J L~~S_'.0_S~~ r.4.2.J i 356 1. 740" X 4. Bronze Hall Panel Assy. Steel Bronze 147587 147588 3 St.830" 55 -Not *Oty. 1 147T85 6 St..• w/(2) 251FAI Nut Inserts. Bronze Hall Panel Assy. Oty. 5 and Leaflet C-3039. St.) Faceplate Assy. I.VP. w/(41 251 FA 1 Nut Inserts. St. Steel Bronze I L REF.Bronze Hall Panel Assy.1 Screws 1 1 2 147SB3 Thru 8 147TB3 Thru 6 1 3 4 SCMA PP6-32X 1/2CP W5R SAE6CP 396JP1 396JNl Illustrated * * Pan Head Machine Screw. 3-Module..(.. Housing Panel for 1. NO...932" (used with 4&6 Module Assys...830" NOTE: For fixture details see pages 4.843" X 4.860730 10. Steel Hall Panel Assy. """ I i I • I I I SEE NOTE I I I 10l ~ I I I I i I ~ ~ 5 No. St. Steel .. Steel 147584 Bronze i I II I I I I I I I I I •••.860730 Screws 7. Bronze I ~ I PART NO.. . St. Bronze Faceplate Assy . Steel 1. of Finish Part.Module.2&3 Module Assy. 10. of 4/Up to 3-Module. (2) . Steel Bronze I I I 147T83 147TB4 147TB6 ~~~ 4 St. 61T0 4-6 Mod"le • (I . 2-Module. "Ol.. Modules 147583 St. 6-Module.2&3 Module Assys.219" X 4.. NO. Steel Hall Panel Assy.Assy. No.3 TYPE: . St. 4-Module.. 2-Module.117" X 4. Washer.U 147585 147$86 2 St. 6-Module. (4) VP. Bronze Hall Panel Assy.Module Hall Panel. Steel Hall Panel Assy. 7069AJI 7069AJ2 7069AJ3 7069AJ4 7069AJ5 7069AJ6 7069AJ7 7069AJ8 7069AJ9 7069AJ10 OTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • DESCRIPTION Hall Panel Ass .Module.. 7. 4. Steel Hall Panel Assy. ~ : FIXTURES 7069AJ HALL PANEL ASSEMBLY : "" /1 \ ~ 2 ". 1/2" LG. 3'Module.932" (used with 1.6 Housin Panel for 4 Thru 6 Module Assy. Slotted. .3/B" H Reflector Button Spring.. " 12 " I I 1 "'" " .LRS. 11 r:~ : 1 'J ' i i • REF "'.LRV. 18AWG Button P.4..LRV'2) (Items: 2 Thru 7+10+12+13+14) Button Module (. 9 "'. 4-Circuits.C. St.) Complete (E.. Board w/Neon Lamp Button P. " " ) I. 1/8" LG Microswitch 5 Am s 125/250VAC Insert Mkd. Feed-Thru. 61/64" Developed Length Pan Head Screw.3) (Items: 2 Thru 9+15) Button Module (+) Complete (MRS.j..) .-1 NO 1 PART NO 7069AFll 7069AF12 7069AF45 7069AF46 7069AF51 7069AF52 OTY 1 • 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 396P81 278EAl 94FAI 124CY4 323DAI 396VBl P614AS2 8200KAI 8200AL3 8200AL1 lBODA2 177DAI 250E25 250E26 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 DESCRIPTION Button Module (+) Complete (E-401. Steel.j. 2-3/4" LG X 1. 467ATI Lamp Socket Sin Ie Switch Holder.j. ~" "'. Board~ w/424R1 Lamp. 8 "' I I : I r I I 1 7~. No.••. " (uP ~l~13 : I "'---------------_.LRV. 3/4" LG Tar et White Housin Connector. Plastite.h """"""" 10 '" ~ • '.LRV-2) (Items: 2 Thru 7+10+12+13+15) Button Module (4') Complete (VF) (Items: 2 Thru 7+11+12+13+14) Button Module (. 2 Pins.401.: (.4 : • I I TYPE: 7069AF BUTTON MODULE ASSEMBLY I--------------~ "'.) Complete (VF) (Items: 2 Thru 7+11+12+13+15) Chick let.. /1 " " I " .3) Items: 2 Thru 9+14) Button Module (. Board w/424R1 Lam 467ATI Lam Socket Button P.C..C.) Complete (MRS.: ("'J Insert Mkd..LRS. NO. Wedge Base.""- • REF NO.4.LRS..Board w/Lamps & Sockets Lamp."". Polycarbonate-White.55/64" H X 1..C." " • 8 " I I I I I I I l ".23/24" H Jewel P.. 3/4" LG Connector. Emergency Service (E-401) (Items: 2 Thru 7+9) Jewel Module Complete. Red..3 "-."-.. 1 OESCRIPTION Jewel Module Complete. Emergency Power (E-401.LRV'2.. 28V Lamp Socket.".- I I I I I "-. 18 AWG Mask. ". Express Priority (LRS.- r--------------------~. 3-Circuit. 1 PART NO.5 TYPE: I I I 7069AG 2 JEWEL MODULE ASSEMBLY "-.LRV'31 (Items: 2 Thru 8+12) Lens. Type 85 Pan Head Screw. 7069AG2 7069AG4 1 7069AG5 7069AG13 2 '3 4 443C81 278FAI 8200JAI 424Rl 467ATI 124CY4 P614ASI 449BJ3 449BJ5 449BJ6 449BJ9 278FA2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 QTY..MRS. 2.VF) (Items: 2 Thru 8+10+13) Jewel Module Complete.VF. 2."-. Mkd: Please Exit When Door Opeo Mask Mkd: EPI EP2 Mask Mkd: Power Mask Mkd: Priority Service Shield 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 • ..MRS. Plastite. I I "-.314" LG X 1-3/8" H Jewel Reflector."-. MG Pilot (E-401) (Items: 2 Thru 7+11) Jewel Module Complete. .."-. j~~~.'---.~.':~-~..~<"..... • • • .-.r~-'...'~_~''' .~. .''''.. ..'.----...'e. .r------------------------....---I--:::--7:7---:-------:' ..-.-._~.-. 1 '.--:---:::--:-. Parts Leaflet • 7069AH KEYSWITCHMODULE ASSEMBLY . 1983 6410W KEYSWITCH • 1 i I • mUNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS .C-3039 SEPTEMBER. witch Module.witch Module. Ho. PART NO.e II ANSI Key.5 I I I I I ) I I 9 -15 I I • 78 ~---------------------~ 1 L REF. Group Security Key. Express Priority Service Key.witch Module. Light>Ray Cutout (LRV) Key. Hall Call Up (LRV) Key. DESCRIPTION Key.1 7069AH I I I----------------~.witch Module. 6 I I I I I 3.'. Attendant Key. Hall Call Down (LRV) ASSY. . " I I I KEYSWITCH MODULE wllNTEGRAL /1 " " SWITCH CTR CW CCW KEY POSITION " " I I I ' • .witch Module.. Attendant Service (MRS) Key. Power (MG Set) Key. NO. 16_ .witch Module.witch Module.1 I I " ' .witch Module..witch Module.4.'.pital Service Key. SES Pha. OF ITEMS: 7069AH1 7069AH2 7069AH4 7069AH5 7069AHll 7069AH28 7069AH37 7069AH38 7069AH40 7069AH41 2+3+6+7+8+11+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+10+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+12+16+18 2+3+6+7+8+9+16+17 2+4+6+7+8+13+16+18 2+3+6+7+8+14+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+15+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+10+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+9+16+18 2+5+6+7+8+9+16+18 • . I 2 I I I I I I I I .witch Module. UTA Removed at Positions CTR & CW Keyswitch. 2-3/4" LG x 1-3/8" H Mount. Momentary Bracket. 1-15/16" LG. Single-Throw.Pole.UTG Removed at Positions CTR & CW Keyswitch. Black. Color Grey. Single-Throw. Maintaining • r 15 16 17 18 r I ! • . Single-Throw.Pole. 1-15/16" LG. Self. 47/64" I. QTY. 2-55/64" LG x 1-23/64" H Pan Head Screw. 1-15/16" LG. 2-47/64" LG. 1-15/16" LG. Color Blue Mount. Single.316DMDI 316DMD2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Chicklet. CTR & CW Keyswitch.2 7069AH KEYSWITCH PART NO.UTD Removed at Position CTR Keyswitch.Throw. Single. Single.Throw. 1-15/16" LG.Pole. Keyswitch Housing. NO. Key 641Q.Pole. Single-Throw. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 396PBl 396XBl 396XB2 396XB3 182H8 396KCl 124CYI 641OWl 6410W3 6410W8 6410Wl0 6510Wll 6410W20 6410W26 250EE. Key 6410. 1.Tapping Keyswitch. Single-Throw. Spring Return. Key 6410. Key 641Q.59/64" Dia. MODULE wllNTEGRAL DESCRIPTION SWITCH • REF.UTD Removed at Positions. 1-15/16" LG. Single-Pole. Key 641Q. Single. Single-Pole.UTC Removed at Positions CTR & CW Insert. Single.UTF Removed at Position CTR Keyswitch. Key 6410.D. Key 6410. Color Red Mount. Color Grey '0' Ring. Double (see tabulation page) Bracket. Single. Single-Pole.UTC Removed at Positions CTR & CW Keyswitch. Hole. NYC ASSY. 7069AH3 7069AH6 7069AH8 7069AH9 7069AH10 7069AH12 DESCRIPTION Keyswitch Module. SES PhaseI.3 7069AH KEYSWITCH MODULE w/177CB SWITCH 2 KEY POSITION • REF. Park C. PART NO.L Keyswitch Module. Access Keyswitch Module. OF ITEMS: 2+3+8+9+11+15+33 2+5+8+9+1-1+14+33 2+5+8+9+11+16+33 2+5+8+9+11+17+33 2+4+8+9+11+18+33 2+6+7+10+12+13+19+33 NOTE: ITEMS 13 & 32 NOT SHOWN IN ARRANGEMENT ILLUSTRATED J • . Security (CAR) Keyswitch Module. SES PhaseI ANSI Keyswitch Module. EmergencyPower Keyswitch Module. NO.T. 2.. Contacts Rotary Switch. Contacts 3/8-32 Course Thread Rotary Switch. Black.UTE Removed at Position CTR (Items: 21+28+31) Keyswitch Assy. Double-Throw. 1-1/4" LG Keylock. 316DMC3 Double Insert (see tabulation nanel Silver Fin. Double-Throw.55/64" x 1-23/64" H Pan Head Screw. Hole. 2-3/4" LG x 1-3/B" H Mount. 3/8-32 Course Thread Silver Fin. Double-Throw. Dull. 1-1/4" LG Keylock. 35/64" '0' Ring. Self. U-Shape.D. Contacts Rotary Switch. Silver Fin.D. Bright Chrome Fin.. Contacts 3/8-32 Course Thread Rotary Switch.. L L Keyswitch Housing. Double 'D' Hole 11/16" Bracket. Color Blue Mount. U-Shape.UTA Position CTR (Items: 21+27+31) Keyswitch Assy.7069AH REF. 2. Fabricated Parts 316DMC2. Spring Return. Spring Return. Contacts • 316DM81 316DMB2 316DMCI 250EE .. 1-5/32" Dia. Double 'D' Hole 5/8" Bracket. 1-13/32" LG Rotary Switch. KEYSWITCH PART NO. 3/8-32 Course Thread 8racket. Key 6410. Silver Fin. Black. Key 6410..UT8 (Items: 21+24+31) Removed at Position CTR Removed at • 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Keyswitch Assy. I. Bright Chrome Fin. Chrome Fin. Key 6410. Key 641Q. Single-Pole. 3/8-32 Cou rse Thread Gold Fin.UTA Removed at Positions CCW-CTR. Key 2642 Removed at Positions CTR.. 396PB1 396XB1 396XB2 396XB3 396XB1 182H7 182H8 396KC1 396KC2 124CYI 124CYI SCMA R348x3/16CP 6410W2 6410W9 6410W5 6410W6 6410W7 6410W16 431AAI 431AA2 431AA3 A431C32 177CBl 177CB3 177CB4 177CB5 177CB6 177CB7 OTY. Spring Return. Color Red '0' Ring. Bright Chrome Fin. Double-Pole. Color Grey Mount. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MODULE w/177CB DESCR IPTION SWITCH 4 • NO. 1-59/64" Dia. Self-Tapping Pan Head Screw.Tapping Round Head Machine Screw Keyswitch Assy. Single-Pole. Hole.Throw.Throw.CW (Items: 20+26+30) Keyswitch Assy.. 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Chicklet. Key 6410. Silver Fin. Color Red Mount.. Double.CW Keyswitch Assy. Double-Pole..23/64" H Keyswitch Housing. 1-1/4" LG Keylock. Double. Color Grey.UTF (Items: 22+29+30) Removed at Positions CTR.CCW (Items: 23+25+32) Keylock.55/64" x 1. Double-Pole. Double-Throw. Contacts 318-32 Course Thread Rotary Switch.. 47/64" I. Single-Pole. SES Phase I Chicago Keyswitch Module. SES Phase II NYC Keyswitch Module. SES Phase II Chicago Keyswitch Module. LRV) Keyswitch Module. NO. OF ITEMS: 2+6+7+10+12+13+15+16i 2+6+7+10+12+13+15+17 2+6+7+10+12+13+15+18i 2+5+8+9+11+15+19 2+5+8+9+11+15+19 2+3+8+9+11+15+20 2+4+8+9+11+15+21 2+3+8+9+11+14+15+22 2+3+8+9+11+14+15+23 (MRS.5 7069AH KEYSWITCH ODULE w/177CC SWITCH . PART NO. 7069AH13 7069AH14 7069AH15 7069AH33 7069AH34 7069AH35 7069AH36 7069AH42 7069AH43 OESCRIPTION Keyswitch Module. Inspection Initiation ASSY. LRV) Keyswitch'Module.Speed (LRS) Keyswitch Module. Hospital Service (MRS) Keyswitch Module. PART NOT ILLUSTRATED . EmFrgency Power (LRS) NOTE: ITEMS ITEM 1~ & 34 NOT SHOWN IN ARRANGEMENT ILLUST~ATED 14 GENERAL LOCATION. Independent Service (M RS) Keyswitch Module. SES Phase II ANSI (MRS.1 ~ CCW CTR CW KEY POSITION • -------. Fan. 2. -- REF. Throw. CTR lit ems: Keyswitch Assy. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DESCRIPTION Chicklet.Pole.UTA Removed at Positions CCW.CCW (Items: 25+30+34) Keyswitch Assy. Color Red '0' Ring 35/64" '0' Ring 47/64" 1. 1. 1.23/64" H Pan Head Screw Self.. 48x3/16CP 316DMD2 250E 6410W17 6410W18 6410W19 6410W23 6410W24 6410W25 6410W27 OTY.5164" Dia. 2. Single. Gold Fin. Color Red Mount. Key 6410.59/64" x 1..Throw.CTR. 8right Chrome Fin. Key 2642 Removed at Positions CTR. 1. Fabricated. 1. Silver Fin. Single.Shape. Color Grey Mount. Contacts 3/&32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch. Key 6410.0.Pole. Single'Pole.UTF Removed at Pos~ CtR (Items: 27+28+36) Keyswitch Assy..13/32" Keylock. Color Grey. Hole.32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch.Pole. 1. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PART NO.7069AH KEV. 2. Single..3/4" Mount. Key 6410.Throw.. Double. 2.1/4" Keylock.• Key 6410. U.32 Fine Thread Bracket. Bright Chrome Fin. Dia.CTR. Parts 316DMC2.Shape. Color Blue Mount. Black. Double '0' Hole 5/8" Silver Fin. Contacts Silver Fin. Double.UTA Removed at Positions CCW. Contacts • 33 34 35 36 Bracket. Double.55/64" x 1. Dull Chrome Fin. Black.CW (Items: 26+28+35) Keyswitch Assy. 316DMC3 .CW (Items: 26+32+35) Keyswitch Assy.UTA Removed at Positions CTR. Double. 3/&32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch. Pole. Hole 2. 3/8.. Single.CW IItems: 26+28+35) Keyswitch Assy.• Key 6410. Key 5957 Removed at Pos. /177CC SWITCH 6 • NO. Double.55/64" L L L x 1. Double '0' Hole 11/16" Bracket U. CTR (Items: 24+29+34) • 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 24+30+34) Keyswitch Assy .Throw..23/64" H Keyswitch Housing.13/32" Keylock. 1.. Single.3/8" H Keyswitch Housing. Dull Chrome Fin. Contacts 3/8.Tapping Round Head Machine Screw Bracket MaintaininQ.. Key 5957 Removed at Pos.CW (Items: 26+33+35) Keylock.Taooin" Pan Head Screw Self..~\I\1ITCH MODUL E REF.UTD Removed at Positions CTR.0.Throw. 1. Contacts 3/&32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch.Keved Cutout page) Double Insert Isee tabulation Keyswitch Assy. Silver Fin.1/4" LG LG LG LG 6410W28 A431C31 A431C32 431AAI 431AA2 177CCI 177CC2 177CC3 177CC4 177CC5 316DMCI 316DMBI 316DMB2 Rotary Switch. 396PBl 396XBl 396XB2 396X83 396YBI 182H7' 182H8 396KCl 396KC2 124CYI 124CYI SCMA R3. ) (Items: 3+4+7) Keyswitch Assy. 1. Light.. Key 6410.). Single.CW (7155A C.Ray.7 TYPE 6410W KEYSWITCH (Lower C.Pole.CW (7155A C.CW (7155A C. Single-Pole.P. Single-Throw. NO o PART NO. Single. Key 6410-UTA Removed at Positions CTR.UTA Removed at Positions CTR..) Integral Keyswitch Assy. 3/8. 6410W3 OTY o DESCRIPTION Integral Keyswitch Assy. Double.. Silver Fin.7155P C. Contacts. Contacts. U.. Single Throw.O. Gold Fin.. Gold Fin. (Items: 3+6+7) • 6410W12 6410W14 2 2 2 3 4 5 6410W4 6410W13 6410W15 431AA1 177CC1 177CC2 1 Keyswitch Assy. Bright Chrome Fin.UTA Removed at Positions CTR. Double.Speed or Light.O.1/4" LG Rotary Switch.O. Contacts.Speed.) Keyswitch Assy.P..Throw.CW (7155A.32 Fine Thread Bracket. Single-Throw.Pole. Light Ray.) 1 • CCW CTR KEY POSITION REF.CW (7155A CoOoPol(Items: 3+5+7) Keylock. 3/8.UTA Removed at Positions CTR. 3/8. Single.Throw. Inspection. Key 6410'UTA Removed at Positions CTR. Contacts. Single. Single. Contacts.O. Key 6410.Po) Integral Keyswitch Assy.Pole. Independent Service.. Key 641Q. Single. Fan 1.Shape.32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch. Gold Fin.CW (7155A CoO. Contacts.Pole. Fan 2.32 Fine Thread Rotary Switch. Key 6410.UTA Removed at Positions CTR.P.P.Pole. Silver Fin.Throw. Double 'D' Hole 11/16" Silver Fin.P. 6 7 177CC4 316DMHI • .O. TYPE: 250E KEYSWITCH 7069AH1 7069AH5 7069AH35 250El1 F.' Insert: 7069AH12 250E22 1..f< Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH33 250E32 \~I"=1 Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH11 7069AH13 7069AH15 7069AH36 250E20 ~ Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH38 250E33 .- off KeysV'Jitch: Insert: 7069AH10 250E21 00 Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH42 250E34 ..e on off Keyswitch: --.= SeNIt~ 1\0''''1>.. ~3 I ~~~~ Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH2 250E12 'f".\rt XtviU • Ir I PrICl"i'ty 5U1ic.M !lAy .. • on F'ire 5ervICC •. Keyswitch: Insert: Fo<..... INSERTS Keyswitch: 8 Insert: ..-.\ Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH14 250E24 ~I •.. aIf Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH3 250E13 [f] Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH40 250E25 .250E19 [::1 L. • 7069AH6 7069AH43 250E16 Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH28 250E29 tOo" 'to ItltIby •••• • Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH8 250E18 D cU ••• 'of Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH33 250E31 IA~'":1 Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH9 .. Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH4 7069AH37 250E14 [fJ on ~~~t1df Keyswitch: Insert: 7069AH41 250E26 • (WO:~t • • ... • • . C-3049 ----------------TYPE 7777A ILLUSTRATED 1983 • • ~UNITED TECHNOLOGIES OTIS ELEVATOR .Parts Leaflet • DOOR OPERA TOR TYPE: 7777A CENTER OPEN-42" A7777A CENTER OPEN-42" A7777G SINGLE SLlDE-42" A7777H SINGLE SLlDE-36" NOVEMBER. 32 X .L Dj:SCRIPTION -. 7. Cam & Switch Assy. U. 4-Slots. (wfPulse Width Modulation Cntl. 1/2" Dia.D. 20. 316DNF1 316DND1 *Recommended 1 Motor.75" Long (A7777 A Qperatorl 1 Bushin 1 _ Clutch Assy .. ILLUSTRATED ASSY. 2" Dia .75 2 Air Cord Sheave and Bracket • Spare Part tGeneral Location. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 I PART NO.7 REF NO. Part Not Illustrated oSee Detail on Separate Page • .D. Cam & Switch Assy. 409DMf°7777D a 7777D a 7777R a 7777C1 316DNM1 135BP4 316DNS1 A316DNSl t 321 ES1 a A7777B1 • 81 DF 1 • 129CP6 • 456FC1 • 456FB1 65EF10 288ST1 VP-782017 ---..2 TYPE: (A)7777 A CENTER OPEN OPERATOR 17 16 OPERATOR W/TYPE 77770 MOTOR & CAM ASSY. • \ 12 2 ________ 5 15 14 3 1 19 4 8 6.1" Long 1 Cam Bracket 2. 8 Hanger Roller.HeaderSi"Ton----------- ~85HN1 . 1/J" Dia.311 X .. 8 Balls. ~" Dia_ . . 4 Upthrust Roller. ..-..62 1 Tube. Cadium Plated 2 __Door Hanger. 20.S. Cam & Switch Assy. m:. Canada (wfResistor Control) 1 Motor.38" O.Type G Contact 1 Cover. 13" Long 2 8umper.82" Long 1 GAL... (w/Resistor Control) 1 Motor. 1. _ 3_ U-8olt 1 Gate Switch Bracket. 1 Bracket. 87.Slots .--. 7 Balls. _1_________ Rod.) 1 Drive Nut and Screw Assy.75" Long (7777A Operator) 2 Door Hanger.---.48" I. Tinnec!..rE._L_1 327LK1 CPG-BOST-FLEX-11736 316DNH1 .~t Clamp Clamp Light Fixture 48" Long.TYPE: (A)7777A CENTER OPEN OPERATOR ASSY . 1. Ring. ~_:l~_:':"'!::ong_ External Retaining Ring Wheel Closer w/Bracket.--l_~._Bost. 299AJT3. Terminal Block 20 Circuits.!!i. ' 1 __ 1 1 1 Airc. Canada Light Fixture 48" Long. 36 34 29. Flex Coupling ~.5" Wide Bra~ls.~~_]~. U.. Consist of Parts: 6940AR1. _ 25 -26 27 28 29 30 31 32 - _._-----20 21 22 23 ---24 174AS10 CL~MP~FL._. 3-1/2" _ REF NO.-'i1-SDNG'--------336JR1 336GF1 L1GHTFX 3V277 FAN 7F617 P303CG1 RING 1001-50 • 6940BC1 - 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 Lon9. -----.(j:: LO-"!L ._-----~~--_. Spirator.37 3 • 21 27 22 20 33 32 • 23 24 PART NO.9. Bracket Bearing 1/2" Connector 1/2" Conduit 1/2" Elbow 6" Fan. Standard Muffler Clamp 1-1/4" Cam Follower-------~---------_.acket. Cana~ _ 33 34 35 36 BRG6005-2RS 440AA2 342AP20 440G1 FAN-R401 LIGHTFX6048HST-2140 * Recommended Spare Part 2 1 1 1 1 37 • 38 1 ._. 172DR6.S.S. 6" Fan. U. ==-~--_. .IY._..4 TYPE: A7777(G)(H) SINGLE SLIDE OPERATOR ASSY 14 2 13 • I A7777G = 42" SINGLE SLIDE DOOR A7777H = 36" SING LE SLIDE DOOR ._.Slots.H. Motor R. Upthrust Roller.782017 3160NFl 3160NF2 Drive Screw Assy.75 oSee Detail on Separate Page * Recommended Spare Part tGeneral Location. 20. Motor L.0.8 11 5 REF NQ•. 1" Oia.48" 1. Motor L.75 Left Hand Cam Bracket 2'Slots. .2RS • 81DFl • 129CP6 456FC1 • 456FB1 • VP.bIO.. Part Not Illustrated • .311 X ..75" Left Hand Door Long Hanger 1 2 2 Ri ht Hand Ooor Hanger Bushing Bearing 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 4 2 1 1 1 Rod 1/2" Oia. 36" 1 1 1 1 1 Orive Screw Assy. 4090R1 4090R2 4090S1 4090S2 TYPE °7777R Q._. 42" Opening Tube 42': Opening Tube 36" Opening Ooor Han er. 36" Header.311 X .Type G Contact Right Hand Cam Bracket 2..___ -Header ---- OESCR IPTION 42" Ri ht Hand 0 enin Left Hand 0 enin Right Hand Opening Left Hand Openin and Cam Pack Assy. 42" and Cam Pack Assy.0. 1 . 36" R.38" 0.• 13" Long Bumper 1. 7 Balls.~ I I 1 12 1 4 7. . 42" and Cam Pack Assy.H. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .H.__. Motor 3 4 5 6 7 o 7777C2 c7777C3 135BP6 135BP7 A3160NSl A3160NS3 A3160NS4 t321 ESl tBRG6005. 36" and Cam Pack Ass . GAL.J'IillT. 36" Opening • Opening Opening Opening Opening Header 42" Header. Han er Roller 8 Balls 2" Oia.H.. 25 22-24 I 21 5 • 28.TYPE: A7777(G)(H) SINGLE SLIDE OPERATOR ASSY.29 19 15 26 20 • 16 • . ..16 . Socket Head Shoulder Screw 1/4Xl/2" Gib Bubber Bumper Compres. 9/16" Dia. Nylon Roller. 8.--I I I I I I I I I I I I I I • I I 3 4-I I I .9 SPG-C0420-03B-2500 SPG-LC-051G-l0 A327KVl 82A82 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 .6" Long BrassWasher.17 .• 3.sion Spring a Sprin9 Vane Vane Pin. 1" Dia. A7777Bl A396JRl Bush-B-B1420 RING PR-500 327KWI A327KWI 456FDI OTY.81" Long • RECOMMENDED SPARE PART -ASSEMBLY NOT AVAILABLE AS REPLACEMENT PART' ORDER THE A7777Bl AS REPLACEMENT °FOR REFERENCE ONLY • ..6 .18 327KVl 12BA6 456ERI -7777Bl 396JRl ------------PART NO. 5 / I I 1 I 2 18 I I 14 /' /' 6 /' / /'/'. 1 • 2 • 3 4 5 • 6 • 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 .------7 16 /' /' /' ) / ..J DESCRIPTION Clutch Assembly Complete Vane Housing Vane Housing • Ball Bushing Retaining Vane Vane Rings Shaft/Roller Assy.. NO. /' 1 L ------REF. I .375" Dia..-.. 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 386BRDI BUMPER NO..-------- TYPE: (A)7777B CLUTCH VANE ASSEMBLY ------------. ..22" Long Screw.- ASSEMBLY -.. Center Open Doors Assembly Complete.J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 *396JT1 *81 DH1 *8RG.72" O.TYPE: 7777C DRIVE NUT & SCREW r... Truarc Ring Spacer. Door. 1" Long Long. - 7 I QTY. 36" Screw.22" 5.22" Long Long ~ 8 9 *82A83 *GROMMET 7777C1 7777C2 7777C3 *RECOMMENDED Pin. 54.5...N5000.94" Long Rubber Grommet Assembly Complete.75 462HA 108 *490HRl *490HR4 *490HR7 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2034 2 1 1 1 SPARE PART Roll Nut Pin 1. 42" 5.R. 42" Door . 48.. --PART NO.- .4A.5. NO.- - -- • / I / 10-12 / / I I I I I / / / / / I I I I / / / I I I I / / / / I / ( I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I • I I I I 8 I I I I I 9 L REF. Door. 7 . 36" Door • 10 11 2 Assembl.44" Dia.D.y Complete. 35. . 3.1/2" Bearing Sleeve 8ushing... . 1.77 335E101 RING. Tapped Screw... 1/4" Dia. Center Open Doors.DESCRIPTION .. 3 *327MK1 78BBl 135BP5 4TPl BRW3 BUSH. Gear Plate w Cutout witch oller ever Spacer (To Cam Pack) Threaded Rod. 5. S.1 135BP8 8USH-ANTI. DESCR IPTION Motor. 4. NO.FF.Y24050 386B W1 386BRW2 SWCH.FF.X.165" Long reade a on Bushing exagona a t.5" Long Bronze Bearing Cam haft ssem Iy aft Spacer. Motor Canada Spur Gear Motor Bracket Connector 3 8" Conduit Spur Gear Gear Plate ousing.B6 255FEl BUSH.8 TYPE: 1 7777D 17 MOTOR 6 2 3 14/ & CAM ASSEMBLY A1 16 15 11 • r---------------~ 21 ' I 1 I I I 8 6 I I 2 I \ 9 I I IL . U.SHORT 494J Rl 327MJ1 VP. 1.10GN2. QTY. ong Cam Brush-6333CG 1&2 Brush Holder-6333CG 1&2 Brush Cap-6333CGUl'1-_ I * GEAR 1M2-Y24012 324Al CON-EFCOR2050 342AP22 G EA R 1M2.303. I 22 ~_~ I USED WITH 7777E 1 RESISTOR CONTROL ASSEMBLY 12 REF.723466 VP-723467 VP-723468 *Recommended Spare Part tGeneral Location. Part Not Illustrated 1 1 2 1 1 • 7 1 2 1 1 10 4 4 18 20 22 23 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 3 2 1 24 25 11 2 2 2 • . PART *6333CG1 NO.303.453" Long Cover Gear Plate Housing Bronze Bearing Spacer. tJ 1 ~- 7 / 4 6 13 15 ~/ ~ 1/ ~ ~ 1 173 .S" 110V DC.H. 800RPM • REF: NO 1 PART NO. R. 110V DC. 42" Servo Cam Pack. Bracket.9 TYPE: 7777R 17__~ 16~ MOTOR 9 10 & CAM ASSEMBLY 12 • / 2 crY •.1" Long 6333CG1&2 1 1 As Reqd. 4. 1 1 1 1 1 5 6 7 CDS-B1-3 96CJ39 285JN1 CON-EFCOR2050 342AP22 BUSH-ANTI-SHORT 440G2 342AP23 BUSH-ANTI-SHORT 255XB12 *VP-723466 *VP 723467 *VP-723468 *RECOMMENDED SPARE PART 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 Threaded Rod Cadmium Plated. 800RPM Bracket. 36" Servo Cam Pack. Bracket. Motor Motor U..H. L. Right Hand Left Hand Bracket. 36" Coaxial Coupling B-32 Cover Connector Center Open Doors Single Slide Door. *A6333CG1 *A6333CG2 Canada.H.~' 14 3 11 \ USED WITH 7777T1 PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR ASSEMBLY 1 OTY. R. 42" Servo Cam Pack. Single Slide Door. Right Hand Left Hand 2 3 324A1 324A2 3160SFl 316DSF2 1 1 1 Cam Pack Mounting Cam Pack Mounting 1 1 *327LM1 '327LM2 4 *327UV13 *327LM4 *327LM5 Servo Cam Pack. L. • 2 2 2 Brush 6333CG 1&2 Brush Holder Brush Cap-6333CG 1&2 .6" Lonn 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 31B" Conduit Bushing 900 Elbow. Single Slide Door. 3. 314" 314" Flex Conduit Bushing Shim. 1 1 5 DESCR IPTION Motor. Single Slide Door. 42" Servo Cam Pack. Motor.H. 10 TYPES: I' 7777(E)(T) ,., CONTROL ASSEMBLIES i(i~~ 1 1 !Un ~ . !'.',~~: 'I". ., Ilii hi' I!. " IIlilJ "I L I 1 t \1 i ,\ \ 1 1----2-------4----------1 3 00 i • : 1 01 02 "j J':'o' i:J' .' \""'1""'. il;. ••, •.. 1hr" H."", I" \ .;:'1 ,J,:: I I I I I : r------------------I I I I 1 I 1 1 : I rtl~ lU: • '- __ ---' 10,1 /11 I I I L 5 6,7 I I : 1 .-J : 1 1 i I I I L 1. I I I I :::.::::::: : I 8 I \: \ "'" - '"'" I 1 I ~ 7777E = RESISTOR CONTROL W,",H M"OWO' OO',"DC r-5"cREF NO, 1 -O.!..~---'oo 9 • PART NO, 7777E1 *P232EFl *P232EF2 *P232EF5 P190ARl V440AJl 67AM1 P303CG1 7777Tl *AB121CHl * AB121CH2 *Recommended OTY, 1 Resistor DESCRIPTION Box Assembly Complete Mtg, Bracket & Lug Mtg, Bracket & Lug Mtg, Bracket & Lug 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 2 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 Spare Part 50 OHM Resistor with 100 OHM Resistor with 150 OHM Resistor with Adjustable Lug (Extra) Chase Nipple Conduit Terminal Lock Nut Block, 20 Terminals, B,16" Long B 9 10 Pulse Width Modulator Pulse Width Modulator Pulse Width Modulator Assy" Less PC Board Board, S,S, Door Board, C.O, Doors • • • • • Parts Leaflet 215DT MACHINE C-3069 APRIL 1983 , ,:1 I i \ tI I I • t-..' .... , ."'"' • . J ..,. _. :"" . ,~ •m UNITED INT'L. NO. 06- 7575AD, AJ TECHNOLOGIES OTIS 1 TYPE 7575AD GEARBOX ASSEMBLY -. SUPPLIED GEARBOX WITH 22 WIT H 15,16,17 6 12 • I L .r . "..J 4 21 2 • TYPE 7575AD DWGS.: MAT'L. REF. NO. 1 2 3 GEARBOX 7575AD, QTY. 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 2 1 1 1 2 4 2 6 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 ASSEMBLY 75758 thru 4 DESCRIPTION GEAR 80X LISTS 7575AD1 PART / M.L. NO. 757585 A386BRVl PLATE 192Y5 82A85 8lDJI 81DJ2 338AVI 98EW3 492AVI KEY PIN PIN PIN CLEVIS TORQUE ARM MOUNTING YOKE COTTER PIN 5/32Xl-l/2LG NUT WASHER SPRING LOCKWASHER NUT CONNECTOR (ARR. #4 ONLY) SENSOR (ARR. #4 ONLY) BOLT (ARR. #1;2,3) WASHER SHIMS .0149 SHIMS .0299 SHIMS .0598 SHIMS .0149 SHIMS .0299 SHIMS .0598 SHIMS .0149 SHIMS .0299 SHIMS .0598 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 + 15 16 +17 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 23 --NUT FH5/8CP WSR SAE5/8 WSR LK5/8 NUT FH3/4-16 CONN 41010 SENSOR 725989 BTFH 5/8-18Xl/2CP 1 SAE WASHER 255AB152 255AB153 255AB154 255VA28 255VA29 255VA30 255VA31 255VA32 255VA33 • . 7575B/ 36 740 (AWHI 7575B/ 19 30 1 (AWl OIL SEAL, LOW SPEEV SHAFT OIL SEAL, HIGH SPEED SHAFT • 3 TYPE 7575AJ GEARBOX ASSEMBLY - . • REF. NO. 1 DWGS.: 75758, 7575AJ, ER-7575AJ 7575AJ1 thru 4 _ MAT'L. LISTS PART/ QTY M.L. NO. 7575B5 DESCRIPTION GEARBOX 1 2 3 4 316DRYl 192Y5 1 1 BRACKET KEV 5 386BEL28 BTFH S/8X2-1/2A32STYPEI NUT FHS/8 WSR LKS/8 BTFH S/8X7-1/2A32STYPEI 7575BI36740(AWH) - 1 2 2 2 5 PLATE BOLT NUT SPRING LOCKWASHER BOLT 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 - or L OIL SEAL, SEAL, LOW SPEEV HIGH SPEEV 7575B/19 30 1 (AW) • . •.•. ".4 TYPE 7575AN .---. NO... LISTS: ER-7575AN. """"- I I I I I I I " " . PART/ M......•. L._ . "~..... BRAKE . 4 DESCRIPTION 7575ANI BRAKE . •. ..I' ""- " "1 I I I .....: MAT'L. "- ASSEMBLY r---- .• ""- • REF.•.J I I DWGS..ASSEMBLY COMPLETE • ITEMS IN SCRIPT ARE RECOMMENDED SPARE . 7575AN.. • l. 1 t hr u 7575AJ QTY...• . ".. .... 1 I I I ~ "" " '- ______ . NO. ".. .••. .••.••. . .. .. LISTS: 7575P. ". ...: MAT'L. .. I I I I .... ". ".••. .••..••..... ... NO...••.••... ... 7575Pl QTY.. .••. 8 .. RE: GEARBOX INPUT SHAFT .. ..•. NO.. .•.••.. /1 .•. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ITEMS PART/ M. ER-7575P 7575AD 1 t hr u REF. 0 .I I ...••.••.. .••. . .5 TYPE t- 7575P .. .•.......••... '1 'ITllJ' rot 10 RU toIIPJI' I .. ..••.L.....••..••.••..••..••.... -.......••.... . .••. • ..••. BRAKE ASSEMBLY .. . .••.••..••.. .••.••. -4 DESCRIPTION DWGS.-.. .••..••..... .." 1 1 8 1 1 1 3 3 RECOMMENDED • .•. I I I I I I l.••. 1 1 1 1 BRAKE ASSEMBLY COMPLETE LOCKNUT LOCKWASHER WASHER HUB COIL ASSEMBLY SPRING ARMATURE PLATE FRICTION DISC PRESSURE PLATE HEX SOC CAP SCREW 5/16Xl BUSHING SPARE LOCKNUT N-06 LOCKWASHER W-06 127VB153 7575P/D-389144 7575P/D-389302 7575P/D-233775 7575P/D-233781 7575P/D-389143 7575P/D-389142 --IN SCRIPT ARE . 7575AG1 7575AG2 263BG2 263BH2 263BG1 263BH1 A263BG1 A263BH1 251BV12 251BT21 QTY. 25" 22-1/2" 49SDJ2 316DPH1 63EF12 BEARING MRC21S-SZZ.6 TYPE r I 1 7575AG DEFLECTOR >----7 SHEAVE ASSEMBLY ------=-- -. .J REF. 11 3' 2~ I I I I 7 I I I I I I 14 I I 1 L __ I I I I ----------_-! 6 I I I I I I 1 1 L I _ • . NO. 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 *4 *4 5 6 7 8 PART/ M. I I I I 1 1 r I 1 1 I I 1"\ 10. 2 2 2 4 4 3 • 9 10 11 12 FLAT WASHER SPARE RECOMMENDED . 25" DEFLECTOR SHEAVE ASSEMBLY 22-1/2" DEFLECTOR SHEAVE ASSEMBLY 25" DEFLECTOR SHEAVE WITH INSERTS 22-1/2" DEFLECTOR SHEAVE WITH INSERTS 25" SHEAVE WITH INSERT GROOVE 22-1/2" SHEAVE WITH INSERT GROOVE 25" SHEAVE W/O INSERT GROOVE 22-1/2" SHEAVE W/O INSERT GROOVE . I I I I -------------.L. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 1 2 DESCRIPTION. NO. INSERT. INSERT.. DIN472 130 NUT FHJ1/2CP NUT FH1/2CP WSR SAE1/2CP *PART NOT ILLUSTRATED ITEMS IN SCRIPT ARE DEFLECTOR SHAFT BRACKET U-BOLT BEARING RETAINING RING NUT NUT . -- TYPE 7575AD -----------~.----- ~----.-------------------------------.. I GEARBOX I 61 I I I I I I REF.-I I - . TYPE ARRANGEMENT ~ 13 14 15 L ~ __ -l . BEDPLATE I I I tr _ ____________ 7: 51 I I I I • L J . ARRANGEMENT • I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 18 1 I I I I I I I I REF...7 DRIVE I SHEAVE 7575AJ ASSEMBLY I . 1 1 1 2 2 2 PARTl M. 26" ORI VE SHEAVE. NO. 2-SLOT SHIM. SPL LOCKWASHER. LISTS: REF.: . 260CK1 260CJ3 QTY. 7575AJ 1 thru 4 • DWGS. 25" 260CJI +251BT21 +251BV10 +251BV11 SOOBGI SOOBFI BTFH1/B-I4X2-I/2 I27VBIS2 WSR 7/BSAE WSR LK7/B BTFH 7/8X3 LOCKNUT AN-I8 LOCKWASHER W-I8 NUT FH7/8CP 255VA34 255VA35 255VA36 INSERTS TO PART 260CKI INSERTS TO PART 260CJ3 INSERTS TO PART 260CJI DRIVE SHAFT DRIVE SHAFT BOLT WASHER WASHER SPRING LOCKWASHER BOLT LOCKNUT.L. 2-SLOT 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 AS SHOWN AS SHOWN AS SHOWN 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 6 7 B • 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ITEMS IN 192Y3 192Y4 PILLOWBLOCK MP-47 + PART NOT ILLUSTRATED SCRIPT ARE 1 AS SHOWN SPARE KEY KEY PILLOWBLOCK RECOMMENDED • <t . SPL NUT SHIM.8 DRIVE SHEAVE 7575AD. 2-SLOT SHIM. 1 1 1 4 3 3 DESCRIPTION DRIVE SHEAVE. MAT'L. 22-1/2" DRIVE SHEAVE. NO. 1 thru 7575AD ASSEMBLY 7575AJ 4. 9 MOTOR ENCODER & TACHOMETER ASSEMBLIES "e. r -. " :Q .. . ( II 17 .S -- 8\ 20 16 19 IllS Till laaDlaar '" .'TOI • RE: MACHINE 9. C1 o ( 6 ir .10 11 RUBBER COUPLING PAD COUPL ING 2 1 • .ll{i. \\ I (C\~.. J . 1«1 13 b - n. e 18 15 .. NO. 1 thru 7575AJ 4. ENCOVER ENCOVER 14972 1496 8 * B81VKl • 13 14 15 . (7575AJ ARR) (7575AV * SENSOR ARR) 272BKXl 336CZ8 DIN8s MsX6 DIN6797 Js DIN8s M6X20 DIN6797 J6 SPROCKET SPROCKET ANGLE CLAMP .. SHAFT. 9708G3 QTY. PAN HEAD SCREW LOCKWASHER PAN HEAD SCREW LOCKWASHER SPROCKET SPROCKET PIN PIN SHAFT. 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PART M. HEAD SCREW ADAPTOR SENSOR SENSOR 2040C 2030C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 4 4 1 1 1 1 .: • .10 MOTOR ENCODER LISTS: & TACHOMETER 7575AD. 16 17 18 19 20 + A81VKI NUT MSIO-32CP ROD 10-32X2 FULL THD SCCP HSOC4-40Xs/16 ENCOVER LC23 NUT THREADED ENCOVER ROD HEX. 1 9 1 DESCRIPTION TACHOMETER DIN912 M6X20 A270ARI + SENSOR HEX SOC. 7575AD ASSEMBLIES 1 thru 4 DWGS. NO. 7575AJ REF. SOCKET SCREW 386BRLI COUPLI NG T15-14 PLATE COUPLING A316DPJl *FOR TYPE 7s75AJ ARRANGEMENT +FOR TYPE 7575AD ARRANGEMENT ITEMS IN SCRIPT ARE RECOMMENDED BRACKET .SPARE • I . --- MAT'L.V. ----. -I I I I I 1 -----. I 1 3. 1 1 1 2 3 4 6333CV. L.. 215BH DESCRIPTION PART/ M. 20 35 30 30 HP: HP: HP: HP: 1100 1670 1100 1800 RPM RPM RPM RPM BLOWER COMPLETE SPIRAL HOUSING-MRV BLOWER MOTOR COUPLING 1 1.. 1 1 1 6333CX. I I I I I I 1 RE: BRAKE HUB 1 L __ _ _ ___ _. MOTOR. NO.: \ :: I L _ 'e d _ --=. AR. MOTOR..~ -=-_ 4 ~_ 5 £_-_ -=. QTY. r I I ::-_ ~ .E RECOMMENDED I . .: REF.__ -I :: I I I I I I I I I I I I . NO. MOTOR._ I I I I I 'I 1 I I I L L _ _________ ~ I I ) I I I I I L- I I -.11 MOTORS & COUPLING 6 r--. RE: MOTOR SHAFT -.-l r -..J -1 I DWGS.----1 L------. _ _ _ "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ '_ _ . 5 6 6333CXl 6333CX2 6333CX3 6333CVl VP-708010 VP-874550 VP-708000 21SBHl 1 1 1 MOTOR.1 I ! 7 ITEMS IN 215BH 1 jSFP-60 SCRIPT 2 FLEX-VISCS SPARE 6" VIA. . 3 3 .: ' I I .I ".J L _ . t ARR..--l-~-l- I -I • r------ . ' " 9 9 . ------.... I I I r------I I . J---------.. .. I I I I I . I 9 .' t'--16 ~ 19 • " 19' I _---16 17 I L _ -------. '24~"( . . I I I 11 : I .15'1 18 I '1 I /' ( I I -. ___ 26 r----- 11 ___14 .12 TYPE 7575AK r----- FOUNDATION 2- & SOUND ISOLATION • 31- 13. 1 thru 3 J ARR.-. •••.. . o . I ~17 . . 4 ARR.I.. <EXCEPT 1 THRU AS 4 NOTED) . . I I I I I I I I .... : ~" I (J) 'r . 4 . ~ I I .. . ARR. .. . . 7575T ISOLATION 7575T1 DWGS. .. 622G1. » N s .. & SOUND 622G. . N ~ e . ~ liS " N N ... 7575AK500. FORI-lED ROPE GUARD BLOCKING.. .: ~ ... N N N ~ N -~ :!i~ ~~ .J..4 14 4 4 14 4 1 1 DESCRIPTION CONSTANT PARTS. ~ ili ~ ~ •• e ... PART/ 7575AK500-PARTIAL 7575AK501-PARTIAL 384TT! 127C5 310BE3 310BEI 137AL7 283WC3 384TG8 304CX3 298PXl 310JJI 386BEL29 BTFH 1/4Xl BTFH 3/4X5 NUT FHl/4 NUT FH3/4CP NUT FHJ3/4CP WSR LKI/4 WSR LK3/4 622Gl 622Hl -. ~ . 4) FLAT WASHER ROPE GUARD . ~~ O~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ . BEAM BAR BLOCK URETHANE PLATE BOLT BOLT NUT NUT NUT LOCKWASHER LOCKWASHER LOAD CELL LOAV CELL 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 . 1 1 1 4 4 3 4 2 1 2 2 1 2 14 .\ N ~ N . (ARRANGEMENT 4) ROPE GUARD WASHER BLOCK BLOCK RUBBER WBING ANGLE.\ N N N ~ .\ N ~ N N (.. .: 7575AK501.J. ~g ~ ~ ... ll: gi Q . ~ ~ ~. (ARRANGEMENTS 1 thru 3) CONSTANT PARTS. r. Q o 0 N o ~ N N ~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~ g ~ 2 :::: ~ ~ 0 ~ N i !:: & MOUNTING PLATE 105JKl BTFH 1/4X5/8CP 127XA42 377AL4 BTFH 3/4X6-1/2 BTFH 3/4X6-1/2F NUT FHJ3/4CP WSR STD3/4 (SEE TABLE) 7575T! ITEMS IN SCRIPT ARE 1 4 6 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 PLATE BOLT STEEL WASHER PIPE SPACER BOLT BOLT NUT (QTY. 5 W/ ARR. N . 7575AK LISTS: FOUNDATION 7575AK. LOAD WEIGHING CONTROL BOX SPARE RECOMMENDED • . N QTY. .13 TYPE MAT'L. ~. REF. 0 ~ ~ e ~ ~ i " N ~ @ e ~~ ~~~ 0 ~ ~~ ~~ .. • • . Documents Similar To Manual OtisSkip carouselcarousel previouscarousel nextotis software basic dataOTIS GEN2 Za Programming ToolGBA 26800 H IV OVF 20 Service_toolOtis Mcs 220c Gen2Gba26800bbi Fc1 Service Pandel Board-2 (2)Otis Parts ListGen2_(_¹¤µØ°²×°µ÷ÊÔ)_×ÊÁÏMCS - LCB II List of ParametersTCBCotis engineering center gien field component manualOTIS NE-300 (Diagramas 3767-ST de Maniobras Automatic As)Thyssen Diagnostic 1LCB_II_I-OMcs220m Lcb2 Ovf20 DiagramOtis Man Ne300Manual TK-50.pdf2009 CPIK All Operating Manual v.1Otis Mcs Lcb Oi Parametersdcss4Otis Gen2 SpecificationsLCE Terminal Using Instructions With Logo KONECOMPONENTS GEN 2.pdfGM.2.002796.EN.01OTIS Elevator 3200 DrawingsG3008008(B) Commisioning Procedure for MRLDiagrama Controle ADV 210 Com OVF10 (BAA21340G)Kone Elevator Maintenance ManualGAA30328BAA Dcss5 Service Tool Reference ListGba 26800 h II StartupMore From Marielba BernottySkip carouselcarousel previouscarousel nextDatos de AntenaP__AT&T Ericsson - Sacramento_2010 LTE Sites_CNU3657_01-Construction_Rev 4_CNU3657 T-1 (1)Dialux Tutorial55085267-ZXSDR-BS8900-GU360-V4-09-21-Outdoor-GSM-UMTS-Dual-Mode-Macro-Node-B-System-Description.pdfT17KM.pdfT17KMEstructuras y Soportes - Soltel (Todos Juntos)FSEBFSEB.docxDatos de AntenaEQUIPOS IMAGENES.pptxMT-196-14Antena LTE 80010734V01(KRE 101 2224 1)MT-196-14.pdfSF-QV10-BexamenRADIOFRECUENCIACAP 3 Coordinación de aislaimientoSensor Es80010306V02_(9364785a).pdfTorta DORAarticle2009-5covenin 620.1Hbxx 3817tb1 Vtm DatasheetClases de Ascensores1724e300Subestaciones144933417 Libro Ascensores PDF50992820 Caracterizacion de La Carga en Sistemas Electricos de DistribucionproximyFooter MenuBack To TopAboutAbout ScribdPressOur blogJoin our team!Contact UsJoin todayInvite FriendsGiftsLegalTermsPrivacyCopyrightSupportHelp / FAQAccessibilityPurchase helpAdChoicesPublishersSocial MediaCopyright © 2018 Scribd Inc. .Browse Books.Site Directory.Site Language: English中文EspañolالعربيةPortuguês日本語DeutschFrançaisTurkceРусский языкTiếng việtJęzyk polskiBahasa indonesiaSign up to vote on this titleUsefulNot usefulYou're Reading a Free PreviewDownloadClose DialogAre you sure?This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?CANCELOK